JP2020069180A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To prevent the risk of causing decline in amusement of games of a player having distrust in games, although an amount of prize balls obtained by big win games is indicated, due to difficulty in understanding whether the obtained amount is relatively large or small; in traditional game machines there are some machines, if consecutive big wins occur in which a plurality of big win games is performed in a short period, performing a presentation indicating how much amount of prize balls is obtained during the consecutive big wins by displaying the amount of prize balls obtained by the big win games and thus amusement of games has been enhanced by enhancing a sense of expectation for occurrences of a big wins by game presentations and by the player's understanding of the amount of prize balls obtained by the big win games.SOLUTION: The present invention is devised due to the above circumstances and to provide a game machine capable of preventing decline in amusement of games, while indicating the obtained amount of game profits.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 83

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine, and is particularly applicable to a pachinko gaming machine and the like.

  In the conventional gaming machine, based on the ball entering the starting opening, the winning / judging determination is made with a predetermined jackpot probability and the symbol is variably displayed, and when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the symbol is stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol. There was a big hit game that opened the winning opening. In addition, a game effect (reach effect, character effect, etc.) is executed in accordance with the variable display of the symbol, and the result of the hit / miss judgment may be a big hit depending on the execution mode of the game effect, that is, the symbol is a big hit symbol and is stopped and displayed. The possibility of doing so has been shown (for example, Patent Document 1).

  In addition, by displaying the amount of prize balls obtained by the big hit game, when a condominium in which a plurality of big hit games are executed in a short period occurs, how much prize ball amount was won in the condominium. There was a game machine that produced the effect. As a result, the expectation for the big hit occurrence is increased by the game production, and the amusement of the game is enhanced by grasping the prize ball amount obtained in the big hit game.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 10-57583

  In the gaming machine as described above, the amount of prize balls won by the big hit game is shown, but it is difficult to know whether the amount of win is relatively large or small. As a result, there is a fear of distrust of the game, which may lead to a decline in the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances described above, and provides a gaming machine capable of preventing a decrease in amusement of a game while showing the gained amount of gaming profit.

The gaming machine of the first invention for solving the above-mentioned problems,
Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on establishment of a predetermined condition,
Special game execution means for executing a special game capable of obtaining a predetermined amount of game profit when the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result,
Along with the variable display of the identification information, a game effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined game effect,
And a profit information display unit capable of displaying profit information indicating the amount of gaming profit acquired,
As the game effect, there is a first game effect and a second game effect,
The first game effect is characterized by displaying a specific character and showing a higher possibility as an executability of the special game than the second game effect.

  According to such a gaming machine, the gaming machine is executed along with the variable display of the identification information, and has the first game effect and the second game effect indicating the possibility of executing the special game. The first game effect is a game effect that displays a specific character, and is a game effect that has a higher possibility of executing a special game than the second game effect.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that prevents a decrease in the interest of the game while showing the amount of game profit obtained.

It is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a back view of the game machine which concerns on the Example of this invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the Example of this invention. It is an enlarged view of the main display unit shown in FIG. 3, and is a view showing display units included in the same gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the same gaming machine. It is a table showing the correspondence between the type of winning and the opening pattern of the special winning opening. It is a table showing various random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer. (A) is a big hit judgment table, (B) is a big hit type judgment table, (C) is a reach judgment table, (D) is a normal symbol hit judgment table, (E) is a normal symbol fluctuation It is a pattern selection table. It is a table which shows a fluctuation pattern table. It is a flow chart of main control main processing. It is a flowchart of an interrupt process. It is a flowchart of a starting opening sensor detection process. It is a flow chart of processing at the time of starting entry. It is a flowchart of a universal figure operation process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol standby process. It is a flow chart of a normal symbol hit / miss judgment processing. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of processing during normal symbol variation. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal electric auditors product processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 operation processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 1 standby process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 hit / miss judgment processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 1 during the process. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 1 determination process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 operation processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 2 standby process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 2 success / failure determination processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 random number shift processing. It is a flow chart of the special symbol 2 during the process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 2 determination process. It is a flowchart of special electric auditors product processing 1 (big hit game). It is a flowchart of a big hit game start processing. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of a special figure operation status setting process 1. It is a flowchart of special electric auditors product processing 2 (small hit game). It is a flowchart of special figure operation status setting processing 2. It is a flowchart of the number of reserved balls. It is a flow chart of power failure monitoring processing. It is a flowchart of sub-control main processing. It is a flowchart of a reception interruption process. It is a flow chart of 2ms timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart of a 10 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flow chart of received command analysis processing. It is a flow chart of variation production start processing. It is the table which shows the design kind of production design. It is the explanation drawing which shows the flow of the production design game production of state A. It is the explanation drawing which shows the flow of the production design game production of state B. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display screen of production mode C, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen of production mode D. It is the explanation drawing which shows the flow of the production design game production of production mode C. It is the explanation drawing which shows the flow of the production design game production of production mode D. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the display screen during the small hit change in production mode D, and (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display screen during the small hit game in production mode D. It is a flowchart of a small hit prefetching effect process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the effect | action when a specific period is started. It is a figure showing an example of a mode selection screen during an ending period. It is a diagram showing an example of a display screen from before the start of the mode selection period during the big hit game to after the start. (A) is a table showing the type of the second effect pattern (battle effect pattern of effect mode C), (b) is a table showing the type of the third effect pattern (battle effect pattern of effect mode D). It is the figure which shows the indicatory example of indicatory picture in production mode D. It is a display pattern determination table of a notice image. It is the figure which shows one example of the display contents of production design game production. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of a 1st specific effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of a 1st specific effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of a 2nd specific effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the 2nd specific effect A. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the 2nd specific effect B. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the 2nd specific effect C. (A) It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of 1st notice production (production reservation notice), (b) is a production reservation notice determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of 3rd notice production (fireworks notice). It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of 4th notice production (chance zone notice). It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of 5th notice production (preliminary notice of all rotations) and all rotation productions. It is a figure showing an execution mode of specific reach production. It is a figure showing an execution mode of specific reach production. It is a table showing an example of notice production. It is a figure showing an execution mode of notice production. It is a figure showing the execution mode of the earned profit display production. It is a figure showing the execution mode of the earned profit display production. It is a diagram showing a game state and a transition mode of the big hit game. It is the table which shows the game production in each production mode. It is the figure which shows the execution feature of each production mode. It is a figure showing the production mode of confrontation reach. It is a figure showing other execution modes of an earned profit display production. It is a figure showing other execution modes of an earned profit display production. It is a figure showing other execution modes of an earned profit display production. It is a figure showing other execution modes of an earned profit display production. It is a figure showing other execution modes of an earned profit display production. It is a figure showing other execution modes of an earned profit display production. It is a figure showing other execution modes of an earned profit display production.

  Next, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to examples. Incidentally, in the following, when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed along with the end of the variable display of the symbol, a pachinko gaming machine capable of executing a winning game in which a predetermined amount of game profit (for example, a prize ball) can be given to the player An example to which the present invention is applied will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2 mounted in the gaming machine frame 50, and the gaming board 2 is a game. It is configured to be detachable from the machine frame 50. FIG. 3 shows the gaming board 2 removed from the gaming machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 is configured to have a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 for mounting the gaming board 2 and the like, and an outer frame 53 for mounting the pachinko gaming machine 1 on an island facility of a hall. ing. The outer frame 53 is fixed to the island equipment, and the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are attached to the outer frame via upper and lower frame hinges 56 and 56. Further, the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are pivotally supported on one side end side in the vertical direction (left side in FIG. 1), and can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 53 with the one side end side as an axis. It is configured. Further, from the closed state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, only the front frame 51 can be opened (opened), or both the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 can be opened (opened).

  Further, in the front frame 51, a launch handle 60 for launching a game ball with a launch strength according to the operation amount (rotation angle) of the player, a game ball that stores and stores the game ball can be supplied to the launcher side. A ball hitting tray (upper plate) 61 and a surplus ball tray (lower plate) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the ball hitting tray 61 are provided. Further, on the front frame 51, a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b (these two effect buttons are collectively referred to as "operable by the player during the execution of the game effect that is executed as the game progresses". And is also simply referred to as a “production button 63”). For the plurality of effect buttons, the effect buttons to be used can be selectively used according to the type of game effect. The configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the aspect of the first embodiment, and any input detecting means (such as an input detecting means for detecting an input from the player or a player directly contacting the button portion to input) may be used. , A retractable type, a touch sensor type, etc., or a non-contact type input detection means (photoelectric type, etc.) that detects when a part of the player's body approaches and inputs. Good.

  Further, the front frame 51 is provided with a frame lamp 66 for decoration, a speaker 67, and an image display device (second image display device 71, third image display device 72). Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are in front of the front frame 51 (on the player side) so that the player can easily see the display screens 71a and 72a. It is installed so as to project toward and is inclined in the outward direction. Further, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, similar to the image display device 7 described later, according to the execution / non-execution of the game, the situation of the game, the game effect to be executed, and the like. Game effects (characters and effect patterns, etc.), demonstration effects, information about games (acquired ball information, number of rounds, number of consecutive games, remaining game period, game mode, reliability of game effects, explanation, etc.) Information relating to the settings of the gaming machine (volume setting information, brightness setting information, etc.) is displayed. Further, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may display different information among these pieces of information, and may display the same information. Further, the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display the same information as when different information is displayed. In some cases Further, any two of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display the same information, and the remaining one displays different information. May be displayed. The image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 are sometimes referred to simply as “image display device”.

  The image display device 7 is provided in the inner area of the game area 3 formed on the game board 2, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are provided in the outer area of the game area 3. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 (provided at the non-open side end) is attached to the front frame 51 via a second image display device hinge 75 (hinge portion). Has been. Therefore, the hinges 75 for the upper and lower second image display devices can be pivoted in the left and right directions. More specifically, it is configured to be rotatable to the right by a predetermined angle (about 45 degrees) from the state shown in FIG. 1 (normal state). This is because when the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are opened with the upper and lower frame hinges 56, 56 as an axis, the second image display device 71 provided so as to project in front of the front frame 51 is a pachinko machine. This is a structure for preventing the game machine 1 from being damaged by colliding with a hall facility (ball lending machine, inter-unit facility, etc.) provided adjacent to the frame hinge 56 side (the left side in FIG. 1). .. On the other hand, the third image display device 72 (provided at the open end) is fixedly provided to the front frame 51 and is not rotatable.

  On the game board 2, a game area 3 in which a game ball shot by operating the launch handle 60 flows down is formed surrounded by a rail member 4. In addition, the game board 2 is provided with a board lamp 5 for decoration. In the game area 3, a plurality of game nails 16 that guide the game balls are provided in a protruding manner. Further, a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4, and it is possible to prevent the game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the launcher side.

  Further, near the center of the game area 3, an image display device 7 including a liquid crystal display device is provided. The image display device 7 is attached to the game board 2 from the back side of the game board 2. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (also simply referred to as "effect symbols") are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and an effect symbol display area 7b (also referred to as "effect symbol display unit") is displayed. ) Is provided, and the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are in accordance with the game state (low-probability low base state, high-probability low base state, low-probability high base state, high-probability high base state) The variable display is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol described later) set as the main body of the game. The effect design 8L is also referred to as "left design", the effect design 8C is also referred to as "middle design", and the effect design 8R is also referred to as "right design".

  The display mode of the effect symbol display area 7b shown in FIG. 3 shows one scene when the game state is in the normal state (low accurate low base state, state A described later). As will be described later in detail, in this low accurate low base state, the frequency of entering the game ball into the starting opening (second starting opening 21) is set lower than in the high base state, and whether or not the special symbol is true or false. Judgment probability (first special symbol hit determination and second special symbol hit determination) is a low probability (also referred to as "predetermined probability"), and the variation time of the second special symbol is longer than the variation time of the first special symbol It is set (more than 2 times) (out-of-range fluctuation is all 10 minutes). Therefore, in the normal state, the right game area 3B (second game area) shoots a game ball and enters the second starting opening 21 to display the second special symbol in a variably displayed manner. It is considered advantageous for the player to perform a game in which a game ball is shot in one game area), the game ball enters the first starting opening 20, and the first special symbol is variably displayed. That is, in the normal state, it can be said that the first special symbol (effect symbol) is the main and variable display state. Therefore, in the normal state (state A), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the effect symbol display area 7b are supposed to perform variable display and stop display in synchronization with the first special symbol.

  Moreover, each of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is composed of a plurality of symbols (identification information) that represent numbers “1” to “9”, for example. By the display mode (stop display mode) of the left, middle, and right effect symbols that are stop-displayed (derived display) in the effect symbol display area 7b, the first special symbol display device 41a (see "First") described later (see FIG. 4). The result of the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the "special symbol display part"), and the second special displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as "second special symbol display part") The result of the variable display of the symbol (the result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol is valid) is displayed (notified) so that the player can easily recognize it. It should be noted that the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and any (or all) of the effect symbol may be simply referred to as “symbol” or “identification information”. Further, the special symbol win / loss determination is also simply referred to as "win / win determination" or "first win / loss determination". In addition, the control unit (main control unit 80) that executes the special symbol win / loss determination is also referred to as "win / win determination execution unit" or "first win / loss determination execution unit".

  For example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit (first specific hit), the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the same three-digit symbol (doublet) such as "777" (also as "big hit symbol"). Say). Also, in the case of a small hit (second specified hit), a chance design such as "135" or a small hit special design such as "3 ★ 3" (also called "small hit design") The symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, when it is a small hit, it may be changed to a mode in which the small hit special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the symbols in the same mode may be stopped and displayed in the small hit symbol and the disengaged symbol. Also, as a small hit, when there are a plurality of small hits (first small hit, second small hit, etc.), they can be distinguished from each other, and different small hit patterns (first small hit pattern, second small hit pattern) ) May be stopped and displayed, or the same (common) small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed so that it is difficult to distinguish them.

  In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination is out, at least one of the three symbols such as "637" and "373" is displayed as a stop symbol with a different symbol ("out symbol"). Also called). Thereby, the player can easily understand the progress status of the game (result of the special symbol winning / absence determination) by looking at the effect symbol stopped and displayed. That is, in general, the player does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol hit determination by looking at the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 41a or the second special symbol display device 41b. The presentation symbol displayed in the symbol display area 7b is grasped by looking at it. In addition, as a mode of variable display of the effect symbols, for example, a mode in which scroll display is performed vertically, horizontally, diagonally, etc., a mode in which effect display is performed using only the first effect symbol display unit 7b, or a first effect symbol display unit 7b. In addition to this, it has a mode of effect display using one or both of the second effect symbol display portion 71a and the third effect symbol display portion 72a. In addition to this, you may have the aspect which performs an effect display using only the 2nd effect symbol display part 71a or the 3rd effect symbol display part 72a.

  Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying the game effect (effect symbol game effect) using the effect symbol as described above, it is executed in association with the winning game (big hit game, small hit game). A hit game effect (a big hit game effect, a small hit game effect), a customer waiting demonstration effect, etc. are displayed. In the effect design game effect, the winning game effect, and the demonstration effect, in addition to effect patterns such as numbers, effect images other than effect patterns such as background images and character images are also displayed. Also, as will be described later in detail, a game state (state A, state B, or state C) or a state in which a game ball is shot in the left game area 3A to perform a game, or a game ball is shot in the right game area 3B. The display mode on the effect symbol display area 7b is different depending on whether or not the game is played. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a gaming machine capable of displaying both the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel (simultaneously), and such a type of game. The machine is also called "simultaneous fluctuation machine (parallel fluctuation machine)".

  Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display section) that displays a first effect hold 9a according to the number of memories of a first special figure hold described later, There is a second effect hold display area 9d (second effect hold display unit) that displays the second effect hold 9b according to the number of stored second special figure hold to be described later. According to the display mode (the number of displays) of the first effect hold 9a or the second effect hold 9b in the effect hold display area, the first special figure hold displayed by the later-described first special figure hold indicator 43a (see FIG. 4). And the number of memories of the second special figure reservation displayed by the second special figure reservation indicator 43b can be easily shown to the player. The display position of the first effect hold display unit and the display position of the second effect hold display unit may change depending on the game state, the game mode, or the game effect to be executed (reach effect, etc.). In addition, only one of the first effect hold display section and the second effect hold display section (for example, only the effect hold display section corresponding to the main special symbol) may be displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, in the vicinity of the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7, a center ornament 10 is provided so as to surround the effect symbol display area 7b. A stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which a game ball can roll is provided below the center ornament 10. A hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left side of the center ornament 10. The warp section 12 is provided with a warp entrance and a warp exit, receives a game ball flowing down the game area 3 from the warp entrance, discharges the game ball from the warp exit, and guides it to the stage section 11. The game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage unit 11 has a higher possibility than the game ball not guided to the stage unit 11 and can enter the first starting opening 20 described later. Further, on the upper part of the center decoration body 10, there is an electric decoration member such as an LED (a panel lamp 5) which can be turned on according to a game state, and a decoration member 13 in the shape of characters or figures is arranged. There is.

  In addition, a movable decorative member 14 that is operable above the center decorative body 10 and behind the decorative member 13 is provided. In FIG. 3, only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible, but for example, the movable decorative member 14 drops downward (a predetermined amount) as a game effect with a relatively high probability of hitting is executed. The movable decorative member 14 covers the front surface of the display screen 7a, and most of the movable decorative member 14 becomes visible. As a result, the player enhances the enjoyment of the game and the expectation of winning.

  Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, a fixed winning device 19 having a non-variable first starting opening 20 in which the ease of entering a game ball does not change is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20, the random number for determining the special symbol win / loss, etc., is acquired, and if the predetermined condition (variation start condition) set in advance is satisfied, the win / loss determination for the first special symbol ( (1st special symbol hit determination) is executed, the first special symbol starts the variable display, and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit determination after a lapse of a predetermined time.

  Above the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center ornament 10 in the game area 3, a gate 28 through which a game ball can pass (can enter) (universal figure starting port, passage port, ball inlet or specific start) (Also called the mouth) is provided. The game ball entered from the upstream side of the gate 28 passes through the gate 28 and flows down the game area 3 in the downstream direction. The gate 28 also serves as a start gate 29 (also referred to as a combination gate or an operation gate) for starting a big hit game. That is, this gate is both the gate 28 and the start gate 29. When a game ball enters (passes through) the gate 28, the game sensor ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a, a random symbol for determining whether or not a symbol is normally acquired, and when a predetermined condition (fluctuation condition) is established, normally. Along with executing the symbol hit determination (also referred to as "second hit determination"), the normal symbol starts variable display, and after a predetermined time has passed, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the normal symbol hit determination. When the hit ordinary pattern is stopped and displayed, the movable member 23 operates (opening operation) and the second starting port 21 is opened. In addition, the control unit (main control unit 80) that executes the ordinary symbol winning / decising determination of whether or not the movable member 23 is operated (opening operation) to open the second starting opening 21 is a “winning / absence determination executing unit” or It is also referred to as “second hit / miss determination execution means”. The gate sensor 28a also serves as a start gate sensor 29a for starting a big hit game. That is, the sensor that detects the ball entering the main gate is the gate sensor 28a and the start gate sensor 29a.

  In addition, as will be described later in detail, when passing through the gate 28 (starting gate 29), the function as the starting gate 29 is exerted when the condition for executing the big hit game is satisfied (the big hit execution). It is also called a possible state or a big hit standby state). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 (starting gate 29) when the condition (big hit waiting state) is not satisfied, control processing relating to a normal symbol is performed, and big hit starting processing is not executed. Further, when the game ball passes through the start gate 29 (gate 28) when the condition is satisfied (in the big hit waiting state), the big hit game on standby is started and a predetermined big winning opening ( The round game in which the first big winning opening 30) is in an open state (state in which a ball can be entered) starts.

  In the right area (right game area 3B) of the center ornament 10 in the game area 3, and in the game area below (downstream) the gate 28 (starting gate 29), the first special winning opening 30 is provided. A big winning device 31 (also referred to as “first variable ball entrance”) is provided. The first big winning device 31 includes an opening / closing member 32, and operates the opening / closing member 32 to open / close the first big winning opening 30. The opening / closing member 32 is a game ball passage having a substantially rectangular shape (long plate shape) on the upper surface. In the closed state, the entrance of the first big winning opening 30 is closed and the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 is covered by the game ball. It is possible to pass. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 is formed in an inclined shape from the upstream side to the downstream side (from the left side to the right side of the drawing). As a result, when the opening / closing member 32 is in the closed state, the game balls flowing down to the entrance of the first big winning opening 30 pass through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 without entering the first big winning opening 30. And flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

  Further, the opening / closing member 32 is driven by the first special winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5), and the opening / closing member 32 is retracted toward the back surface of the game board 3 to form the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 forming the game ball passage. Disappears. As a result, when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state, the game balls flowing down to the entrance of the first special winning opening 30 will enter the first special winning opening 30. In this way, the opening / closing member 32 that opens and closes the entrance of the first big winning opening 30 is a retractable opening / closing member, and when the open state (when open), the game ball that has flowed down is smoothly moved to the first large size. While entering the prize hole 30, the game ball that has flowed down in the closed state (when closed) can be guided in an arbitrary direction (the second starting port 21 described later) by the inclined upper surface passage. It will be possible. The first special winning opening 30 allows game balls to enter only when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state. That is, the first big winning device 31 (first variable ball entrance), by the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member 32, the game ball can not enter the ball cannot enter (closed state) and the game ball can enter. It is possible to change to a ball possible state (open state).

  In the right area (right game area 3B) of the center ornament 10 in the game area 3, and in the game area below (downstream) the first big winning opening 30, the ease of entering the game balls does not change. A second fixed winning device 25 having a variable third starting port 26 is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the third starting opening 26, a random number for determining the special symbol win / fail, etc. is acquired, and if the predetermined condition (variation start condition) set in advance is satisfied, the win / loss judgment for the second special symbol ( (2nd special symbol hit determination) is executed, the second special symbol starts variable display, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit determination after a lapse of a predetermined time. In addition, the game ball passage is branched below (downstream) the first big winning opening 30 (upper and lower), the upper-side game ball passage where the third starting opening 26 is provided, the second starting opening 31 and the second starting opening 31 The lower game ball passage where the two major winning openings 35 are provided is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the game ball guided to the upper stage game ball passage enters the third starting port 26 by contacting the game nail 16 provided in the vicinity of the third starting port 26. Alternatively, it does not enter the third starting port 26 but flows down to the out port 34. Further, since the third starting opening 26 is a fixed type winning device capable of always entering the ball, it becomes a big hit in the left hitting game (so-called first hit), and when the first big hitting game is executed in the right hitting game. , During the big hit game, the game ball is put into the third starting port 26 (held), and it is possible to execute the variable display of the second special symbol immediately after the end of the big hit game.

  In the right area (right game area 3B) of the center ornament 10 in the game area 3, and in the game area below (downstream) the first big winning opening 30, the easiness of entering a game ball is variable. A variable winning device 22 (also referred to as a “variable starting port” or a “variable starting port”) having a second starting port 21 of a formula is provided. Based on the entry of the game sphere into the second starting opening 21, random numbers for special symbol hit determination, etc. are acquired, and if the predetermined condition (fluctuation start condition) set in advance is satisfied, the hit determination of the second special symbol (the (2 special symbol hit determination) is executed, the second special symbol starts the variable display, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit determination after a predetermined time.

  The variable winning device 22 includes a movable member 23 (also referred to as an “opening / closing member”), and the second starting opening 21 is opened / closed by the operation of the movable member 23. By this opening / closing operation, the second starting port 21 can be changed from the first mode (closed state) to the second mode (opened state) in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than that in the first mode. is there. In the first embodiment, the second starting opening 21 allows the game ball to enter only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and cannot enter the game ball when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. There is. The second starting port 21 is completely closed when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, as long as the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when the movable member 23 is in the open state. It does not have to be the one that cannot be entered.

  Further, the movable member 23, like the opening / closing member 32, is a game ball passage having a substantially rectangular (long plate) upper surface, and in the closed state, closes the entrance of the second starting opening 21 and A game ball can pass on the upper surface of the movable member 23. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the movable member 23 is formed in an inclined shape from the upstream side to the downstream side (from the right side to the left side of the drawing). Thereby, when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the second starting port 21 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 without entering the second starting port 21, It flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

  Further, the movable member 23 is driven by the second starting opening solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5), and the movable member 23 is retracted in the back surface direction of the game board 3 (direction perpendicular to the game board surface) to form a game ball passage. The movable member 23 disappears from the entrance of the second starting port 21. As a result, when the movable member 23 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the second starting port 21 will enter the second starting port 21. In this way, the movable member 23 that opens and closes the entrance of the second starting opening 21 is a retractable opening and closing member similar to the opening and closing member 32, and the game ball that has flowed down in the open state (when open) is used. While smoothly entering the ball into the second starting port 21, the game ball that has flowed down in the closed state (when closed) is moved in any direction by the inclined upper surface passage (the second big winning port 35 described later). Induce to.

  Further, in the right area (right game area 3B) of the center ornament 10 in the game area 3, and in the game area below (downstream) the second starting opening 21, the second special winning opening 35 is provided. A big winning device 36 (also referred to as a "second variable ball entrance") is provided. The second special winning device 36 includes an opening / closing member 37, and the opening / closing member 37 is operated to open / close the second special winning opening 35. Like the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37 has a game ball passage with a substantially rectangular shape (long plate shape) on the upper surface, and in the closed state, closes the entrance of the second special winning opening 35 and opens / closes the same. A game ball can pass on the upper surface of the member 37. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 is formed in an inclined shape from the upstream side to the downstream side (from the right side to the left side of the drawing). As a result, when the opening / closing member 37 is in the closed state, the game balls flowing down to the entrance of the second special winning opening 35 pass through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 without entering the second special winning opening 35. And flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

  Further, the opening / closing member 37 is driven by the second special winning opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5), and the opening / closing member 37 is retracted in the rear surface direction of the game board 3 (perpendicular to the game board surface) to form a game ball passage. The opening / closing member 37 that has been used disappears from the entrance of the second special winning opening 35. As a result, when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the second special winning opening 35 will enter the second special winning opening 35. In this way, the opening / closing member 37 that opens and closes the entrance of the second special winning opening 35 is a retractable opening / closing member similar to the opening / closing member 32, and the game ball that has flowed down in the open state (when open). Smoothly into the second big winning opening 35, and guide the game ball that has flowed down in the closed state (when closed) in an arbitrary direction (out opening 34) by the inclined upper surface passage. It becomes possible. The second special winning opening 35 allows the game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state. That is, the second big winning device 36 (second variable ball entrance), by the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member 37, the game ball cannot enter the ball cannot enter (closed state) and the game ball can enter. It can be changed to a ball-able state (open state).

  A plurality of (three) general entrances 27 are provided in the game area below the left side area (left game area 3A) of the center ornament 10 in the game area 3. In this way, the game area 3 in which various entrances and the like are arranged is a left game area (first game area) 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area (second game area) 3B on the right side. , Can be divided into The batting method that shoots the gaming ball so that the gaming ball flows down the left gaming area 3A is called left hitting, and the batting method that shoots the gaming ball so that the gaming ball flows down the right gaming area 3B is called right hitting. .. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal state (low accurate low base state, state A) at the time of starting the game is aimed at entering the first starting opening 20 by left-handing. That is, the normal state at the time of starting the game is a left-handed game in which the player mainly enters the ball into the first starting opening 20 by left-handing (the first special symbol judgment).

  On the other hand, when it becomes a big hit in the hit determination based on the ball entering the first starting opening 20 (first special symbol hit determination), after the big hit game, as well as after the big hit game (special game) (low accuracy high base state or high probability In the low base state), the game is aimed at hitting the gate 28, the first big winning opening 30, the second starting opening 21, or the second big winning opening 35 by hitting the ball to the right. That is, the big hit game, and the low accurate high base state (state B) or the high accurate low base state (state C) is mainly the ball entry into the second starting opening 21 (second special symbol winning / absence determination) by right-handing. It becomes a right-handed game. When the game ball enters the first starting opening 20, the second starting opening 21, the first big winning opening 30, the second big winning opening 35, and the general entrance 27, the respective entrances In, a predetermined number of game balls (also referred to as “prize balls” and “game profit”) are paid out (granted). In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls (the amount of game profit) paid out based on the ball entering the first special winning opening 30 is calculated as the number of prize balls paid out based on the entering the second special winning opening 35. It is set larger than the number (amount of game profit). Specifically, the first special winning opening 30 is for paying out 15 prize balls for one winning ball, and the second special winning opening 35 is 10 for one winning ball. The prize balls will be paid out.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is arranged on the lower right part of the game board 2. In the main display 40, a first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display section) that displays a variable display and a stop of the first special symbol, a second special symbol display that displays a variable display and a stop of the second special symbol. The device 41b (second special symbol display unit), and the normal symbol (also referred to as "specific identification information") variable display and stop display normal symbol display unit 42 (normal symbol display unit) is included. Further, the main display device 40, the first special figure reservation display 43a that displays the number of hits determination information (first special figure hold) related to the first special symbol, the hit determination information (second A second special figure hold indicator 43b for displaying the number of memories of 2 special figure hold), and a general figure hold indicator 44 for displaying the number of memories of operation hold (general figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42 are included. ing.

  Further, the main display 40, the hit indicator 48 showing that the result of the first special symbol hit determination or the second special symbol hit determination is a hit, the first special symbol hit determination or the second special symbol hit determination When the result is a hit, a round indicator 45 indicating the number of rounds of the hit game to be executed, a game status indicator 46 indicating that the probability varying function is activated, and a shooting direction of the game ball, that is, right-handed hitting. A firing direction indicator 47 is included to indicate whether it should be left or left. The various display devices included in the main display device 40 are display-controlled by a main control unit described later.

  The variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. Further, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol display portion 41. Further, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b may be collectively referred to as a special figure reservation display section 43.

  In the special symbol display unit 41, the special symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined period of time and then is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol (stop symbol) that is stopped (derived) is displayed as the first starting port 20 or the second starting port. The result of the winning / discarding judgment (special symbol winning / discarding judgment, big hit lottery) based on the entry into 21 is notified. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the special symbol hit determination. If the stop symbol is a predetermined specific special symbol (specific identification information) (that is, if it is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol), in the open pattern according to the type of the specific special symbol stopped and displayed, A special game (big hit game, small hit game) for opening the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the special winning openings (the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display device 41a is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "i-p", and a special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol hit determination. indicate. For example, when the result of the first special symbol hit determination is the first big hit (4R first big hit), the three LEDs of "ijn" are turned on and the rest are turned off. When the second big hit (4R second big hit) is reached, the four LEDs of "jnkl" are turned on and the rest are turned off. Further, when it comes off, the two LEDs of "lo" can be turned on and the rest can be turned off. Further, the second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "a to h", and displays the special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol winning / discarding judgment. Regarding the stop display mode, similarly to the first special symbol display device 41b, different display modes are set according to the result (big hit, small hit, out) of the second special symbol hit determination. Further, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed (before the derivation display), the variable display of the special symbol is performed over a predetermined variation time, but the mode of the variable display is, for example, in a predetermined order, from left to right. It is possible to adopt a mode in which each LED is turned on so that the light repeatedly flows.

  Here, in the stop display mode of special symbols and effect symbols (display result of variable display), the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit (a big hit or a small hit) is a "hit mode" ], "Specific mode", "specific display mode" or "specific display result", the result of the special symbol judgment is "stop mode", "non-specific mode" that corresponds to the case Also referred to as "non-specific display mode" or "non-specific display result". In addition, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit is also called "big hit mode", and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination is a small hit is "small. It is also referred to as a “hit mode”. Furthermore, any or all of the image display device, the first special symbol display device 41a (first special symbol display part), the second special symbol display device 41b (second special symbol display part) and the special symbol display part 41 are indicated. Also referred to as "variable display means" and "identification information display means".

  In this pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21, various information such as a random number for special symbol winning / disapproving determination based on the entering ball (“acquired information”). (Also referred to as “), and the acquired various information is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 85 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. More specifically, if the information is acquired based on a ball entering the first starting opening 20, it is stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a as a first special figure reservation (also referred to as “first acquisition information”), If the information is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 21, it is stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b as second special figure reservation (also referred to as "second acquisition information"). An upper limit is set for the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit 85, and the upper limit values in the first embodiment are four, respectively. The first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b are also referred to as "first acquisition information storage unit" and "second acquisition information storage unit", respectively, and are also collectively referred to as "acquisition information storage unit". ..

  The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 85 is exhausted when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. The digestion of the special figure hold means to determine a random number for determining whether or not the special symbol corresponding to the special figure hold and execute the variable display of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21 cannot be executed immediately upon entering the ball, that is, each special During execution of variable display of symbols, or during execution of special games based on any special symbol hit determination, the predetermined number (4 each) is set as the upper limit, and the right of special symbol hit determination for the entry is reserved (reserved). ) You can do it.

  The number of such special figure reservations is displayed on the first special figure reservation indicator 43a and the second special figure reservation indicator 43b. Specifically, the first special figure reservation indicator 43a is composed of two "uv" LEDs, and the first special figure is controlled by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the first special figure reservations. It displays the number of holds. For example, when the number of holdings is 0, a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as “u □ v □” (for example, □: extinguished, ●: red lighting, ▲: green lighting), and the number of holdings is 1 In the case of, it is possible to adopt a display mode in which the LED of u is turned off and the LED of v is lit in red, as in “u □ v ●”. Further, when the number of holdings is two, it is possible to adopt a display mode in which the LED of u is turned on in red and the LED of v is turned off, as in “u ● v □”. Further, when the number of holdings is 3, it is possible to adopt a display mode in which both LEDs are lit in red, such as "u ● v ●". Further, when the number of holdings is 4 (upper limit number), both LEDs can be turned on in green such as "uvv" to provide a display mode. In addition, the second special figure reservation indicator 43b is composed of two LEDs of "wx". By controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of second special figure reservations, the second special figure reservation is displayed. It displays the number. For example, when the number of holdings is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as “w □□□” (for example, □: extinguished, ●: red lighting, ▲: green lighting), and the number of holdings 1 to 1 No. 4 is set similarly to the first special figure reservation display 43a.

  The variable display of the normal symbol is performed based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 (detection by the gate sensor 28a). In the normal symbol display device 42, after displaying the normal symbol for a predetermined period of time, it is stopped and displayed, and the ordinary symbol (stop symbol) that is stopped and displayed is the result of the normal symbol hit / miss judgment based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28. Inform. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by the normal symbol hit / miss judgment. If the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is a specific normal symbol determined in advance (normal normal symbol), an auxiliary game that opens the second starting opening 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state (“specific game”) (Also called) is performed. Further, the means (main controller) for executing the auxiliary game (specific game) is also referred to as the auxiliary game executing means (specific game executing means). The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display device 42 is composed of two LEDs of "st", and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol hit / miss judgment by its lighting mode. Is. For example, when the determination result is a hit, both LEDs are turned on and the hit ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed as in "s.t. In addition, when the determination result is out, an out-of-normal pattern such as "s □ t ■" in which only the t LED is lit is displayed. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for a predetermined predetermined variation time. The mode of the variable display is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are alternately turned on and off repeatedly.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 acquires various information (also referred to as "acquisition information") such as a random number for ordinary symbol determination based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28, and the acquired various information. Is temporarily stored as a general figure reservation in the general figure reservation storage section 86 formed in the RAM of the main control section 80. An upper limit is set for the number of public figure reservations that can be stored in the general figure reservation storage unit 86, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. The universal figure hold stored in the universal figure hold storage unit 86 is consumed when the variable display of the ordinary symbol based on the ordinary figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the public figure hold means that a random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol corresponding to the public figure hold is determined, and a variable display of the normal symbol for indicating the determination result is executed. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be executed immediately when the passage, that is, during the execution of the variable display of the ordinary symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game. Can reserve (hold) the right to determine whether or not a regular symbol is valid for the passage of a predetermined number of pieces as an upper limit.

  The number of public figure reservations is displayed on the general figure reservation display 44. Specifically, the universal figure holding indicator 44 is composed of two LEDs of "qr", and displays the number of holding of the universal figure by turning on the LED in accordance with the number of holding of the universal figure. For example, when the number of holdings is 0, a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as “q □ r □” (for example, □: extinguished, ●: red lighting, ▲: green lighting), and the number of holdings is 1 In the case of, it is possible to adopt a display mode in which the q LED is turned off and the r LED is lit in red, such as “q □ r ●”. Further, the numbers of reservations 2 to 4 are also set in the same manner as the first special figure reservation display 43a.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 5. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a main control board 80 (“main control section” or “main control section”) for performing control relating to game profit such as special symbol hit determination, normal symbol hit determination, and game state transition. "Game control unit"), a sub-control board 90 (also called "sub-control unit", "sub-control unit", or "production control unit") that controls the performance executed as the game progresses, game ball A payout control board 110 (also referred to as a “payout control unit”) that performs control related to payout, a design 8 displayed on the image display device 7, a design displayed on the display 102, a third display pending display 103a, Also, an image control board 100 (image control unit) for performing display control of the fourth effect hold display device 103b and the like is provided. As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case in which a main control board 80 is stored is provided at a substantially central portion on the rear surface side (back surface side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and above the main control board case, An image control board storage case for housing the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the image control board 100 is provided, and a sub control board storage case for storing the sub control board 90 is provided on the image control board storage case. It is provided. A payout control board case for housing the payout control board is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power supply board case for housing the power supply board 109 is provided on the right side thereof.

  On the main control board 80, a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter, “game control microcomputer”) 81 for controlling the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the program stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data (information) to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 87 (I / O port section). The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81. The ROM may be externally attached. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the special figure reservation storage section 85 (first special figure reservation storage section 85a and second special figure reservation storage section 85b) and the general figure reservation storage section 86 described above. .

  Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88. Therefore, a signal is input from each sensor to the main control board 80, and a signal is output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, as the sensors, a first starting opening sensor 20a, a second starting opening sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a (starting gate sensor 29a), a first big winning opening sensor 30a, a second big winning opening sensor 35a, and The general entrance sensor 27a is connected. These various sensors are also referred to as "detection means".

  The first starting opening sensor 20a is provided in the first starting opening 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting opening 20. The second starting opening sensor 21a is provided in the second starting opening 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second starting opening 21. The gate sensor 28a (starting gate sensor 29a) is provided in the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first special winning opening sensor 30a is provided in the first special winning opening 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first special winning opening 30. The second special winning opening sensor 35a is provided in the second special winning opening 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 35. The general ball entrance sensor 27a is provided in each of the general ball entrances 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the general ball entrance 27.

  Further, as the solenoids, the second starting opening solenoid 24, the first big winning opening solenoid 33, and the second big winning opening solenoid 38 are connected. The second starting opening solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning a prize device 22. The first special winning opening solenoid 33 is for driving the opening / closing member 32 of the first special winning device 31. The second special winning opening solenoid 38 is for driving the opening / closing member 37 of the second special winning device 36. Further, on the main control board 80, the first special symbol display device 41a, the second special symbol display device 41b, the normal symbol display device 42, the first special symbol reservation display device 43a, the second special symbol reservation display device 43b, universal The figure hold indicator 44, the round indicator 45, the game state indicator 46, the firing direction indicator 47, and the hit indicator 48 are connected. That is, the display control of these main display devices 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81 (main control unit 80).

  Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected with a payout device 120 for paying out prize balls or lent balls, and a card unit 135, and a launching device 112 via a launch control board 111 (also referred to as a “shooting control section”). Are connected. The firing device 112 includes a firing handle 60 (see FIG. 1). The card unit 135 is installed adjacent to one end side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (usually the left side of the paper of FIG. 1), and when the player performs a predetermined ball lending operation, the inserted prepaid card (game It is possible to lend a ball based on information stored in a value storage medium or the like.

  The payout control board 110 is mounted with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as “payout control microcomputer”) that controls the payout of the game balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the payout of gaming balls, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the program stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 controls the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the input / output circuit 117. Drive to pay out prize balls or pay balls. The game balls to be paid out are detected by the payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 (see FIG. 1) of the launching device 112, the touch switch 114 detects the contact of the player with the launching handle 60, and the launching volume 115 of the launching handle 60 is detected. Detect the amount of rotation. Then, the firing motor 113 is drive-controlled so that the game ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the firing volume 115.

  Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional (one-way) communication connection in which only signals can be transmitted from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction restricting means is interposed. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control board 90 is mounted with a one-chip microcomputer 91 for production control (“production control microcomputer”) that controls the production of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the game effect as the game progresses, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the program stored in the ROM. There is. The production control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. The ROM may be externally attached.

  An image control board 100, a sound control board 106, and a lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub control board 90. Based on the command received from the main control board 80, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 causes the CPU (VDP) of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 (“image control microcomputer”) of the image control board 100. Display of image display device 7 (first image display device), second image display device 71, third image display device 72, effect display device 102, third effect hold display device 103a, and fourth effect hold display device 103b. Control. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for expanding image data. In the ROM of the image control board 100, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers and symbols (including effect designs, hold designs, etc.) and Image data such as a background image is stored. The CPU (VDP) of the image control board 100 reads the image data from the ROM based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91. Then, display control is executed based on the read image data.

  The effect display 102 is composed of two LEDs, one of which performs the variable display and the stop display in accordance with the variable display and the stop display of the first special symbol, and the other LED the variable display of the second special symbol. And, the variable display and the stop display are performed in accordance with the stop display, and the corresponding LED is turned on or off, or by the color, the display mode showing the display result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (the result of the special symbol judgment). Stop display with. Similarly, the third effect hold indicator 103a and the fourth effect hold indicator 103b each include two LEDs. Then, by turning on / off the two LEDs, or by combining the colors, the third effect holding display device 103a is displayed by the holding number and the first special figure holding display device 43a displayed in the first effect holding display area 9c. The display is controlled in a display mode showing the same number of holdings as the number of holdings. Further, the fourth effect hold display device 103b is display-controlled in a display mode showing the same hold number as the hold number displayed in the second effect hold display area 9d and the hold number displayed in the second special figure hold display 43b. It

  The character design is displayed on a part or substantially the whole of the display screen 7a (production design display part), or the movable decorative member 14 is moved in front of the display screen 7a (production design display part) to display the display screen 7a (production design display). By covering a part or substantially the entire part), a part or all of the effect design 8, the first effect hold display section 9c, or the second effect hold display section 9d may be invisible. is there. Even in such a covered state, the effect display 102, the third effect hold display 103a, and the like, so that the display and the stop display of the effect design can be surely confirmed, and the number of pieces to be held can be confirmed. Also, a fourth effect suspension display device 103b is provided. It should be noted that the display modes of the effect display device 102, the third effect hold display device 103a, and the fourth effect hold display device 103b are in a state that they are always visible without being obstructed by the operation of the movable decorative member 14 or the like. Has become. A VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided instead of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs a sound, a music, a sound effect, etc. from the speaker 67 via the sound control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub control board 90. A CPU may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may be caused to perform voice control. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the voice control board 106 and the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU of the image control board 100 may be caused to execute voice control. Further, in this case, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100. In addition, the production control microcomputer 91, based on the command received from the main control board 80, light emission pattern data (lighting / extinguishing, light emission color, etc.) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5. , Lamp data) is determined from the data stored in the ROM, and the lighting control of the lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is performed via the lamp control board 107.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Although the movable decoration member 14 is only partially visible in FIG. 1, it is a movable type gimmick (movable member) provided in the center decoration body 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines the operation pattern data (also referred to as “driving data”) for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode from the data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, and determines the operation pattern data. The movement of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the movement pattern data. A CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and in that case, the CPU may be caused to execute lighting control of the lamp or operation control of the movable decorative member 14. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and the ROM may store data relating to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern.

  The sub-control board 90 also includes a first effect button detection switch 63c and a first effect button detection switch 63c for detecting that the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b (see FIG. 1) has been operated (pressed, rotated, pulled, etc.). The two effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output from the corresponding effect button detection switch to the sub control board 90.

  Next, the control relating to the special symbol hit determination in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. As a result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol is valid, there are "big hit", "small hit", and "miss". At the time of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display portion 41. Further, when the "small hit", the "small hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display portion 41. Further, when the "off", the "off symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display portion 41. If it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit, a "special game" of opening the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35 is executed in an opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol stopped and displayed. . A special game executed as a big hit is called a "big hit game", and a special game executed as a small hit is called a "small hit game".

  There are a plurality of types of hits, and the hit type corresponding to the result (specific result) is executed according to the result (specific result) of the special symbol hit determination. That is, depending on whether the result of the special symbol hit determination is the first specific result, the second specific result, the third specific result, or another specific result, etc. , Including small hits). Further, the special game to be executed may also be different depending on the hit type, the game profit amount obtainable by the special game may be different, and the game state after the special game may be different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the types of hits are "4R (round) first big hit", "4R second big hit", "15R third big hit", "4R fourth big hit", "2R big hit". There are 5 big hits, 2R 6th big hits, 2R 7th big hits, and 2R 8th big hits. The “15R third jackpot” has 15 times of opening (round number) of the special winning opening (first big winning opening 30). Further, in the “4R first big hit”, the “4R second big hit”, and the “4R fourth big hit”, the number of times (round number) of the special winning opening (first big winning opening 30) is 4 times. "2R 5th big hit", "2R 6th big hit", "2R 7th big hit", and "2R 8th big hit" have the number of rounds (number of rounds) of opening the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30) It is twice. In this way, in the big hit, the first special winning opening 30 is opened and the second special winning opening 35 is not opened. From this, the first big winning opening 30 is also referred to as a "big winning big winning opening (variable big winning opening)".

  Also, "4R 1st big hit", "15R 3rd big hit", "4R 4th big hit", "2R 5th big hit", "2R 6th big hit", the gaming state after the end of the big hit game will be described. It shifts to the high-probability state of (actuates the probability variation function). Therefore, these five types of jackpots are also called "probable variation jackpots (high-probability jackpots)." This high-probability state (probability change function) continues until the next big hit occurs. In addition, "4R second big hit", "2R seventh big hit", "2R eighth big hit" shifts the game state after the end of the big hit game to a low-probability state described later (the probability changing function does not operate). . Therefore, these three types of big hits are also called "low probability big hits (low probability big hits, normal big hits)."

  In addition, "4R first big hit", "15R third big hit", "4R fourth big hit", after the end of the big hit game, set the variation time of the second special symbol to a short time "second special symbol time saving" Function, but not the high base generation function. As a result, the gaming state after the end of these big hit games becomes the highly accurate low base state (state C). This highly accurate low base state continues until the next big hit occurs. In addition, the playability of the highly accurate low base state (state C) will be described later in detail, but as described above, by performing a right hitting game in the right game area 3B in which various entrances are arranged, the second special It is a period in which it is possible to increase the number of game balls in the period between the previous big hit and the next big hit (between big hits) by making a symbol hit determination. In addition, by frequently making small hits in the highly accurate and low base state during the big hits, it is expected that many game balls can be obtained in a short period of time by the small hits. In other words, it is a period that is advantageous for the player and is a period in which the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, "4R second big hit", "2R seventh big hit", "2R eighth big hit" activates "second special symbol time saving function" and "high base generation function" after the end of the big hit game. As a result, the game state after the end of these big hit games becomes a low-probability-high base state. In the case of "4R second big hit" and "2R eighth big hit", the low certainty high base state ends when the next big hit occurs or the variable display of the special symbol is executed 100 times. .. When the variable display of the special symbol is finished on the basis of being executed 100 times, the gaming state is set to the low accurate low base state (normal state). Further, in the case of "2R seventh big hit", the low certainty high base state ends when the next big hit occurs or the variable display of the special symbol is executed 50 times. When the variable display of the special symbol is ended based on the execution of 50 times, the gaming state is set to the low accurate low base state (normal state). In addition, as will be described later in detail, in the low accurate high base state, by performing a right hitting game in the right game area 3B in which various entrances are arranged as described above, the second special symbol winning / absence determination is performed, and next. It is a period for playing games in anticipation of the occurrence of a big hit.

  In addition, "2R fifth big hit" and "2R sixth big hit" activate the "second special symbol time saving function" and "high base generation function" after the end of the big hit game. As a result, the gaming state after the completion of these big hit games becomes a highly accurate and high base state. In the case of "2R 5th big hit", "2nd special symbol time saving function" continues until the next big hit occurs, and "high base generation function" causes the next big hit or fluctuation of the special symbol. The display ends 50 times. Further, as described above, the "probability change function" continues until the next big hit occurs. That is, in the case of "2R fifth big hit", after the big hit game ends, until the variable display of the special symbol has passed 50 times, it is in a highly accurate and high base state, and a big hit does not occur even after 50 times. , The gaming state is set to the highly accurate low base state.

  The high-probability-high base state is similar to the low-probability-high base state, by performing a right hitting game in the right game area 3B, the second special symbol is judged whether it is true or not, and the game is expected in the occurrence of the next big hit. As mentioned above, the high-accuracy low base state is an advantageous period for the player who can expect a large number of game balls in a short period by small hits by frequently making small hits by right hitting games, as described above. is there. Note that there are more game balls that can be acquired in the high-accuracy low base state than there are game balls that can be acquired in the high-accuracy high base state. Therefore, when the big hit does not occur until the number of times the variable display of the special symbols after the big hit game is over 50 times passes, the game state changes to a more advantageous game state (specific game state) than before.

  In addition, "2R sixth big hit", after the big hit game, until the variable display of the special symbol has passed 100 times, it is in a highly accurate high base state, and if a big hit does not occur even after 100 times, It is the same as the "2R fifth big hit" except that the gaming state is set to the highly accurate low base state, that is, the period in which the gaming state changes is different. Further, the “2R fifth big hit” is set earlier than the “2R sixth big hit” when the gaming state changes from the high-precision high base state to the high-precision low base state. Therefore, it can be said that the “2R fifth jackpot” is a jackpot more advantageous to the player than the “2R sixth jackpot”.

  In addition, the high-precision high base state after the big hit game (2R fifth big hit game) related to "2R fifth big hit" and the low after the big hit game (2R seventh big hit game) related to "2R seventh big hit" By executing a common game effect (first game effect: background, game mode, character design, reach effect, etc.) in the certainty base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state. As shown in FIG. 9, these game states are set as state B, and a variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, both gaming states are non-notifying states in which the gaming state (high-probability high-base state or low-probability high-base state) is not notified (difficult to recognize).

  If the type of big hit is "2R fifth big hit", after 50 times the variable display of special symbols has passed, the gaming state becomes a highly accurate low base state (an advantageous state advantageous to the player), and "2R If the "7th big hit", after 50 times the variable display of the special symbol, the game state becomes a low accurate low base state (a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player), so the player does not inform Regardless of which game state is in the state, the player is expected to make a transition to the high-accuracy low base state to play the game, which enhances the enjoyment of the game.

  Also, a high-accuracy high base state after the end of the big hit game (2R sixth big hit game) related to the "2R sixth big hit" and a low after the big hit game (2R eighth big hit game) related to the "2R eighth big hit game". By executing a common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the certainty base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state. As shown in FIG. 9, these game states are set as state B, and a variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, both gaming states are non-notifying states in which the gaming state (high-probability high-base state or low-probability high-base state) is not notified (difficult to recognize).

  If the type of big hit is "2R 6th big hit", after the variable display of the special symbol has passed 100 times, the gaming state becomes a highly accurate low base state (an advantageous state advantageous to the player), and "2R In the case of "eighth big hit", after the variable display of the special symbol has passed 100 times, the game state becomes a low-probability low base state (a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player), so the player does not inform. Regardless of which game state is in the state, the game is expected to shift to the high-accuracy low base state, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, the high-precision high base state after the big hit game (2R fifth big hit game) related to "2R fifth big hit" and the low after the big hit game (2R seventh big hit game) related to "2R seventh big hit" High-precision base state and high-precision high-base state after the big hit game (2R 6th big hit game) related to "2R 6th big hit" and big hit game (2R 8th big hit game) related to "2R 8th big hit" In the low accurate high base state after the end, by executing a common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.), the player recognizes which game state Make it difficult. As shown in FIG. 9, these game states are set as state B, and a variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, these gaming states are set as non-notification states in which the gaming state (high-probability / high-base state or low-probability / high-base state) is not notified (difficult to recognize).

  If the type of big hit is "2R fifth big hit", after 50 times the variable display of special symbols has passed, the gaming state becomes a highly accurate low base state (an advantageous state advantageous to the player), and "2R In the case of "7th big hit", after 50 times the variable display of the special symbol has passed, the game state becomes a low accurate low base state (a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player). Also, if the type of jackpot is "2R sixth jackpot", after the variable display of the special symbol has passed 100 times, the gaming state becomes a highly accurate low base state (an advantageous state advantageous to the player), In the case of "2R eighth big hit", after the variable display of the special symbol has passed 100 times, the game state becomes a low accurate low base state (a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player). Therefore, in the non-notification state, the player expects to shift to the high-accuracy low base state when the variation display of the special symbol has passed 50 times in any of the gaming states. , Will enhance the fun of the game.

  In addition, even if it does not shift to the high-accuracy low base state, without expecting to shift to the low-precision low base state, at least the high base state continues (that is, the non-notification state continues) I do. After the variable display of the special symbol has passed 50 times, if the non-notification state continues, we expect the occurrence of a big hit, and when the variable display of the special symbol passes 100 times, shift to the high-accuracy low base state. The game is expected to be played, and the interest in the game is enhanced. As described above, in the non-notification state, the points that enhance the player's expectation are set a plurality of times, which makes it possible to further enhance the game interest and maintain the high game interest for a long period of time.

  In addition, as for the small hit which can occur as a result of the second special symbol hit / miss determination, the number of times of opening the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is 6 times, and once compared with other big hits (and The total opening time is also set short. Specifically, the opening is performed for 6 seconds of 0.3 seconds for a total of 1.8 seconds. Therefore, compared to the big hit game (for example, 15R third big hit game, 4R fourth big hit game, etc.), the number of game balls that can be obtained in one small hit game is set to be small. However, by generating a small hit a plurality of times (a large number of times), it is possible to execute a small hit game a plurality of times and obtain more game balls. In the case of a small hit, the second big winning opening 35 is opened and the first big winning opening 30 is not opened. From this, the second big winning opening 35 is also referred to as a "small winning big winning opening (small winning variable entrance)". In the small hit (small hit game), unlike the big hit (big hit game), the number of times the special winning opening is opened is not called the number of rounds but simply the number of times of opening. Also, based on the occurrence of a small hit, the probability change function does not operate, and if the gaming state at the time of a small hit is a high probability state, it will be a high probability state even after the small hit game is over. If the game state of is a low probability state, it is a low probability state even after the small hit game is over. Similarly, regarding the time saving function and the high base generating function of the second special symbol, it is assumed that they do not operate based on the occurrence of a small hit.

  Incidentally, the distribution probability to each big hit in the hit determination of the first special symbol (special drawing 1) is 4R first big hit is 65%, 4R second big hit is 35%. On the other hand, the big hit in the hit determination of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the 15R third big hit is 50%, the 4R fourth big hit is 5%, the 2R fifth big hit is 5%, the 2R sixth big hit is 5%, 2R 7th jackpot is 25%, 2R 8th jackpot is 10%. That is, by the operation of the second special symbol time saving function to be described later, in the case of a big hit by the hit determination (second special symbol hit determination) based on the ball entering the second starting opening 21 with a higher variation frequency, 15R It becomes a big hit (15R third big hit), and it becomes possible to obtain a large amount of game balls in a short period of time. Thus, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, rather than a big hit in the hit determination (first special symbol hit determination) performed by entering the game ball into the first start opening 20, the game to the second start opening 21 It is set so that it is more likely to be a big win for the player in the hit determination (the second special symbol hit determination) performed when the ball enters the ball (it is possible to obtain a large number of game balls). There is. Further, the player expects the occurrence of the 15R third big hit and the occurrence of a highly accurate low base state in which the game ball can be increased by the small hit.

  Here, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the determination of whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss is made based on a "random number for special symbol win / loss determination (also referred to as" win / win determination information ") The determination of the type of the big hit is performed based on the "big hit type determining random number (also referred to as" symbol determining random number "and" symbol determining information ")". As shown in FIG. 7 (A), the random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is valid takes a value in the range of 0 to 629. The big hit type determining random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 99. In addition, in addition to the random number for determining the special symbol right and wrong and the random number for determining the jackpot type, the "variation pattern" is included in the random number (acquired information) obtained based on the ball entering the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21. There is a random number (also called "variation pattern information"). The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) including the variation time of the special symbol. The fluctuation pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 198. In addition, the random number acquired based on the passage through the gate 28 includes a random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol is shown in FIG. 7B. The random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second starting opening 21 (ordinary symbol or not determination). Ordinary symbol random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 240.

  Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a probability variation function (probability variation function) for special symbols and ordinary symbols, a variation time shortening function for special symbols and ordinary symbols, and an opening extension function of the second starting opening. Depending on the combination of states, it has a plurality of game states. Special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) the state that the probability variation function is operating is called "high probability state", the state is not operating is called "low probability state". In the high probability state (big hit probability: 1/315), the probability of being judged as a big hit in the special symbol hit determination is higher than in the low probability state (big hit probability: 1/63). That is, in the low-probability state, the big hit determination table for the low-probability state is used to determine whether or not to win, but in the high-probability state, there are many special symbol hit / miss random numbers that are determined to be a big hit. The table is used to determine whether or not it is true (see FIG. 8A). In other words, when the probability change function of the special symbol operates, the result of the variable display of the special symbol is a big hit (the stop symbol becomes a big hit symbol), as compared with when it is not operating, the probability is high. The means (main control unit) for setting the high probability or the low probability as the probability of the special symbol hit determination (big hit probability) is called "probability setting means".

  In addition, the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is called a "time saving state" when the variable time reduction function is operating, and a non-operating state is called "non-time saving state". In the time saving state, the average value of the variation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the variation display to the time of the confirmation display) is shorter than the average value of the variation time of the special symbol in the non-time saving state. That is, in the time saving state, the variation pattern is determined by using the variation pattern table that is determined such that the variation pattern having the shorter variation time is selected more frequently than the non-time saving state (see FIG. 9). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digesting the special figure reservation becomes faster, and an effective ball entry into the starting opening (ball entry that can be stored as the special figure reservation) is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, since the length of the variation time of the second special symbol is particularly related to the advantage / disadvantage of the player, it is set as the "second special symbol time-shortening function" as shown in FIG. There is. When the second special symbol time saving function is not operating, that is, in the state A shown in FIG. 9, when the player performs a right-handed game and enters the game ball into the second starting opening 21, the second special While the symbol hit determination is executed, the second special symbol is variably displayed. However, the variation time of the second special symbol in the state A is set to a very long time (10 minutes off, 3 minutes for big hits, 2 minutes for small hits), so the game cannot proceed smoothly (such a state. Is also referred to as “first condition state”). Therefore, even if a right-handed game is played in the state A, it is difficult for the player to obtain a large amount of game balls. Therefore, in the state A, the game is progressed as a left-handed game, aiming at the first starting opening 20 in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to an appropriate length. On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol simultaneously (in parallel), In the state A, even if the second special symbol is variably displayed by mistake, without waiting for the variable display of the second special symbol to end, let the game ball enter the first starting opening 20. , The first special symbol can be variably displayed.

  When the second special symbol time saving function is operating, that is, when the state B or state C shown in FIG. 9 (such a state is also referred to as “second condition state”), as shown in FIG. 9, 2 Because the variation time of special symbols becomes short, the player does not reduce the number of balls he holds compared to the left-handed game by performing a right-handed game (maintaining or slightly decreasing in state B, state C In, while increasing), it is possible to smoothly execute the game (second special symbol hit determination, variable game of the second special symbol). Further, in the present embodiment, during the period when the second special symbol time saving function is operating, the first special symbol time saving function is also operated, but the first special symbol time saving function may not be operated.

  Probability variation function and variation time shortening function (second special symbol time saving function) for special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) operate simultaneously. And, the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function for the normal symbol are designed to operate in synchronization with the high base generation function. That is, the probability change function and the change time shortening function of the normal symbol operate in the high game base state (low accurate high base state, high accurate high base state), and low base state (low accurate low base state, high accurate state) It does not work in the low base state). Therefore, in the high base state (state B), the hit probability in the normal symbol hit determination is higher than the low base state (also referred to as "universal figure high probability state"). That is, in the high base state (state B), the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) determined to be a hit is for the state B which is larger than the normal symbol hit determination table used in the low base state (states A and C). Ordinary symbol hit determination table (ordinary symbol determination) is performed using the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 8C). That is, when the probability variation function of the normal symbol display 42 operates, the probability that the variation display of the normal symbol will be a hit (the stop symbol will be a normal hit symbol) is higher than when it is not operating. .

  In the high base state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the low base state. In the first embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds in the low base state, but is 1 second in the high base state (see FIG. 8 (E)). Furthermore, in the high base state, the opening time of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the low base state. That is, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 is operating. Specifically, when the result of the normal symbol hit / miss judgment is a win in the low base state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs the opening operation for 0.9 seconds three times (opening time: 2.7 seconds) and opens. The second starting port is opened during the operation. In addition, when the result of the normal symbol hit / miss judgment becomes a hit in the high base state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 is supposed to perform the opening operation for 6.0 seconds once (opening time: 6.0 seconds). . Also, the closing time between the opening operations in the low base state is set to 0.1 seconds. In the present embodiment, the number of opening operations of the opening / closing member 37 is different between the low base state and the high base state, but the opening operations may be the same. For example, the opening operation in the low base state may be opened once in 2.7 seconds, or the opening operation in the high base state may be opened three times in 2.0 seconds. Further, the opening operation in the high base state may be opened six times in 1.0 second, and may be set to be larger than the opening number in the low base state. In such a case, the function of increasing the number of times of opening of the variable winning device 22 is also called to operate.

  In the high base state, the probability variation function for the normal symbol, the variation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 are activated, so that these functions are not in operation as compared with the low base state. , The period during which the second starting opening 21 is open becomes long (the opening time per unit time becomes long), and the frequency of game balls entering the second starting opening 21 becomes high (also called "high frequency state"). ). As a result, the frequency of execution of the second special symbol hit determination increases. As described above, in the high base state, it is possible to aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls on hand.

  Further, if the opening time is the same, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball will pass through the second starting opening 21 if the opening frequency is smaller. In this embodiment, the opening mode of the second starting port 21 in the high base state is set to one opening of 6.0 seconds, and the variation time of the normal symbol is set to an extremely short time (1 second). In addition, during the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the second starting port 21 is in the closed state, so the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is that the game ball starts to flow down on the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 in the closed state. Therefore, the time is set to such an extent that the movable member 23 of the second starting opening 21 is opened before passing through the upper surface. When the movable member 23 is in the open state while flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 enters the second starting port 21 in the opened state. In addition, in order to prevent the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 from passing through the upper surface of the movable member 23, the material forming the upper surface (game ball passage) of the movable member 23 is set to the front side game. The material has a higher coefficient of friction than the material that composes the ball passage (the material is different). As a result, the velocity of the game ball flowing down on the upper surface of the movable member 23 is set to be slower than the velocity of the rapid game flow in the game ball passage on the front side thereof. In addition, as an aspect of reducing the flow-down speed, other than that, the inclination angle may be made gentle, or an inhibiting member (projection or the like) for reducing the flow-down speed may be provided. Further, as a result, in the high base state, the game ball that has flown down to the second starting opening 21 does not enter the second starting opening 21 (flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23), and the second big winning opening. The possibility that it will flow down to 35 is further reduced. That is, in the high base state, even if the second big winning opening 35 is opened and the second winning hole 35 is in the open state (state in which the ball can be entered), the game ball that has flowed down enters the second starting opening 21 and It is difficult to enter the special winning opening 35.

  The high base state need not operate all of the above functions. That is, due to the operation of at least one function of the probability changing function for the regular symbols, the changing time shortening function, and the opening time extending function of the variable winning a prize device 22, the second starting opening than that when the function is not operating It suffices that 21 is easily opened (frequency of entry is high). Further, the high base state may be independently controlled without being associated with the special symbol time saving state. A function that generates such a high base state is called a "high base generation function".

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, since the winning / damaging determination of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the winning / damaging determination of the first special symbol, the player plays the first special symbol. There is a possibility that the second special symbol will be variably displayed without being variably displayed. That is, even in the normal state (low-probability low base state), there is a possibility of trying to play a right-handed game. However, as described above, in the normal state (low accurate low base state), the variation time (average variation time) of the second special symbol is extremely long compared to the variation time (average variation time) of the first special symbol. Therefore, even if the second special symbol is variably displayed in the normal state, it cannot be variably displayed many times, and the game efficiency is very poor. That is, it is advantageous for the player to variably display the first special symbol by the left-handed game rather than variably display the second special symbol by the right-handed game. Here, "the state in which the first special symbol is not playing (non-gaming state)" means that the first special symbol is not being variably displayed (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of holdings of the first special symbol is "0. It is said that. Further, "the state in which the second special symbol is not playing (non-gaming state)" means that the second special symbol is not being variably displayed (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of second special symbols held is "0". It means that.

  In addition, high base state such as high accurate high base state and low accurate high base state, and in the high accurate low base state, due to the second special symbol time saving function, the variation time of the second special symbol becomes short and the right-handed game It improves the game efficiency. In such a case, it is better to perform a right-handed game and perform a second special symbol winning / absence determination that is advantageous for the player, so that the game can be advantageously progressed. Further, in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is more easily opened than in the low base state, and it is easier to enter the second starting port 21 than to enter the first starting port 20. It is because. Therefore, while passing the game ball to the gate 28 which is the trigger of the normal symbol hit / absence determination, a right strike is performed to allow the game ball to enter the second starting opening 21.

  Further, in the highly accurate low base state, the frequency of entering the second starting opening 21 is similar to that in the low accurate low base state (normal state), but is executed based on the entering of the second starting opening 21. Since the variation time of the second special symbol is changed in a short time, a right-handed game capable of executing the second special symbol hit determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol hit determination is performed. Moreover, in the high-accuracy low-base state, the probability variation function for the regular symbols, the variation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 do not operate, so the entry into the second starting opening 21 is performed. The ball frequency is low compared to the high base state. Therefore, a prize ball based on the ball entering the second starting opening 21 cannot be obtained as in the high base state. However, instead, by the second special symbol hit determination, by small hits that occur with a high probability (small hit probability: 300/630), prevent the game ball from decreasing during the big hits, rather rather small hits occur frequently. It is also possible to increase the number of balls to be held by (generating multiple times).

  That is, in the high base state (low accurate high base state, high accurate high base state), by frequently entering the ball into the second starting port 21 by the right-handed game, without greatly reducing the ball holding, 2 Aim for the next big hit by the special symbol judgment. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls based on the ball entering the second starting opening 21 is set to one, and even if all the right-handed game balls enter the second starting opening 21, the game is played. Sphere does not increase (maintains). Further, in this embodiment, about 90 to 95% of the right-handed game balls are set to enter the second starting opening 21, so unless the ball enters another entering opening, the high base If the condition is maintained for a long period of time, it is designed to reduce the number of balls it holds.

  On the other hand, in the high-accuracy low-base state, the right hitting game causes a small hit at a high frequency by the second special symbol hit determination based on the ball entering the second starting opening 21 to hold the ball in the small hitting game. Along with increasing the number, aim for the next big hit by the second special symbol hit determination. In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, in the high-accuracy low base state, the longer the period during which the next big hit does not occur (the longer the high-accuracy low base state continues, the larger the number of small hits generated. Opportunities (to execute the small hit game) increase, which is advantageous to the player.

[Explanation of board structure and game status]
Further, as shown in FIG. 3, in the right game area 3B (second game area), various entrances are provided with gates 28 (starting gate 29), first big winning opening 30, and first entrance from the upstream side of the game area. The second starting opening 21 and the second winning opening 35 are arranged in an optimal order. Further, since the game ball downflow passage of the right game area 3B is formed as shown in FIG. 3, when each of these winning openings is closed, most of the game balls shot to the right game area 3B (90% Above) passes through the gate 28 (starting gate 29), then flows down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 of the first special winning opening 30, then flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting opening 21, and then the second It is configured to flow down on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 of the winning opening 35 and down to the out opening 34. Then, if there is an open winning port in the middle of the flow, it enters the winning port, is discharged from the winning port to the back of the game board, and the entered gaming ball is in the downstream game area. It has a non-existent structure.

  By arranging the gate 28 in the uppermost stream, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the opening of the second starting port 21 or the like prevents the game ball from reaching the gate 28. Further, the normal symbol hold becomes "0", and it is possible to prevent a waiting time (a state in which the normal symbol does not change) from occurring as much as possible. That is, by arranging the gate 28 at the uppermost stream of the right game area, almost all game balls hit right can be passed through the gate 28 regardless of whether or not other winning openings are opened. In addition, since the game ball that has passed through the gate 28 flows down to the downstream side of the right game area as it is, the existence of the gate 28 does not hinder the entrance to other winning openings.

  When the right hitting game is performed in the high base state (low accurate high base state, high accurate high base state), first, the game ball passes through the gate 28, and it is determined whether or not to open the second starting opening 21. To be done. In the high base state, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time (1 second), and the probability of winning per normal symbol is set to a high probability (239/240), so the game ball is gated. Immediately (after 1 second) after passing through, the movable member 23 operates and the second starting port 21 is opened. That is, the game ball passes through the gate 28, the normal symbol hit determination is executed, and when the normal symbol fluctuates, before the game ball that has passed through the gate reaches the entrance of the second starting opening 21, 2 The starting port 21 is opened. In addition, the opening time of the second starting opening 21 is also set to 6.0 seconds once, so as long as the right-handed game is continued, the second starting opening 21 is closed during the normal symbol variation time of 1 second. , Then open once for 6.0 seconds, closed during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second, then open once for 6.0 seconds, the cycle of repeating (1 second closed → 6 Open for 0.0 seconds → Close for 1 second → Open for about 6.0 seconds → ...).

  Therefore, when the right hitting game is performed in the high base state, the second starting opening 21 is almost opened, and most (about 80 to 90%) of the game balls flowing down the right playing area 3B are in the second starting opening 21. You will enter the ball. Moreover, when the game ball enters the second starting port 21, the second special symbol winning / discarding determination is executed. In the second special symbol hit determination, in the high-accurate high-base state, it is a big hit with a probability of 1/63, a small hit with a probability of 30/63, and is out with a probability of 32/63.

  First, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination is out, the game ball flowing down the right game area 3B, after passing through the gate 28, most (about 80 to 90%) of the game ball is in the open state. Enter the ball into the second starting port 21, other game balls flow down from the game ball passage branched before the second starting port 21 downstream, without flowing down into the second starting port 21, the third starting port It enters the ball 26 or flows into the outlet 34. Thereby, the second special symbol hit determination is continuously executed. In addition, since one prize ball is discharged by entering one ball in the second starting opening 21, the second special symbol winning / disabling judgment is executed with almost no reduction in the number of balls held, and the next big hit is aimed at. It becomes possible. In addition, one prize ball is discharged also by having entered one ball in the third starting port 26.

  Next, when the result of the second special symbol hit determination is a big hit, the first big winning opening 30 on the upstream side of the second starting opening 21 becomes an open state in a mode according to the big hit type shown in FIG. .. Further, the second special winning opening 35 provided on the downstream side of the second starting opening 21 is not opened in the big hit game. As a result, when the big hit game is started, the game ball flowing down by the right-handed game is smoothly prevented from being blocked by the other winning openings such as the second starting opening 21 and the first winning opening. Enter the ball at 30. Here, when the second starting opening 21 is arranged upstream of the first big winning opening 30, the low starting state shifts during the big hit game, but in the present embodiment, the second starting opening 21 remains in the low base state. Since it is designed to be frequently opened, the game ball flowing down the right game area during the big hit game first entered the second starting opening 21 and did not enter the second starting opening 21. A situation occurs in which only the game balls enter the second special winning opening 30.

  Moreover, since the number of prize balls based on the ball entering the second starting opening 21 is one, the execution time of the big hit game is unnecessarily lengthened and there is no merit to the player. Rather, the game becomes redundant, the game may not progress smoothly, and the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, by disposing the first special winning opening 30 on the upstream side of the second starting opening 21 as in the present embodiment, such a situation can be prevented and the big hit game can be smoothly advanced. Become. Since the first big winning opening 30 is not opened except during the big hitting game, the first big winning opening 30 may prevent the ball from entering the second starting opening 21 during the big hitting game. Absent.

  Next, when the result of the second special symbol hit determination is a small hit, the second big winning opening 35 on the downstream side of the second starting opening 21 is in the open state in the opening / closing mode for the small hit shown in FIG. Become. Specifically, the opening operation for 0.3 seconds is executed 6 times (the closing time between the opening operations is 0.1 seconds). However, as described above, in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is open for most of the time. Therefore, about 99% (almost all) of the game balls flowing down to the second starting opening 21 enter the second starting opening 21 arranged on the upstream side of the second special winning opening 35. Therefore, in the high base state, it is a small hit, and even when a small hit game in which the second big winning opening 35 is opened is executed, the second big winning on the downstream side is made by the second starting opening 21 on the upstream side. The entry into the mouth 35 is hindered and it is difficult to enter the second big winning opening 35. Although the number is small (though unlikely), even in the high base state, when the second starting opening 21 is in the closed state, the game ball that has passed the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting opening 21 When the second special winning opening 35 is reached, the game ball can enter the second special winning opening 35 if the second special winning opening 35 is in the open state.

  Next, the highly accurate low base state will be described. The high-probability low base state is a low base state, but since the variation time of the second special symbol is short, it is advantageous for the player to proceed with the game by hitting it to the right. When the right hitting game is performed in the high-accuracy low-base state, the game ball first passes through the gate 28, and the determination of whether or not to open the second starting opening 21 (normal symbol determination) is executed. In the low base state (highly accurate low base state), the variation time of the normal symbol is set to a long time (3 seconds) compared to the high base state, and the probability per normal symbol is about half that of the high base state ( Since 120/240) is set, after the game ball passes through the gate, after a short time (3 seconds later), if it hits, the movable member 23 operates and the second starting opening 21 is opened. Becomes Since the probability of hitting is about 1/2, hits and misses occur about half and half.

  That is, the game ball passes through the gate 28, the normal symbol winning / absence determination is executed, and when the normal symbol fluctuates and is displayed, after the game ball passing through the gate passes through the entrance of the second starting opening 21, the second The starting port 21 is opened. Also, the opening time of the second starting opening 21 is set to 0.9 seconds and opened three times (the closing time between opening is 0.1 seconds), so long as the right-handed game is continued, the second starting opening 21 is It closes during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds, and when it hits, then it opens 3 times for 0.9 seconds, and when it comes off, it becomes the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds again. Looking at an example in which the hit and the off occur alternately, the second starting port 21 is closed during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds, then opened 3 times for 0.9 seconds, and the normal symbol for 3 seconds It will be closed during the fluctuation time, will be disengaged, and will be closed during the normal pattern fluctuation time of 3 seconds, and the cycle will be repeated (3 seconds closed → about 2.7 seconds open → 3 seconds closed → 3 seconds closed → about Open for 2.7 seconds → Close for 3 seconds → Close for 3 seconds → Open for about 2.7 seconds ...

  Therefore, when a right-handed game is performed in the highly accurate low base state, the period in which the second starting opening 21 is in the open state is about 30%, and the period in which it is in the closed state is about 70%. . Therefore, in the highly accurate low base state, the second starting opening 21 is compared with the high base state in which the opening period is about 90% and the closing state is about 10%. It is highly possible that the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the mouth 21 will pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23 and reach the entrance of the second special winning opening 35 without entering the second starting opening 21. . In addition, the possibility that the result of the second special symbol hit determination will be a small hit, whether it is a high base state (low accurate high base state, high accurate high base state) or high accurate low base state Absent. That is, the small hit probability does not change regardless of the game state (small hit probability: 300/630). In addition, the result of the first special symbol hit determination to be executed in the left-handed game does not have a small hit, the small special hit only to the result of the second special symbol hit determination performed in the right-handed game ing.

  As described above, in the high-accuracy low base state, about 70% of the game balls flowing down the right game area (flowing down to the second starting port 21) enter the second starting port 21. Without flowing, it flows down to the second special winning opening 35 provided downstream of the second starting opening 21. As a result, when the result of the second special symbol hit determination is a small hit, the second big winning opening 35 on the downstream side of the second starting opening 21 opens in the opening / closing mode for the small hit shown in FIG. It becomes a state. Specifically, the opening operation of 0.3 seconds is executed 6 times (closing time between opening operations is 0.1 seconds, total opening time is 1.8 seconds). Then, the game ball that has passed through the gate 28 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 of the first special winning opening 30 and flows down to the second starting opening 21, and if the second starting opening 21 is in the open state, 2 Enter the ball into the starting port 21, and if the second starting port 21 is in the closed state, pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 and flow down to the second big winning port 35, and a small hit game To enter the second special winning opening 35 in the open state.

  Since the prize balls based on the balls entering the second special winning opening 35 are 10 prize balls for each single winning, the second special winning opening 35 is entered during the small hit game. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the number of balls that the player has in the high-accuracy low-base state. The high-probability low base state, at least, continues until the next big hit occurs by the special symbol hit determination (as long as the right-handed game is continued, only the second special symbol hit determination), high-precision low base state As the game continues for a long time, the player can increase the number of balls he holds. Incidentally, in this embodiment, it is possible to obtain an average of about 20 prize balls (two entrance balls) by the occurrence of one small hit game. By generating this small hit game a plurality of times (a large number of times) until the next big hit occurs, it is possible to increase a large number of game balls (for example, 10 times 200). Further, as a result, the total amount of balls to be won in the "Renso period" in which the right-handed game is continued can be added to the amount of balls to win the small hit game in addition to the amount of balls to win the big hit game. Further, this makes it possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, the gate 28, the first big winning opening 30 for big hits (only for big hits), and the second big winning opening 35 arranged downstream (the most downstream of these) from the second starting opening 21 are for small hits ( It is said to be a big prize hole for small hits only). Further, by arranging the second big winning opening 35, which is a big winning opening for small hits, downstream of the second starting opening 21, the opening operation (opening / closing control) of the second starting opening 21 causes the second big opening. It is possible to control the number (ratio) of game balls that reach the winning opening 35. Specifically, by the opening / closing control of the second starting opening 21 (the time to be in the open state, the variation time of the normal symbol, the probability of winning the regular symbol judgment), when the small hit game is executed, the high base state ( The high-probability low-base state has a higher possibility of the game ball entering the second special winning opening 35 than the low-probability high-base state and the high-probability high-base state. In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, by forming a flow path that does not reach the second special winning opening 35 unless it passes through the second starting opening 21 (without entering a ball), 2 The effect of the opening / closing control of the starting port 21 is made more effective.

  Further, by this, even in the same right-handed game, while maintaining the holding ball by including the game ball in the second starting opening 21 (including slightly increasing or slightly decreasing) (or suppressing the speed of the holding ball decrease). While,) the state of playing with a expectation that the result of the second special symbol hit determination is a big hit (an advantageous big hit) (high base state), and a small ball with a game ball in the second starting opening 21. When a hit occurs, while increasing the number of balls to be put into the second big winning opening 35, the state of playing with the expectation that the result of the second special symbol hit determination will be a big hit (an advantageous big hit) (high accuracy low Base state), and has a variety of game playability. Further, this makes it possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game. It should be noted that, for the player, a gaming state in which the highly accurate low base state in which the number of balls held can be increased is more advantageous than the high base state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6, when the gaming state after the big hit game is set to a highly accurate high base state, in the highly accurate high base state, a variation of the special symbol a predetermined number of times (50 or 100) When the big hit does not occur until the display ends, the gaming state is supposed to change to the high-accuracy low base state. In addition, when the game state after the big hit game is set to the high base state, it is difficult to recognize whether the high base state is the low-probability high-base state or the high-probability high-base state in the effect symbol display section. The game effect is executed in such a display mode. As a result, even if the gaming state after the big hit game is not in the high-accuracy low base state but in the high-base state, after that, after a predetermined number of fluctuations, the state changes to the high-accuracy low base state. It is possible to expect and play a game. In addition, this makes it possible to maintain the entertainment of the game for a long time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, there are “2R fifth big hit” and “2R sixth big hit” as the types of big hits that shift from the high-accuracy high base state to the high-accuracy low base state. "2R 5th big hit" transitions from the high-precision high base state to the high-precision low base state after 50 variations of the special symbol display, and "2R 6th big jackpot" shows 100 variations of the special symbol. After passing, the high-accuracy high base state is changed to the high-accuracy low base state. In addition, "2R seventh big hit" and "2R eighth big hit" are provided as the highly accurate low base state. "2R 7th big hit", after 50 times the variation display of special symbols, shifts from the low accuracy high base state to the low accuracy low base state (normal state), "2R 8th big hit" is 100 times special When the variable display of the symbols is passed, the low accurate high base state is changed to the low accurate low base state (normal state). In this embodiment, the big hit game and the high hit after the big hit game according to the four big hit types of "2R fifth big hit", "2R sixth big hit", "2R seventh big hit", and "2R eighth big hit". By executing the common effect in the base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state the game state is. That is, the gaming state is a non-notification state.

  In the present embodiment, the distribution ratio (occurrence rate) of these “2R fifth big hit”, “2R sixth big hit”, “2R seventh big hit”, and “2R eighth big hit” in the non-notification state is 50 times. If the high base state (non-alarm state) continues even after the lapse of time, there is a higher possibility that the high base state will transition to the high-accuracy low base state when 100 times have elapsed than when the high base state ends in 50 times. It is supposed to do. Thereby, the player expects to shift to the high-accuracy low base state after 50 times, and when the high-base state continues without shifting to the high-accuracy low base state after 50 times ( Even in the case where the non-notification state continues), it is possible to further increase the expectation of the highly accurate low base state. As a result, it becomes possible to maintain the enjoyment of the game for a long time.

  Note that, instead of such a mode, even if the transition is made 50 times or 100 times, the possibility of transitioning to the high-accuracy low base state is set to be the same. On the contrary, the possibility of transition to the highly accurate low base state may be higher in the case of transition after 50 times than in the case of transition after 100 times. As a result, if the high base state continues even after 50 times, the expectation for the transition to the highly accurate low base state will be reduced. In addition, if another jackpot type is provided and the high base state continues even after the variable display of the special symbol for the first predetermined number of times has elapsed, after the second predetermined number of times larger than the first predetermined number of times has passed ( You may decide to move to a high-accuracy low-base state (unless you hit the jackpot by then). On the contrary, if the high base state continues even after the first predetermined number of times the variable display of the special symbol has passed, after the second predetermined number of times larger than the first predetermined number of times (if it is a big hit by then If not), it may be decided not to shift to the high-accuracy low base state. Further, when a predetermined condition (random number lottery, etc.) is satisfied in the middle of the non-notification state of the high base state, a character or a character that makes it easy for the player to recognize the game state is displayed (by executing the finalized effect). You may notify a state.

  Also, in the high-accuracy low base state, the result of the second special symbol hit determination, if the big hit, and if it is out, the result of the second special symbol hit determination in the high base state described above It is the same as when it is a big hit and when it is out.

  Further, the start gate 29 is also provided in the uppermost stream in the right game area 3B by also being used as the gate 28. As a result, when the jackpot standby state is reached, the game ball is passed to the start gate 29 at an arbitrary timing and the jackpot game is started without being blocked by the second starting opening 21 and the like from passing through the start gate 29. It becomes possible to do. The start gate 29 and the gate 28 may be provided separately. In that case, the start gate 29 may be upstream or downstream of the gate 28, but the first big winning opening 30, the second It is required to be provided upstream of the starting opening 21 and the second special winning opening 35.

  When the right-handed game is to be performed, the firing direction indicator 47 is controlled to light in a predetermined manner to notify that the right-handed game area should be fired. Further, when the left-handed game is to be performed, the firing direction indicator 47 is lighting-controlled (display controlled) in a predetermined manner to inform that the left-handed game area should be fired. Specifically, the firing direction indicator 47 is composed of two LEDs of "yz" and indicates the firing direction by turning on the LEDs according to the game state. For example, in the low base state, as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as "y □ z □" (for example, □: extinguished, ■: lit), it is possible to inform that the left game area should be launched. it can. Further, in the high base state, it is possible to inform that the right game area should be shot as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned on, such as "y z z" (for example, □: extinguished, ■: lit). it can.

  Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming state when the variation display of the identification information (special symbol, effect symbol) is performed is "low accurate low base state", "high accurate low base state", " It is possible to control to either "low accurate high base state" or "high accurate high base state". Among them, the low accurate low base state is also called "normal game state", and the high accurate low base state is Also called a "specific game state".

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 (control processing by the main control unit) will be described with reference to FIGS. The counter, flags, status, buffer, etc. appearing in the operation description of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided in the main control board 80 reads out and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80. .. As shown in FIG. 10, in the main control main process, initial setting is first performed (S101). In the initial setting, for example, stack setting, constant setting, interrupt time setting, CPU setting of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) setting, various flags, status and counter Reset etc. The initial value of the flag is “0”, that is, “OFF”, the initial value of the status is “1”, and the initial value of the counter is “0”. Moreover, the initial setting (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter. In the examples and drawings, the ordinary symbol is "general symbol", the special symbol is "special symbol", the first special symbol is "special symbol 1" or "first special symbol", and the second special symbol is "special symbol". Sometimes called "2" or "2nd special map".

  Next to the initial setting (S101), interrupts are prohibited (S102), and normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S103), the value of the various random number counters shown in FIG. 7 is updated by adding 1. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be randomly changed. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

  When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S103) ends, the interrupt is permitted (S104). While interrupts are enabled, interrupt processing (S105) can be executed. This interrupt process (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80 at a cycle of 4 msec, for example. Then, after the interrupt process (S105) ends, until the next interrupt process (S105) is started, the update process of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is repeated. Executed. When an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU in the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt process (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is permitted (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, the interrupt process (S105) will be described with reference to FIG. In the interrupt process (S105), the output process (S201) is first executed. In the output process (S201), the command (control signal) set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below is output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, or the like. To do. The commands and the like output here include the game state, the result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol is valid, the symbol as the jackpot type, the information regarding the variation pattern, and the like. The command is composed of, for example, 2-byte information. The upper 1 byte is information regarding the type of command, and the lower 1 byte is information regarding the content of the command.

  In the input processing (S202) that is performed after the output processing (S201), various sensors (first starting opening sensor 20a, second starting opening sensor 21a, first big winning opening sensor) that are mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1. The detection signals detected by 30a, the second big winning opening sensor 35a, the general winning opening sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5) are read and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as winning ball information. Further, a detection signal from a lower plate full switch for detecting the fullness of the surplus ball receiving plate 62 (also referred to as “lower plate”) is fetched and stored in the output buffer of the RAM 84 as lower plate full data.

  Then, the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S203) is executed. The normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S203) is similar to the ordinary symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the update process of the various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. 7 is the execution period of the timer interrupt process (S105) and the other period (after the completion of the interrupt process (S105), It is performed both during the period until the next interrupt process (S105) is started. As a result, the acquired values of various random numbers have randomness.

  After the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203), a starting mouth sensor detection process (S204), a starting ball entry process (S205), a universal figure operation process (S206), and a special figure 1 operation process (S207), which will be described later. ), Special figure 2 operation processing (S208), reserved ball number processing (S209), and power interruption monitoring processing (S210). After that, other various processes (S211) are executed, and the interrupt process (S105) ends. Then, until the interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (main control unit), the processing of S102 to S104 of the main control main processing is repeatedly executed (see FIG. 10), and the interrupt pulse is input. Then (after about 4 msec), the interrupt process (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) executed again, the command set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt process (S105) is output.

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
Next, the starting opening sensor detection processing (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. In the starting mouth sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), then the number of ordinary symbol holding balls (the number of ordinary symbol reservations, specifically the number of ordinary symbol reservations provided in RAM) It is determined whether the value) is 4 or more (S302). On the other hand, in S301, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305.

  If it is determined in S302 that the number of normal symbol holding balls is 4 or more (YES in S302), the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of normal symbol holding balls is not 4 or more (NO in S302), "1" is added to the stored number of normal symbol holding balls (S303), and the normal symbol random number obtaining process (S304) is performed. And proceed to S305. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value of the random number counter for normal symbol judgment (label-TRND-H, FIG. 7B) stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired. Then, the acquired random number value (acquisition information, general figure acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of normal symbol reservation balls in the general figure reservation storage unit provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

  In S305, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting opening 20, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the first starting opening sensor 20a (S305). When it is determined in S305 that the game ball has not entered the first starting opening 20 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309. On the other hand, if it is determined in S305 that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 20 (YES in S305), the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (the number of first special figure reserved, specifically, the main controller 80) It is determined whether the number of the counter for counting the number of the first special figure reservations provided in the RAM has reached 4 (the upper limit number) (S306). When it is determined in S306 that the number of special sphere 1 reserved balls has reached 4 (YES in S306), the process proceeds to S309. When it is determined in S306 that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is less than 4 (NO in S306), 1 is added to the stored number of special figure 1 reserved balls (S307), and special figure 1 related random number acquisition Processing is performed (S308), and the process proceeds to S309.

  In the special figure 1 relation random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the random number counter for special symbol validity determination stored in the updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM (label-TRND-A), the big hit type determination random number The value of the counter (label-TRND-AS) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (the value of the random number shown in FIG. 7A), and these acquired random numbers (acquisition information, special information) are acquired. (Figure acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved special figure 1 balls in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a.

  In S309, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 21, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the second starting port sensor 21a (S309). When it is determined in S309 that the game ball has not entered the second starting opening 21 (NO in S309), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S309 that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 21 (YES in S309), then the number of special ball 2 reserved balls (the number of second special map reserved, specifically the main control) It is determined whether or not the number of the counter for counting the number of second special figure reservations provided in the RAM of the unit 80 has reached 4 (upper limit number) (S310). Then, in S310, when it is determined that the number of special sphere 2 reserved balls has reached 4 (YES in S310), the process ends. If it is determined in S310 that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is less than 4 (NO in S310), "1" is added to the stored number of special figure 2 reserved balls (S311), and the special figure 2 relationship A random number acquisition process is performed (S312), and the process ends.

  In the special figure 2 relational random number acquisition process (S312), as in the special figure 1 relational random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol winning / disagreeing counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM (Label-TRND-A), the value of the jackpot type determining random number counter (Label-TRND-AS), and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (Label-TRND-T1) are acquired (shown in FIG. 7A). The random number value) and the obtained random number values are stored in the address space corresponding to the current special figure 2 holding sphere number in the second special figure holding storage unit 85b.

[Start-up processing]
Next, the starting ball entry process (S205) will be described with reference to FIG. The game control microcomputer 81 performs a start entrance time detection process (S205) subsequent to the start opening sensor detection process (S204). As shown in FIG. 13, in the starting ball entering process (S205), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 reserved ball number has increased by "1" (S315). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 has increased by “1” (YES in S315), the process proceeds to S316. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the special figure 2 reserved ball number in S307 in the starting port sensor detection process (S204) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting port. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 has not increased (NO in S315), the process proceeds to S319.

  In S316, the latest acquisition random number value (acquisition information) acquired in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (S308) in the immediately preceding starting opening sensor detection processing (S204) and stored in the second special figure pending storage unit is read ( S316). Next, the acquired random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S317). In S317, of the read random number values, the value of the random number counter for special symbol hit determination (random number value for special symbol hit determination) is a big hit depending on the current gaming state (low probability state or high probability state) Whether or not it is out (preliminary determination), and if the result of the determination is a big hit, the type of big hit is further determined (preliminary judgment). The determination in S317 (preliminary determination) is a prior determination (a so-called "holding prefetching") in which the determination of whether or not the special figure 2 is held (judgment of whether or not it is a big hit) is performed prior to the determination of whether or not the special figure 2 is described later. )).

  It should be noted that the pre-judgment of whether or not it is a big hit is a big hit judgment table (see FIG. 8 (A)), that is, a big hit judgment table for a high probability state if it is a high probability state, or a normal state (low probability state). For example, it is possible to determine whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value based on the jackpot determination table for the normal state. Further, as another pre-determination mode, as a variation pattern information determination table capable of determining variation pattern information, a variation pattern information determination table for a normal state (for a low probability state) and a variation pattern information determination table for a high probability state (for a high probability state) And the variation pattern information determination table. Then, in the pre-determination, based on the acquired random number value (such as the value of the random number counter for determining the special symbol) and the variation pattern information determination table according to the gaming state, the predetermined variation pattern information is selected. It is possible to Then, from the selected variation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether or not it is a big hit, a big hit type, whether or not a game effect with a high jackpot reliability is executed.

  Next, in S318, game information related to the result of the determination in S317 (preliminary determination information), specifically, information indicating whether or not the special symbol randomness determination random number value and the big hit determination value (big hit information), Information (big hit type information) indicating the value of the random number counter for big hit type determination (random number value for big hit type determination), information indicating whether or not the random value for special symbol validity determination matches the small hit determination value (small hit information ), Command data including information indicating the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random value) and the like are generated as a special figure 2 starting ball entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S318). As a special figure 2 start-up ball input command, a part or all of the values of the special figure 2 acquisition random numbers read in S316 may be directly transmitted to the sub-control board, or the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random numbers may be transmitted. May not be transmitted as it is, and the game information (for example, the above-described variation pattern information) acquired based on the value of the random number for obtaining special map 2 may be transmitted.

  In addition, by analyzing the special figure 2 starting ball entry command transmitted from the main control unit 80 by the sub-control unit 90, whether or not it is information about a big hit, what kind of big hit type, and information about a small hit. The sub-control unit 90 can identify whether there is any. In addition, in the present embodiment, in addition to this, by analyzing the special figure 2 start entering ball command, whether or not the obtained special figure 2 acquisition random number is a big hit when it is determined in a high probability state, It is possible to specify whether or not it is a big hit when it is judged in the probability state. As a result, the sub-control unit 90 stores the received special figure 2 start-up ball input command as a hold (effect holding information), predetermines the effect holding information at a specific timing, and determines whether or not the result is low probability. It is possible to determine whether or not the effect holding information determined to be a big hit is stored.

  In addition, from the viewpoint of fraud prevention, the random number value for special symbol validity determination out of the acquired random number value read in S316 is not sent to the sub-control unit as it is, and the value of the other random number counter for determining jackpot type (big hit) Command data including information indicating the type determination random number value), the value of the variation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number value), and the information indicating the result of the preliminary determination is generated as the special figure 2 start admission command, and Can be set.

  Next, in S319, it is determined whether or not the number of special sphere 1 reserved balls has increased by “1” as in the case of the above-mentioned special diagram 2 (S319). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls for special figure 1 has increased by “1” (YES in S319), the process proceeds to S321. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the special figure 1 reserved ball number in S311 in the starting opening sensor detection processing (S204) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first starting opening. On the other hand, if it is determined in S319 that the number of special sphere 1 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S319), the process ends. The processes of S321 to S323 are the same as those of S316 to S318 described above with respect to Toku-zu 1. That is, the latest acquisition random number value (acquisition information) acquired in the special figure 1-related random number acquisition processing (S312) in the starting opening sensor detection processing (S204) and stored in the first special figure pending storage unit is read (S321), Preliminary determination is performed on the read acquired random number value (S322). Then, the command data including the game information related to this preliminary determination is generated as the special figure 1 starting entrance command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S323). The pre-determination (holding prefetching) in S322 is performed prior to the success / failure determination in the special figure 1 success / failure determination processing described later.

[Public motion processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal figure operation process (S206) shown in FIG. 14 subsequent to the starting ball entry process (S205). In the normal figure operation process (S206), the process relating to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and the "universal figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each stage. . When the "universal figure operation status" is "1" (YES in S401), the normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and when the "universal figure operation status" is "2" (S401 NO in S, YES in S403), the normal symbol changing process (S404) is performed, and if the "general pattern operation status" is "3" (NO in S401 and S403, YES in S405), the normal symbol is confirmed If the "universal figure operation status" is "4" (S401, S403, S405 are all NO), the normal electric auditor processing (S407) is performed. The general operation status is "1" by default.

[Normal pattern waiting process]
Next, the normal symbol waiting process (S402) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol standby process (S402), first, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (S501), and when it is determined to be "0" in S501 (YES in S501), the process To finish. On the other hand, in S501, when it is determined that it is not “0” (NO in S501), a normal symbol winning / defining determination process described later is performed (S502), and then a normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, referring to the normal symbol variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8D, if the game state is a high base state (state B), the variation time of the ordinary symbol is usually 1 second. Select a pattern variation pattern. On the other hand, if the gaming state is a low base state (states A and C), the normal symbol variation pattern in which the variation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds is selected. Further, after the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (S503), a normal symbol random number shift process described later is performed (S504), then the normal symbol fluctuation start process is performed (S505), and the process ends. In the normal symbol fluctuation start process (S505), the normal symbol fluctuation display is started in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to "2". Further, in the normal symbol variation start processing, in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the variation start of the normal symbol, a normal symbol variation start command is set.

[Normal symbol judgment process]
Next, the normal symbol validity determination process (S502) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol appropriateness determination process (S502), first, the value of the random number counter for normal symbol appropriateness determination (label-TRND-H) stored in the universal symbol reservation storage unit is read (S601). Next, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not the gaming state is the high base state (the low certainty high base state or the high certainty high base state) (S602). In S602, if the state B flag is ON, that is, if it is determined to be in the high base state (YES in S602), the table for state B (hit determination in the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 8C) It is determined whether or not it is a hit by the high-probability universal figure hit determination based on the values “0” to “238”) (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the read value of the random number counter for normal symbol validity determination (label-TRND-H) matches any of the hit determination values.

  On the other hand, in S602, if the state B flag is not ON, that is, if it is determined to be in a low base state (NO in S602), state A (state C) in the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 8C. Whether or not it is a hit is determined by the low probability universal figure hit determination based on the table for use (hit determination value is “0” to “119”) (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. Then, in S605, it is determined whether or not the result of the general / universal figure hit determination (S603, S604) is a hit (normal figure hit) (S605), and if it is determined to be out (NO in S605), stop display is displayed. A normal pattern (a non-general pattern) is determined (S606), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S605 that it is a hit (general figure hit) (YES in S605), the hit normal symbol to be stopped and displayed (general figure hit symbol) is determined (S607), and the universal figure hit flag is turned on (S608 ), Processing is completed.

[Normal pattern random number shift processing]
Next, the normal symbol random number shift processing (S504) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol random number shift processing (S504), first, the normal symbol holding sphere number is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each universal figure reservation in the universal figure reservation storage unit is shifted one from the current position to the side to be read (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest-order reserved memory in the universal figure pending storage unit, is emptied (“0”), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth of the universal figure pending storage is cleared to 0 (S703). ), Processing is completed. In this way, the universal figure hold is digested in the hold order.

[Ordinary symbol fluctuation processing]
Next, the normal symbol changing process (S404) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal symbol variation process (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (S801), and when it is determined that it has not elapsed (NO in S801), the process Finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time has elapsed (YES in S801), the normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802), the normal symbol operation status is set to "3" (S803), and then the variable display of the normal symbol is changed, Other processing such as stopping at a display result (hit ordinary symbol or out-of-normal symbol) according to the determination result of the random number for normal symbol determination (S804), the process ends.

[Normal symbol determination process]
Next, the normal symbol determination process (S406) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the universal symbol hit flag is ON (S901). When it is determined that the universal figure hit flag is not ON (NO in S901), the universal figure operation status is set to "1" (S905), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the universal figure hit flag is ON (YES in S901), then it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not it is in the high base state (S902). When it is determined in S902 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S902), the opening pattern for the state B (for the high base state) is set as the opening pattern for the variable winning a prize device 22 (the second starting opening 21). (S903), the process proceeds to S904. The opening pattern for the state B (for the high base state) is an opening pattern in which the opening for 1.8 seconds is repeated three times as described above. Therefore, "3" is set to the second starting port opening counter that counts the number of times the second starting port 21 is opened.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S902), the variable winning device 22 (second starting opening 21) is opened as the opening pattern for state A and state C (for low base state). A pattern is set (S906), and the process proceeds to S904. The opening pattern for the state A and the state C (for the low base state) is an opening pattern in which the opening for 0.9 seconds is performed three times as described above. Therefore, "3" is set in the second opening opening counter. In S904, the universal figure operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this processing ends.

[Normal electric accessory processing]
Next, the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407) will be described with reference to FIG. In the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the universal figure end flag is ON (S1001). The universal figure hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second starting opening 21 is ended in the auxiliary game executed as a hit. When it is determined that the end-of-universal flag is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is open (S1002). If it is determined in S1002 that the second starting port is not open (NO in S1002), then it is determined whether it is time to open the second starting port 21 (S1003), and it is not the opening time. If determined (NO in S1003), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1003 that it is the opening timing of the second starting port (YES in S1003), control for opening the second starting port is executed (S1004), and the process is ended. If it is determined in S1002 that the second starting port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), it is time to close the second starting port 21 (that is, after opening the second starting port 21 in advance. It is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time has elapsed) (S1005), and when it is determined that it is not the time to close the second starting opening (NO in S1005), the process ends. When it is determined in S1005 that it is the closing timing of the second starting port (YES in S1005), the process of closing the second starting port 21 (closed) is performed (S1006), and the value of the second starting port opening counter is set. Is decremented by 1 (S1007), and the process proceeds to S1008.

  In S1008, it is determined whether or not the value of the second opening opening counter is "0" (S1008). If it is determined in S1008 that the value of the opening counter is not "0" (NO in S1008), the process is ended to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, in S1008, when it is determined that the value of the release counter is "0" (YES in S1008), the universal figure ending process for ending the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and the universal figure ending flag is set ( (S1010), the process ends. Incidentally, the second starting opening opening counter becomes "0" when the opening of the second starting opening 21 (opening operation of the movable member 23) is performed three times during the state B (high base state), and the state A Also, during the state C (low base state), if the second starting opening 21 is opened three times, it becomes "0". On the other hand, if it is determined in S1001 that the universal figure end flag is ON (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second starting opening 21 for the number of times set in S903 or S906 has been completed. , The universal figure hit end flag is turned off (S1011), the universal figure hit flag is turned off (S1012), the universal figure operation status is set to "1" (S1013), and the process is ended. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) will be executed again as the normal pattern operation process (FIG. 14).

[Special figure 1 operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 operation processing (S207) after the normal figure operation processing (S206). This special figure 1 operation process will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 29. In the special figure 1 operation process (S207), as shown in FIG. 21, the process relating to the special symbol display section 41 and the special winning device (first big winning device 31 and second big winning device 36) is divided into five stages, "Special figure 1 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these stages. And, when "special figure 1 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1101), special symbol 1 standby processing (S1102) is performed, and when "special figure 1 operation status" is "2" (NO in S1101, YES in S1103), special symbol 1 fluctuation process (S1104) is performed, and if "special map 1 operation status" is "3" (NO in S1101, S1103, YES in S1105) ), Special symbol 1 determination process (S1106) is performed, and if "special diagram 1 operation status" is "4" (NO in S1101, S1103, S1105, YES in S1107), special electric as a big hit game When the accessory processing 1 (S1108) is performed and the "special figure 1 operation status" is "5" (S1101, S1103, S1105, and S1107 are all NO), the processing ends. The special figure 1 operation status is "1" by default. Further, since the small hit is not set as a result of the first special symbol hit determination, the special electric auditors product processing 2 is not executed in the special figure 1 operation process, but the small hit is set as a result of the first special symbol hit determination. You may. In this case, when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "5", the special electric auditors product processing 2 as a small hit game is executed.

[Special symbol 1 standby processing]
Next, the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of holding balls of the first starting port 20 (that is, the number of holding balls of special figure 1) is "0" (S1201). When it is determined in S1201 that the number of reserved balls for special map 1 is “0”, that is, there is no storage of the random number counter value acquired based on the ball entering the first starting opening 20 (YES in S1201), then , It is determined whether or not the special map 2 is in the game (S1207). Then, in S1207, when it is determined that the special figure 2 is in the game (YES in S1207), the process is ended. On the other hand, in S1207, when it is determined that the special figure 2 is not playing (NO in S1207), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is being processed as a standby screen (during the demo screen for waiting for customers). It is determined whether or not (S1208), and when it is determined that the standby screen is being displayed (YES in S1208), the process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1208 that the standby screen is not in progress (NO in S1208), the standby screen setting process for displaying the standby screen is executed (S1209), and the process ends.

  If it is determined in S1201 that the number of reserved balls for special figure 1 is not “0”, that is, there is at least one memory of the random number counter value acquired based on the ball entering the first starting opening 20 (in S1201). NO), the special figure 1 validity determination processing (S1203), the special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing (S1204), the special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1205), and the special figure 1 variation start processing (S1206), which will be described later, are performed in this order. Here, "special figure 2 (second special symbol) is not playing" means that special figure 2 is not being displayed in a variable manner (including the fixed stop display time) and the special figure 2 holding ball number is "0". Means that. Of course, it means that the big hit game and the small hit game according to Toku-zu 2 are not executed.

[Special Figure 1 Pass / Fail judgment process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the special figure 1 validity determination process (S1203) will be described. In the special figure 1 hit / absence judgment processing (S1203), first, as a judgment value, it is stored in the lowest area of the first special figure pending storage unit 85a of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first special figure pending first). The value (label-TRND-A) of the special symbol validity determination random number counter (of the oldest memory) that has been read is read (S1601). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 big hit variation flag is ON, that is, whether or not the second special symbol is performing a variation display related to the big hit (S1602). When it is determined in S1602 that the special figure 2 big hit variation flag is ON (YES in S1602), the process proceeds to S1607.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when one of the special symbols is executing the variable display related to the big hit, in the determination of the other special symbols, whether or not it is a big hit, a small hit or It is regarded as one of the outliers (that is, it is not judged as a big hit). In addition, since it does not have a small hit as a result of the first special symbol hit determination, when the second special symbol is executing the variable display related to the big hit, the result of the first special symbol hit determination executed during that period, Everything is out. In S1602, the special figure 2 big hit variation flag is not ON, that is, if it is determined that the second special symbol is not performing variation display related to big hits (NO in S1602), then whether or not the probability variation flag is ON, that is, It is determined whether or not there is a high probability state (S1603). In S1603, when the probability variation flag is not ON, that is, when it is determined that the probability is low (NO in S1603), the jackpot determination for the normal state (for the low probability state) in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) The win / no-judgment is performed based on the table (the jackpot determination values are "3" and "397") (S1604). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is ON (YES in S1603), the hit / miss determination is performed based on the jackpot determination table for the high-probability state in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) (S1605). In the jackpot determination table for the high probability state, the jackpot determination values are “3”, “53”, “113”, “173”, “227”, “281”, “337”, “397”, “449”. , "503".

  In S1606, it is determined whether or not the result of the big hit determination (S1604, S1605) is "big hit" (S1606), and when it is determined as a big hit (YES in S1606), the value of the big hit type determining random number counter (label-TRND- AS) is read, the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8B (S1608), and the jackpot symbol is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (S1609). Figure 1 The big hit variation flag is turned on (S1610), and the process ends. In addition, in the case of the hit determination related to the first special symbol, the big hit type is determined using the big hit type determination table for the first special symbol, and in the case of the hit determination related to the second special symbol, the second special symbol is used. The jackpot type determination table is used to determine the jackpot type. Further, when it is determined to be a big hit in the hit determination of the first special symbol (special figure 1), one of the 4R first big hit and the 4R second big hit is executed. In addition, when it is determined to be a big hit in the hit determination of the second special symbol (special figure 2), 15R third big hit, 4R fourth big hit, 2R fifth big hit, 2R sixth big hit, 2R seventh big hit, 2R Any of the eighth jackpots is executed (FIG. 8 (B)). On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the big hit determination (S1604, S1605) is not the “big hit” (NO in S1606), the process proceeds to S1607. In S1607, a deviation symbol is determined (S1607), and the process ends.

  Here, in the first embodiment, as the big hit variation flag, a first big hit variation flag indicating that the first special symbol is performing a variation display related to the big hit (variable display in which the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed). And, the second special symbol has a second big hit variation flag indicating that the variation display related to the big hit (variation display in which the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed) is being executed, and the main control unit 80. The corresponding flag is set in the jackpot variation flag storage means provided in the RAM. Also, as the small hit variation flag, a second small hit variation flag indicating that the second special symbol is performing a variation display related to the small hit (variable display in which the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed), The flag corresponding to the small hit variation flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main controller 80 is set. Then, for one special symbol, if the big hit variation flag is set (that is, during the variation display related to the big hit), in the other special symbol hit determination, the process of determining whether or not a big hit Not performed. That is, control such that both special symbols execute the variable display related to the big hit in parallel is not performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an excessively large amount of game profit is given to the player in an extremely short time, and the gambling property can be appropriately suppressed.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection processing]
In the special symbol 1 standby process (FIG. 22), after the special symbol 1 hit / absence determination process (S1203), the special symbol 1 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1204). As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing (S1204), first, it is determined whether or not the game state is state A (whether or not it is a low-probability low base state) (S1701). When it is determined in S1701 that the state is the state A (YES in S1701), it is then determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON (S1702), and the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON. When it is determined (YES in S1702), the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) is referred to with reference to the state A jackpot table (the portion corresponding to state A and the jackpot in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). The variation pattern is selected based on (S1703). If the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. Further, in the first embodiment, one of the variation patterns P1 to P3 having different variation time lengths is selected according to the state A big hit table.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is not ON (NO in S1702), it is then determined whether the number of reserved balls (reserved number) is 1 or 2 (S1705). If it is determined in S1705 that the number of holdings is either 1 or 2 (YES in S1705), the state A first holding number deviation table (state A in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 1 and 2), the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1). If it is determined in S1705 that the number of holdings is neither 1 nor 2, that is, the number of holdings is 3 or 4 (NO in S1705), the state A second holding number deviation table (Fig. In the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9, the variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the state A, the deviation, and the numbers corresponding to the numbers 3 and 4 to be held.

  As a result, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "3" or "4", the fluctuation time is shorter than when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "1" or "2". The variation pattern is more likely to be selected. In the first embodiment, the variation patterns P8 to P11 are selected. As a result, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls is activated, and the average fluctuation time is shortened.

  Further, in S1701, when it is determined that the game state is not state A (low accurate low base state) (NO in S1701), then whether the game state is state B (low accurate high base state, high accurate high base state) Is determined (S1708). In S1708, when it is determined that the state B (S1708), then it is determined whether the Toku-zu 1 big hit variation flag is ON (S1709), and it is determined that the Toku-zu 1 big hit variation flag is ON ( (YES in S1709), referring to the state B big hit table (the portion corresponding to state B and big hit in the change pattern table shown in FIG. 9), change based on the change pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) Select a pattern (S1710). If it is determined in S1709 that the Toku-zu 1 big hit variation flag is OFF (NO in S1709), the state B deviation table (the portion corresponding to status B and deviation in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) is referred to. Then, the variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1711).

  Further, in S1708, if the game state is not state B (low accurate high base state, high accurate high base state), that is, if the game state is state C (high accurate low base state) (NO in S1708) Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON (S1712), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON (YES in S1712), the state C big hit table (see FIG. 9). In the variation pattern table shown, the variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the state C and the portion corresponding to the big hit (S1710). When it is determined in S1712 that the Toku-zu 1 big hit variation flag is OFF (NO in S1712), the state C deviation table (the portion corresponding to state C and deviation in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) is referred to. Then, the variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1714).

  In addition, in the state B and the state C, since it is a game state in which the game is played mainly by the variable display of the second special symbol by the right-handed game, if the game is performed according to the game instruction (right-handed or left-handed), the first Fluctuating display of special symbols is rarely executed. Therefore, the variation time of the first special symbol in the states B and C is simple (there are few types and the variation time is short). In the state B, the variation pattern P15 is set for a big hit, and the variation pattern P16 is set for an out-of-range hit. Further, in the state C, the variation pattern P23 is set for a big hit, and the variation pattern P24 is set for an off.

  After the variation pattern has been selected as described above, other processing shown in FIG. 24 is executed (S1704), and the processing ends. Incidentally, in the other processing (S1704), a fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set fluctuation pattern designation command is included in the fluctuation start command described later and is sent to the sub control board 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special figure 1 random number shift processing]
Next, the special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1205) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1205), first, the special figure 1 number of reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is set to the next lower level (for example, when the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a includes an address space corresponding to addresses "0000" to "0003"). , And the address "0000" side) (S1802). Then, "0" is set in the uppermost address space of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth special figure reservation (when the upper limit number is stored). The area is cleared to 0 (S1803), and this processing ends. After the special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1205) is executed, the special figure 1 variation start processing (S1206) of FIG. 22 is executed. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206), while setting the special figure 1 operation status to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started.

[Special symbol 1 processing during fluctuation]
Next, the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 27, in the special symbol 1 variation process (S1104), first, the variation time of the special figure 1 (variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in S1204 of FIG. 22, see FIG. 9) has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S1901). When it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 has not elapsed (NO in S1901), the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process is performed (S1914), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time of Toku-zu 1 has elapsed (YES in S1901), the process proceeds to S1903. In S1903, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set (S1903), and the process proceeds to S1904.

  Next, in S1904, it is determined whether the state B flag is ON (S1905). In S1904, when it is determined that the state B flag is ON (YES in S1904), the value of the state B counter (state B variation counter) that counts the number of times the special symbol changes during state B (high base state) Is subtracted by 1 (S1905), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the state B counter is "0" (S1906). When it is determined in S1906 that the value of the state B counter is "0" (YES in S1906), the state B flag is turned off (S1907), and the process proceeds to S1908. By turning off the state B flag, the gaming state shifts from the high base state to the low base state. Specifically, if it is the low accurate high base state, the low accurate low base state (normal state) is entered, and if the high accurate high base state is entered, the high accurate low base state (advantageous state) is entered.

  In S1908, the special figure 1 operation status is set to "3" (S1908), and the variation display of the special symbol is stopped by the result according to the determination result of the special symbol validity determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number, etc. Is performed (S1909), and the process ends.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing]
As shown in FIG. 27 and FIG. 28, the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) is displaying fluctuations when the big hit game or the small hit game according to special figure 2 is executed during the fluctuation display of special figure 1. Of the special symbol 1 is temporarily interrupted, and when the big hit game or the small hit game is over, the interrupted measurement is restarted. As a result, while the big hit game or the small hit game relating to one special symbol is being executed, the hit determination processing and the variable display relating to the other special symbol are not executed.

  The special figure 1 variation interruption process (S1902) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON (S2901), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 interruption flag is not ON (NO in S2901), then FIG. 2 It is determined whether or not the big hit flag is ON, that is, whether or not the big hit game according to special figure 2 is being executed (S2902). In S2902, when it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2902), whether or not the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game according to special figure 2 is being executed. It is determined whether or not (S2909). In S2909, if the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON, that is, if it is determined that neither the big hit game nor the small hit game according to special figure 2 is being executed (NO in S2909), the process ends. Then, the variable display of special figure 1 is continued. On the other hand, in S2902, when it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (YES in S2902), and when it is determined that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON in S2909 (YES in S2909), the special figure 1 The interruption flag is turned on (S2903), the measurement of the special figure 1 fluctuation time is interrupted (S2904), and the processing is ended. As a result, the variable display of Toku-zu 1 can be temporarily interrupted.

  Further, in S2901, the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON, that is, when it is determined that the variable display of the first special symbol is already suspended (YES in S2901), whether the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON or not. Is determined (S2905). In S2905, if it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (YES in S2905), it is determined that the big hit game according to special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2905), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (S2906). In S2906, when it is determined that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2906), it is determined that the small hit game according to special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process is ended. On the other hand, in S2906, when it is determined that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON (NO in S2906), it is determined that the big hit game or small hit game according to special figure 2 is finished, and the special figure 1 interruption flag is turned off. (S2907), the measurement of the special figure 1 fluctuation time is restarted (S2908), and the process ends. As a result, it is possible to restart the suspended variable display of the first special symbol (time measurement of the variable time).

  Here, in the present Example 1, as an interruption flag, a special figure 1 interruption flag (also referred to as “first interruption flag”) indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is being interrupted, and a second special symbol A flag corresponding to the interruption flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80, which has a special figure 2 interruption flag (also called “second interruption flag”) indicating that the variable display is being interrupted. Is set (memorized).

[Special symbol 1 confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 1 big hit variation flag is ON (S2001). When it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S2001), the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag indicating that the big hit fluctuation display related to the first special symbol is being turned off (S2002), the first The special figure 1 big hit flag which shows the execution of the big hit game which relates to the special design is turned on (S2003), it moves to the processing of S2004. Thereby, in the special figure 1, it can be shown that the variable display related to the big hit is ended (the big hit is confirmed) and the big hit game is started.

  In S2004, the value of the round counter that counts the number of rounds to be executed during the big hit game (in the mode of opening one round once, one round is from opening of the special winning opening to closing) is set to "4". (S2004), in order to start the big hit game, the big hit opening command is set (S2005), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "4" (S2006), and the processing ends. In addition, at the stop timing of the special symbol that is variably displayed, a stop command is transmitted to the sub control board 90. By receiving this stop command, the sub-control board 90 can recognize that the variable display of the special symbol has ended. By this, the big hit standby state is set. Also, in S2001, when it is determined that the special map 1 big hit variation flag is not ON (NO in S2001), neither the big hit game nor the small hit game is started, that is, the variation display related to the deviation, so the special figure 1 operation status Is set to "1" (S2007), and the process ends.

  Here, in the present embodiment 1, as a big hit flag, the result of the hit determination relating to the first special symbol is a big hit and a special figure 1 big hit flag ("the first big hit" indicating that the big hit game related to the big hit is being executed. Also called "flag"), and a special figure 2 big hit flag (also called "second big hit flag") that indicates that the result of the hit determination related to the second special symbol is a big hit and the big hit game related to the big hit is being executed. When the jackpot game is executed, the jackpot flag corresponding to the jackpot flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main controller 80 is set (stored). In addition, as a small hit flag, the result of the hit determination relating to the second special symbol is a small hit, and a special figure 2 small hit flag (also referred to as "small hit flag") indicating that the small hit game related to the small hit is being executed. When the small hit game is executed, the small hit flag corresponding to the small hit flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main controller 80 is set (stored).

  Here, the round indicator 45 is composed of three LEDs of a 2R lamp, a 4R lamp and a 15R lamp, and the corresponding lamp is lit and displayed at the timing when the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, in the case of the 4R first big hit, a display mode such as "2RΔ4R ▲ 15RΔ" (for example, ▲: lights, Δ: lights off) is displayed. Next, the special figure 2 operation process (S211) and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 39. In the special figure 2 operation process (S211), the special figure 1 operation process shown in FIGS. Since the processing is performed in the same flow as S206), etc., it will be simply described below.

[Special figure 2 operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 30, the special figure 2 operation process (S208) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 operation process (S207) shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 operation process (S207) and then the special figure 2 operation process (S208). The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment 1 can execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel by the special figure 1 operation process and the special figure 2 operation process. That is, the digestion of the first special symbol hold and the digestion of the second special symbol hold (and "variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol"), "first special symbol right / wrong judgment and second special symbol" It is said that it is possible to execute the judgment of "whether it is true or not" in parallel. In addition, in the first embodiment, the determination of winning or losing based on the ball entering the second starting opening (second special symbol winning or failing judgment) is based on the entering of the ball into the first starting opening (first special symbol winning or hitting). It is more likely that the player will be a big hit with a large profit (the amount of profit that can be acquired is larger) than that of the judgment (FIG. 8B).

  As shown in FIG. 30, similar to the special figure 1 operation process (S207), the process relating to the special symbol display section 41 and the special winning device (first big winning device 31 and second big winning device 36) is divided into five stages. “Special figure 2 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5” is assigned to each of these stages. Then, when the "special figure 2 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1151), the special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) is performed, and when the "special figure 2 operation status" is "2" Is (NO in S1151, YES in S1153), the special symbol 2 variation process (S1154) is performed, and if the "special diagram 2 operation status" is "3" (NO in both S1151 and S1153, YES in S1155) ), Special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) is performed, and if "special diagram 2 operation status" is "4" (NO in S1151, S1153, S1155, YES in S1157), special electric as a big hit game When the character processing 1 (S1108) is performed and the "special map 2 operation status" is "5" (S1151, S1153, S1155, S1157 are all NO), special electric character processing as a small hit game Perform 2 (S1109). The special figure 2 operation status is "1" by default. Since there is a small hit in the result of the second special symbol hit determination, the special figure 2 operation process has a special electric auditors product process 2 (S1109) not included in the special figure 1 operation process.

  Here, the special electric auditors product process 1 (S1108) is common to the special figure 1 operation process (S206) and the special figure 2 operation process (S211), and the special electric auditors product process 2 (S1109) is Only the special figure 2 operation process (S211) is performed. This, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, but with the big hit game related to the first special symbol This is because the big hit game related to the two special symbols cannot be executed in parallel (only one of them can be executed). In addition, in the present embodiment, the result of the first special symbol hit determination does not have a small hit, but as another aspect, the result of the first special symbol hit determination may have a small hit. In this case, similarly to the big hit game, the small hit game related to the first special symbol and the small hit game related to the second special symbol cannot be executed in parallel (only one of them can be executed).

[Special symbol 2 standby processing]
Since the special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) shown in FIG. 31 is to be processed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) shown in FIG. 22, the description thereof will be omitted.

[Special figure 2 Pass / Fail judgment process]
The special figure 2 hit / miss determination processing (S1253) shown in FIG. 32 is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 hit / miss determination processing (S1203) shown in FIG. However, since this processing is processing relating to the special symbol 2, in S1301, the lowest area of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first of the second special figure reservation) The stored random number counter value for special symbol validity determination (label-TRND-A) is read. In addition, because it has a small hit in the result of the second special symbol hit determination, if it is determined that the result of the second special symbol hit determination is not a big hit (S1304), then in S1305, the second special symbol hit determination It is determined whether or not the result is a small hit (S1305). When it is determined that it is a small hit in S1305 (YES in S1305), the small hit symbol is determined (S1306), the special figure 2 small hit variation flag is turned on (S1307), and the process is ended. The other processes are the same as those of the special figure 1 validity determination process (S1203).

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing]
As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing (S1254), processing (S1401 to S1420) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing (S1204) shown in FIGS. )I do. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since this process is a process relating to the second special symbol, referring to the column corresponding to the second special symbol of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9, based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) To select the fluctuation pattern. Further, since the result of the second special symbol hit determination has a small hit, when it is determined that the small hit variation flag is ON, the variation pattern is selected from the small hit table according to the gaming state.

  In addition, in the state B and the state C, the game is mainly performed by the variable display of the second special symbol (second special symbol winning / absence determination). Therefore, in the state B and the state C, there are more types of variation patterns (variation time) than the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and it is possible to select a variation pattern of a relatively long time. On the other hand, in the state A, the game is performed mainly on the variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol hit determination). Therefore, in the state A, the variation pattern of the first special symbol has more types of variation patterns (variation time) than the variation pattern of the second special symbol, and the variation pattern of a relatively long time can be selected. Therefore, in the state A, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is simple (there are few types and the time is short).

  In this special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing (S1254), after the variation pattern is selected, other processing (S1404) is performed and this processing is ended. In other processing (S1404), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set fluctuation pattern designation command is included in the fluctuation start command described later and is sent to the sub control board 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special figure 2 random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 35, in the special figure 2 random number shift processing (S1255), first, the special figure 2 number of reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of the various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is shifted down by one (S1502). Then, "0" is set in the highest address space of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth special figure reservation (when the upper limit number is stored). The area is cleared to 0 (S1503), and this processing ends. After the special figure 2 random number shift processing (S1255) is executed, the special figure 2 variation start processing (S1256) of FIG. 31 is executed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1256), while setting the special figure 2 operation status to "2", the special figure 2 fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. To do.

[Special symbol 2 processing during fluctuation]
In the special symbol 2 changing process (S1154) shown in FIG. 36, the process (S1951 to S1959) is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104) shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing]
The special figure 2 variation interruption process (S1952) shown in FIG. 37 is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 variation interruption process (S1902) shown in FIG. 28 (S2951 to S2959). Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted.

[Special symbol 2 confirmation process]
The special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) shown in FIG. 38 performs the process (S2051 to S2067) in the same flow as the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since the special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) is a process relating to the special symbol 2, the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) is a big hit type (round counter setting process) or a special symbol 2 small hit variation flag. Although the processing when it is determined to be ON is different, it is as shown in FIG.

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game)]
Next, the special electric auditors product processing 1 (S1108) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special electric auditors product process 1 (S1108), first, a jackpot game start process, which will be described later, is executed (S2101), and the process proceeds to S2102. In S2102, it is determined whether or not the big hit start flag is ON (S2102), and when it is determined that the big hit start flag is not ON (NO in S2102), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2102 that the big hit start flag is ON (YES in S2102), then it is determined whether the big hit end flag is ON (S2105). Here, the big hit start flag is a flag which is turned ON when the player shoots a game ball to the right game area 3B at an arbitrary timing in the big hit waiting state and passes the game ball to the start gate 29. .. After the special symbol is confirmed as a big hit symbol and becomes a big hit, the big hit start flag is turned on by passing the game ball through the start gate, and the big hit game progresses (round game starts). Here, after the big hit, if the game ball is not passed to the start gate 29, the gaming machine is maintained in the big hit standby state capable of executing the big hit. During this time, the player can leave the seat and take a rest such as a restroom, a drink, or a telephone call. Then, after the break, the player can shoot a game ball at an arbitrary timing and let the game ball pass through the start gate 29, whereby the big hit game can be progressed. In addition, the big hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the big winning device (first big winning device 31) has been completed in the big hit game (the big hit game has ended).

  If it is determined in S2103 that the big hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2103), then it is determined whether or not the special winning opening (first special winning opening 30) is open (S2104), and it is determined that it is not open. When (NO in S2104), it is time to open the special winning opening (first big winning opening 30) (round start time), that is, has it reached the time to pass the start gate 29 and start the first round? Or, it is determined whether the time of the interval between rounds has passed and it is time to start the next round (next opening) (S2105). When it is determined in S2105 that it is not the time to start the round (NO in S2105), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2105 that it is the time to start the round (YES in S2105), the round start command is set (S2106), the special winning opening opening process is performed (S2107), and the process ends. Thereby, the 1st special winning opening 30 is opened according to the opening pattern (refer to Drawing 6) according to the kind of big hit.

  When it is determined in S2104 that the special winning opening (first special winning opening 30) is open (YES in S2104), the maximum number of winnings to the special winning opening in the round is the specified maximum winning number (this implementation In Example 1, it is determined whether or not the number has reached 10 per round) (S2111). If it is determined that the prescribed number of balls (10) has not been reached (NO in S2111), then it is time to close the special winning opening (first big winning opening 30), that is, the big winning opening. It is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed since the opening of (S2112). When it is determined in S2112 that the special winning opening time has not elapsed (NO in S2112), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2111 that the prescribed number of balls (10) has been reached (YES in S2111), or if it is determined that the opening time of the special winning opening has elapsed (YES in S2112), That is, when it is determined that one of the two round ending conditions is satisfied, a process of closing the special winning opening (first special winning opening 30) is performed (S2113). Next, the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2114), and it is determined whether the value of the round counter is "0" (S2115). If it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is not "0" (NO in S2115), the process is ended to start the next round.

  On the other hand, in S2115, when it is determined that the value of the round counter is “0” (YES in S2115), the jackpot ending command is set (S2116) as the jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game, and the jackpot ending period. Is started (S2117), the jackpot end flag is turned on (S2118), and the process is ended. If it is determined in S2105 that the jackpot end flag is ON (YES in S2103), the final round is over, and then it is determined whether or not the jackpot ending period has elapsed (S2119). If it is determined in S2119 that the predetermined ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2119), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2119 that the ending period has elapsed (YES in S2119), the jackpot end flag is turned off (S2120), the game state setting process described later is performed (S2121), and the jackpot flag is turned off (S2122). , The big hit start flag is turned off (S2123), a special figure operation status setting process 1 described later is performed (S2124), and the process is ended.

[Big hit game start processing]
Next, the jackpot game start process (S2101) will be described with reference to FIG. In the jackpot game start process (S2101), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag is ON (S2151), and it is determined that the jackpot start flag is not ON, that is, the start gate 29 is not passed in the jackpot waiting state. In the case (NO in S2151), it is then determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (S2152), and when it is determined that the probability variation flag is ON (YES in S2152), the probability variation flag is turned OFF (S2102), and S2154 is set. Move to processing. In S2154, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S2103). When it is determined that the state B flag is ON (YES in 2154), the state B flag is turned OFF (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2156. . That is, while the big hit game is being executed, the probability change flag and the state B flag are turned off before the big hit game (round game) is started in order to control the low probability state and the low base state.

  If it is determined in S2152 that the probability variation flag is not ON (NO in S2152), the process proceeds to S2154 without turning the probability variation flag OFF. If it is determined in S2154 that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S2154), the process proceeds to S2156 without turning OFF the state B flag. In S2156, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the start gate (S2156). The jackpot start flag is turned on (S2157), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2156 that the vehicle has not passed the start gate (NO in S2156), the process ends. As a result, the gaming machine continues in the big hit standby state. If it is determined in S2151 that the big hit start flag is ON, that is, if the big hit game has already been started (S2151), the process ends. As a result, the player can start (progress) the big hit game at an arbitrary timing.

[Game state setting process]
Next, the game state setting process (S2121) will be described with reference to FIG. In the game state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit game that has ended this time is related to the probability variation big hit (S2201). In the present embodiment, as described above, 5 types of 4R first big hit, 15R third big hit, 4R fourth big hit, 2R fifth big hit, and 2R sixth big hit are defined as the probable big hits, and in S2201, a big hit game. Is determined to correspond to any of these five types. Then, when it is determined that this is the probability variation big hit (YES in S2201), the probability variation flag is turned on (S2202), and then it is determined whether the completed bonus game is the 2R fifth jackpot (S2203). . In S2203, when it is determined that the finished big hit game is the 2R fifth big hit (YES in S2203), the state B flag is turned on (S2204), the state B counter is set to "50" (S2205), and the process is executed. Finish. As a result, the high base state is set up to 50 times after the big hit game is finished, and the high accurate high base state is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2203 that the finished big hit game is not the 2R fifth big hit (NO in S2203), then it is determined whether the finished big hit game is the 2R sixth big hit (S2209). In S2209, when it is determined that the finished big hit game is the 2R sixth big hit (YES in S2209), the state B flag is turned on (S2210), "100" is set to the state B counter (S2211), and the process is executed. Finish. As a result, the high base state is set up to 100 times after the big hit game is finished, and the high accurate high base state is set. In S2209, when it is determined that the jackpot game that has ended is not the 2R sixth jackpot, that is, the 4R first jackpot, the 15R third jackpot, or the 4R fourth jackpot (NO in S2209), the state B flag is turned off. The process is finished as it is. As a result, the gaming state after the end of the big hit game becomes a highly accurate low base state.

  In S2201, when it is determined that it is not a probability variation big hit, that is, a low probability big hit (low probability big hit, normal big hit) (NO in S2201), then the big hit game that ended is the 2R seventh big hit Is determined (S2206). In S2206, when it is determined that the finished big hit game is the 2R seventh big hit (YES in S2206), the state B flag is turned on (S2207), "100" is set to the state B counter (S2208), and the process is executed. Finish. As a result, the high base state is set up to 100 times after the big hit game ends, and the low certainty high base state is set. On the other hand, in S2206, when it is determined that the finished big hit game is not the 2R seventh big hit, that is, the 4R second big hit or the 2R eighth big hit (NO in S2206), the state B flag is turned ON (S2204), the state "50" is set to the B counter (S2205), and the process is completed. As a result, the high base state is set up to 50 times after the big hit game is finished, and the low accurate high base state is set.

[Special figure operation status setting process 1]
Next, the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2122) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2122), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit flag is ON (S3001), and the special figure 1 big hit flag is ON, that is, the big hit game that occurred this time is a special symbol. When it is determined to be related to 1 (YES in S3001), the special figure 1 big hit flag is turned off (S3002), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3003), and the process is ended. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. On the other hand, in S3001, the special figure 1 big hit flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON, that is, when it is determined that the big hit game that occurred this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3001 ), The special figure 2 big hit flag is turned off (S3004), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "1" (S3005), and the process is ended. Thereby, in the next interruption process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game)]
Next, the special electric auditors product processing 2 (S1109) will be described with reference to FIG. 43. In the special electric auditors product processing 2 (S1109), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (S2301). The small hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the big winning device (the second big winning device 36) has been completed in the small hit game. When it is determined that the small hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening (second special winning opening 35) is open (S2302). If it is determined in S2302 that the special winning opening is not open (NO in S2302), it is time to open the special winning opening (second special winning opening 35), that is, the opening time of the small hit has passed. Then, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the first opening operation, or it is time to start the next opening operation after the interval time between a plurality of opening operations has elapsed (S2303). . Incidentally, for the small hit game, regardless of the passage of the start gate, the small hit game (opening operation) starts after a predetermined time has elapsed after the fixed stop display of the small hit symbol is displayed. That is, the player can arbitrarily determine the start time of the big hit game by the start gate, but cannot arbitrarily determine the start time of the small hit.

  If it is determined in S2303 that it is not the time to open the special winning opening (NO in S2303), the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2303 that it is the opening time of the special winning opening (YES in S2303), the opening processing of the second special winning opening 35 is performed according to the opening pattern of the small hit (see FIG. 6) (S2304), and the processing. To finish. When it is determined in S2302 that the special winning opening (the second special winning opening 35) is being opened (YES in S2302), the number of balls entered into the special winning opening during six opening operations, that is, six times It is determined whether or not the total number of game balls entered in the opening operation has reached the specified maximum number of entered balls (10 in the first embodiment) (S2306). If it is determined in S2306 that the prescribed number of balls (10) has not been reached (NO in S2306), whether or not it is time to close the special winning opening, that is, a predetermined opening after opening the special winning opening It is determined whether the opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed (S2307). When it is determined in S2307 that the special winning opening time has not elapsed (NO in S2307), the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of balls entered into the special winning opening during the six opening operations has reached the prescribed number of entered balls (10) (YES in S2306), the special winning opening (second big winning) The mouth 35) is closed (S2314), and the process moves to the small hit end process of S2311. On the other hand, in S2307, when it is determined that the opening time of the special winning opening has passed (YES in S2307), the special winning opening (second special winning opening 35) is closed (S2308), and the value of the small hit opening counter is set. The value is decremented by 1 (S2309), and it is determined whether the value of the small hit open counter is "0" (S2310). If it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hit opening counter is not "0" (NO in S2310), the next opening operation is started, and the process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hit opening counter is "0" (YES in S2310), the processing shifts to the small hit end processing of S2311. In S2311, as a small hit ending process to end the small hit game, the ending command of the small hit is set (S2311), the ending period of the small hit is started (S2312), the small hit end flag is set (S2313), Finish the process. The small hit opening counter becomes "0" when the big winning opening is opened six times.

  If it is determined in S2301 that the small hit end flag is ON (YES in S2301), the opening operation has been completed six times (or a prescribed number of game balls have entered), It is determined whether or not the ending time for the small hit has elapsed (S2315), and if it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2315), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2315 that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2315), the small hit end flag is turned off (S2316), special figure operation status setting processing 2 is performed (S2317), and the processing is ended. By generating a small hit game in a highly accurate low base state, it becomes possible to aim for the next big hit while increasing the number of balls held, which enhances the enjoyment of the game. Incidentally, the probability variation flag and the state B flag are not switched from ON to OFF or switched from OFF to ON at the start of the small hit game. Further, at the end of the small hit game, the game state setting process is not performed. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming state (probability state, base state) is not changed before and after the execution of the small hit game.

[Special figure operation status setting process 2]
Next, the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON (S3101), and the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game that occurred this time. Is determined to be related to the special symbol 1 (YES in S3101), the special figure 1 small hit flag is turned off (S3102), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3103), and the process is executed. Finish. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. On the other hand, the special figure 1 small hit flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, when it is determined that the small hit game that occurred this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3101 ), The special figure 2 small hit flag is turned off (S3104), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "1" (S3105), and the process ends. Thereby, in the next interruption process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Reserved ball count processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the reserved ball number process (S209) after the special figure 2 operation process (S208). As shown in FIG. 45, in the reserved sphere number process (S209), first, the special figure 1 reserved sphere number, the special figure 2 reserved sphere number and the normal symbol reserved sphere number stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read ( S2501). Next, the data of the number of reserved balls (the command of the number of reserved balls for transmitting the information of the number of reserved balls to the sub-control board 90) is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502), and the process is ended.

[Power interruption monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power-off monitoring process (S210) after the reserved ball number process (S209). As shown in FIG. 48, in the power-off monitoring process (S210), first, it is determined whether or not a power-off signal is input (S2601), and if it is determined that there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2601 that there is a power-off signal input (YES in S2601), the current state of the gaming machine (whether it is a probable change, whether it is a winning game, some reserve balls, Data relating to the remaining number of fluctuations is stored in the RAM (S2602), the power-off flag is turned ON (S2603), and thereafter, loop processing (infinite loop) is performed without returning to the interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

  As described above in detail, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is provided with the above-described characteristic configuration, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a unique effect which is not present in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, or the conventional pachinko gaming machine. And produce a remarkable effect. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a big hit in the special symbol hit determination (first special symbol (also referred to as "first identification information") or second special symbol (also referred to as "second identification information"). Based on the jackpot pattern (also referred to as "specific display mode"), a high probability state occurs (a privilege is given), and a high probability state is established when a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied ( Benefits) will end.

  The process (game state setting process (S2121)) of giving this high-probability state (privilege) can also be called "privilege giving means". The first special symbol and the effect symbol 8 are interlocked (synchronized), the second special symbol and the effect symbol 8 are interlocked (synchronized), and the variable display and the stop display are performed, so that the same result determination result is shown. , "The special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the big hit symbol" can be replaced with "The effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the hit effect symbol (specific display mode)". .

[Sub control main processing]
Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 (control processing by the sub control unit 90) will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 52. The counter, flag, status, buffer, timer and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the production control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (sub control unit). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided in the sub control board 90 reads out and executes the program of the sub control main processing shown in FIG. 47 from the ROM of the sub control board 90. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, first, a CPU initialization process is performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization processing (S4001), stack settings, constant settings, CPU 92 settings, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) settings, and various flags, status and counter resets are performed.

  Subsequently, in S4002, it is determined whether the power-off signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the determination result is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub control board 90. That is, when the power-off signal is not ON, or when the content of the RAM is not normal even if the power-off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub control board 90 is initialized, but due to a power failure or the like. If the power-off signal is turned on but the contents of the RAM are kept normal (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. When the RAM is initialized, various flags, statuses, and counter values are reset. Note that S4001 to S4003 are executed only once (when the power is turned on) after the power is turned on, and are not executed thereafter. Further, in the first embodiment, the production control microcomputer 91 also performs the same processing as the power-off monitoring processing (S209) by the game control microcomputer 81 shown in FIG. When it is turned on, the data relating to the effect control at that time is stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90. That is, the data related to the performance control when the power is cut off such as a power failure is backed up. Therefore, unless the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003) when the power is turned on after the power supply is restored from a power failure such as a power failure (when the power is restored), the performance control by the performance control microcomputer 91 is performed. The state of returns to the state before the power failure.

  In S4004, interrupts are disabled. Next, random number seed update processing is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various effect determination random number counters are updated. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub control board 90. For the random number for effect determination, a random number for varying effect determination that determines the mode (variable effect pattern) of the effect symbol game effect to be executed, a random number for predicting notice effect determining the notice effect, an effect symbol determination for determining the effect symbol There are random numbers. The method of updating the random number can be the same method as the random number updating process performed by the main control board 80 described above. When updating the random number, the random number value may be incremented by 2 instead of being incremented by 1. The random number for effect determination is acquired at a predetermined timing. The timing is, for example, when a control signal (starting ball entry command) for notifying that there is a start ball entry from the main control board 80 or a control signal (notifying start of variation from the main control board 80). This can be done when a fluctuation start command) is transmitted or when a fluctuation effect pattern described later is determined. The storage location of the obtained random number for effect determination is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

  When the random number seed update processing (S4005) is completed, command transmission processing is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in the output buffer (also referred to as “sub output buffer”) in the RAM of the sub control board 90 are transmitted to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, and the lamp control board. The command is transmitted to the control substrate, which is the corresponding command transmission destination, of the substrates 107. Each control board (each control unit) that receives the command uses various effect devices (image display device, speaker 67, panel lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) in accordance with the received command. (Demonstration symbol game effect, special game effect related to the winning game, etc.) is executed. The production control microcomputer 91 subsequently enables interruption (S4007). After that, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4008), 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), and 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, display control of effect symbols and the like executed on each display screen of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72. Also, it becomes possible to perform lighting control of various lamps, operation control of the movable decorative member, voice output control from the speaker, and the like.

[Reception interrupt processing]
Next, the reception interrupt processing (S4008) will be described with reference to FIG. In the reception interrupt process (S4008), first, it is determined whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, whether or not the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is input to the external INT input unit of the production control microcomputer 91. A determination is made (S4101). Then, when it is determined that the strobe signal is not ON in S4101 (NO in S4101), the process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4102), and the processing is ended. .. The reception interrupt process (S4008) is a process executed prior to the other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) will be described with reference to FIG. The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse of 2 msec cycle is input to the sub control board 90. In the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), first, an input process for creating switch data (edge data and level data) based on the detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d is performed (S4201). Next, lamp data output processing (S4202) for outputting lamp data for causing the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 to emit light, and drive data for driving the movable decoration member 14 (electric drive source) are output. Drive data output processing (S4203). The lamp data and the drive data are created by the 10 ms timer interrupt process described later. Then, a watchdog timer process for resetting the watchdog timer is performed (S4204).

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) will be described with reference to FIG. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse of 10 msec cycle is input to the sub control board 90. In the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, a received command analysis process (S4302) described later is performed. Next, a switch state acquisition process of storing the switch data created by the 2 ms timer interrupt process in the RAM of the sub control board 90 as the switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt process is performed (S4303), and the switch stored by the switch state acquisition process is performed. A switch process for setting the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the data is performed (S4304). After that, the lamp data (data for controlling the lighting of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66) is created, and other processing such as updating the random number for effect determination is executed (S4305).

[Reception command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis processing (S4302) will be described using FIG. In the received command analysis process (S4302), first, it is determined whether or not the start-ball entry command is received from the main control board 80 (S4401), and when it is determined that the start-ball entry command is not received (NO in S4401). , S4403, and if it is determined that the start ball entry command has been received (YES in S4401), effect holding information storage processing (S4402) is performed, and processing proceeds to S4403. The production hold information storage process (S4402) is performed by various information (preliminary determination result, jackpot type determination random number) included in the start-in ball command (special figure 1 start-in ball command or special figure 2 start-in ball command) received in S4401. Numerical value, game information such as fluctuation pattern random number value), according to the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the start / end command transmission / reception (when command is generated) special symbol holding balls , Is stored in a predetermined effect holding information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 in a shift memory format. For example, when the received starting ball entering command is the special figure 1 starting ball entering command corresponding to the number of reserved balls “4” in the special figure 1, the pre-determination result and the hit type included in the special figure 1 starting ball entering command. Such information is stored as special figure 1 effect hold information in an area corresponding to the number of holds 4 in the special figure 1 effect hold information storage area. The effect holding information thus stored is used for executing various effects such as a variable effect, a notice effect, and an effect mode, which will be described later. The contents stored in the effect holding information storage area in the sub-control board 90 (effect holding information) is the special figure reservation storage section (first special figure reservation storage section, second special figure) in the main control board (main control section) 80 described above. This is the same as the stored content (acquired information) in the hold storage unit). From this, it can be said that the effect holding information storage area of the sub control board 90 is also an “acquired information storage means”.

  Next, in S4403, it is determined whether or not a variation start command is received from the main control board 80 (S4403), and when it is determined that the variation start command is received (YES in S4403), a variation effect start process described later ( S4404) is performed, the process proceeds to S4405, and when it is determined that the variation start command is not received (NO in S4403), the process proceeds to S4405 without performing the variation effect start process. In S4405, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation stop command is received from the main control board 80 (S4405), and when it is determined that the fluctuation stop command is received (YES in S4405), the effect design is stopped and displayed to make the fluctuation effect. A variable effect ending process for ending is performed (S4406). In the variation effect end processing (S4406), the effect symbol 8 is stopped and displayed, and a variation effect end command for ending the variation effect is set in the sub output buffer. When the set variable effect end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 displays the effect pattern 8 that has been variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The stop display is performed to end the variable effect (effect symbol game effect). On the other hand, if it is determined in S4405 that the fluctuation stop command has not been received (NO in S4405), the process proceeds to S4407 without performing the fluctuation effect ending process. The variable effect refers to various effects that are performed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol.

  Succeedingly, in S4407, it is determined whether or not a hit game-related command is received from the main control board 80 (S4407). Here, the hit game-related command is a command transmitted from the main control board 80 in executing a hit game (a big hit game, a small hit game), and specifically, a start of a big hit game (occurrence of a big hit). ) Opening command sent at the time of, round start command sent at the start of the round, round end command sent at the end of the round, ending command sent at the end of the jackpot game, the first big winning opening in the round game The first big winning opening entrance command transmitted based on the entry into 30 and the second big winning opening entrance command transmitted based on entering into the second big winning opening in the small hit game, etc. . In S4407, it is determined whether or not any of these jackpot game-related commands is received. If not received (NO in S4407), the process proceeds to S4409, and if received (YES in S4407). , Processing related to execution of effects (big hit game effect, small hit game effect) according to the type of the received command (S4408).

  For example, if the received command is an opening command, an opening effect command that specifies an opening effect according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command is set in the sub output buffer, and if the round start command, the command is issued. Set a round effect command that specifies a round effect corresponding to the round specified based on the sub output buffer, and if it is an ending command, an ending effect that specifies the ending effect corresponding to the type of jackpot specified based on the command. Set the production command in the sub output buffer. If the received command is a special winning opening ball entering command (first big winning opening entering command, second big winning opening entering command), the special winning opening (first big winning opening) specified based on the command. A ball entry effect command for designating a ball entry effect corresponding to the entry into the mouth 30 and the second special winning opening 35) is set in the sub output buffer. When these various effect commands related to the hit game that are set are transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 matches the opening game and the round according to the progress of the hit game. An effect, a ball entry effect, etc. are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Finally, the process of S4409 is performed, and this process ends. In S4409, as other processing, processing based on other received commands (for example, a normal symbol variation start command or a normal symbol variation stop command) excluding the various commands described above is performed (S4409).

[Variable production start processing]
Next, the variable effect start process (S4402) executed in the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. In the variation effect start process (S4402), first, an effect determination random number process (S4501) is performed to obtain various effect determination random numbers such as a variable effect determination random number, a notice effect determination random number, and an effect symbol determination random number. In this embodiment, the process of S4501 is performed at the timing when the fluctuation start command is received from the main control unit 80, and a predetermined value (acquisition information) is acquired from each random number. Based on the acquired value (acquisition information), the mode of the effect symbol game effect (variation effect) to be executed, the mode of the notice effect (including the presence of the notice effect), the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed, etc. are determined.

  Next, in S4502, the received fluctuation start command is analyzed (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern designation command (information that designates a variation pattern) that designates the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Then, in the variation pattern designation command, variation pattern information (P1 to P33) shown in FIG. 9, game state information for designating the current game state, determination of the first special symbol win / loss determination or second special symbol win / loss determination The result and the symbol information for designating the jackpot type are included (see FIG. 8). In addition, the variation pattern designation command, because there is one corresponding to the first special symbol and one corresponding to the second special symbol, by analyzing the variation pattern designation command, the effect design game production to start this time It is possible to determine whether the (variable display of effect symbols) relates to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. The variation pattern information, the game state information, the symbol information, etc. can be used in other processes other than the variation effect start process executed thereafter.

  Next, in S4503, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining the effect mode to be executed. The mode status is any value from "1" to "5", and each value is assigned to the effect modes A to E. Specifically, the mode status "1" corresponds to the effect mode A, the mode status "2" corresponds to the effect mode B, the mode status "3" corresponds to the effect mode C, and the mode status "4". It corresponds to the effect mode D, and the mode status “5” corresponds to the effect mode E. By referring to the current mode status, it is possible to specify the current effect mode.

  Here, the effect mode is a mode of effect mainly on the image display device 7. When the effect mode is different, some or all of the effect modes of the game effect such as the notice effect and the reach effect are different. . Specifically, the image displayed on the image display device 7 is different depending on the effect mode, such as the mode of the effect design 8 (for example, the design design, the number design, etc.), the appearing characters, the items, and the background image are different. To be different. In addition, the production design game production can also be executed in a mode according to the production mode, and when a plurality of game productions (notice production, reach production, etc.) are provided, different game productions can be executed depending on the production mode. Can be In this embodiment, the effect modes A and B are executed when the low accurate low base state is controlled, and the effect modes C and D are executed when the high accurate low base state is controlled, and the effect mode E. Is executed when controlled to the low accurate high base state and when controlled to the high accurate high base state. Therefore, when the effect mode is any of A to D, the player confirms the effect mode to know whether the current game state is the low-probability low base state or the high-probability low base state. It becomes possible. On the other hand, when the effect mode is E, even if the player confirms the effect mode, it is difficult to know whether the current game state is the low-probability-high base state or the high-probability-high base state. is there. In that sense, the effect mode E can be said to be a game state non-notification mode.

  Next, in S4504, the image display device 7, the panel lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, and the like are used, and the sub-control unit 90 mainly controls the variation effect pattern (variation effect pattern, effect pattern). A variable effect pattern determination table (not shown) for determining a game effect) and a notice effect determination table are set (S4504). Specifically, based on the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 and the fluctuation pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80, the fluctuation effect pattern determination table to be used and the notice effect determination table are set. . That is, a plurality of fluctuation effect pattern determination tables and a plurality of notice effect determination tables are provided, and a predetermined change effect pattern determination table and notice effect determination table are set from them based on the game state (effect mode) and the like. To do. For example, when the variation pattern information designated by the received variation pattern designation command is “P1 (variation pattern P1)” (see FIG. 9), the variation production pattern determination table is the big hit time corresponding to the current production mode. The variation effect pattern determination table and the notice effect determination table are set. The variation effect pattern determination table is mainly for determining an execution mode of the effect symbol game effect (variation mode of the effect symbol, etc.), and a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables corresponding to the effect mode (mode status) ( (Not shown) is stored in advance in the ROM of the sub control board 90. In S4504, a table corresponding to the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 is selected and set from the variable effect pattern determination tables.

  Next, in S4505, based on the variation effect determination random number acquired in S4501, and the variation effect pattern determination table set in S4504, a variation effect pattern that matches the specified variation pattern is selected and set (( S4505). As the variation effect pattern, the variation mode of the effect symbol 8 displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b (execution mode of the effect symbol game effect) is set. As a result, in the effect symbol game effect, when the reach effect is executed (reach effect effect symbol game effect) or when the character effect performed using a specific character is performed (character effect pattern game effect), reach effect or character The case where the effect is not executed (reach non-effect symbol game effect) is determined. In addition, the reach effect is, for example, as the display mode of the effect symbol 8 when the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit, all the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same (doublet). When a mode (big hit mode, specific mode) is provided, two of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R form a stop display (temporary stop display) with a pattern (the same effect pattern) that constitutes the big hit mode. ), And in the state where the remaining one continues the variable display (scroll display), whether or not the remaining one production symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol (three identical demonstration symbols) that completes the big hit mode. Refers to the production. At this time, the game effect is executed by using a predetermined character along with the variable display of the effect symbol, and whether the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a big hit mode, whether the predetermined character achieves a predetermined purpose. It is also possible to show it in the production of. Such game effects (reach effects and character effects described later) can also be referred to as story effects (specific game effects) and purpose effects (specific game effects). As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation of a big hit and enhance the interest of the game.

  Further, in S4505, based on the effect symbol determination random number acquired in S4501 and the stop symbol determination table (not shown), the effect symbol 8 to be stopped and displayed (also referred to as "stop effect symbol") is determined and set. As for the effect design 8 which is stopped and displayed as a result of the effect design game effect, the result of the special symbol right / wrong judgment is out, and in the case of reach out, there are three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R such as "787". Among them, one production design is different from other production designs, and when there is no reach, three production designs 8L, 8C, 8R such as "635" are at least one other production design. It is considered that the production pattern is different

  Further, in S4506, the notice effect executed along with the variable effect pattern (effect symbol game effect) is determined. In addition, this is also referred to as an effect design game effect including the notice effect to be executed. This advance notice effect shows the possibility that the result of the effect design game effect being executed is stopped and displayed in a big hit mode, before the effect design is stopped (fixed stop display) (during variable display of effect design) (preliminary) Notification effect). In S4506, based on the preview effect determination random number acquired in S4501 and the preview effect determination table set in S4504, a preview effect that matches the specified fluctuation pattern and the determined fluctuation effect pattern is selected and set. (S4506).

  Then, in S4507, based on the variation effect pattern and the notice effect set in S4505 and S4506, a variation effect start command for starting an effect symbol game effect or the like is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 ( (S4507), the variable effect start process ends. When the variation effect start command set in S4507 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 causes the variation effect pattern specified based on the variation effect start command, that is, S4505. The predetermined image data corresponding to the variation effect pattern set in step 1 is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the variation effect based on the read image data is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Moreover, the variable display (blinking display) by the two LEDs on the effect display device 102 is also executed.

[Outline of production design game production]
Next, the outline of the effect design game effect (variation effect) of the present embodiment will be described. As described above, when the variation effect start command for starting the effect symbol game effect or the like based on the variation effect pattern set in S4505 is transmitted from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the image display device 7 The variable display of the effect design 8 is started on the display screen 7a. As a series of effects from the start to the end (stop) of the variable display of the effect symbol 8, an effect symbol game effect (variable effect) is configured.

  As for the variable display of the effect design 8, in principle, the symbols are vertically scrolled in the order of “1” → “2” → “3” ... → “7” → “8” → “9” (ascending order) ( (Vertical scrolling), and when it reaches "9", it returns to "1" again and the vertical scrolling is repeated. The manner of variable display of such effect symbols 8 is determined by the variable effect patterns stored in the above-described variable effect pattern determination table. Therefore, in addition to the vertical scroll, for example, the scroll display in the horizontal direction (horizontal scroll) and the switching display in which the symbols (numbers) are sequentially switched on the spot without scrolling are available as the variable display modes. It is possible to provide the aspect as a variation effect pattern. It is also possible to provide a mode in which the symbols "1" to "9" are variably displayed in descending order. Furthermore, it is also possible to set the mode of variable display depending on the effect mode and the game state.

  Further, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed according to the variation time determined by the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variation display is stopped as the variation time elapses, but in the present embodiment, the variation display is stopped. It has a plurality of stop modes (stop patterns) as modes. Specifically, as the main stop mode, (1) production symbols 8L (left symbol), 8C (middle symbol), 8R (right symbol) stop order of each symbol (also called "stop order") is "left symbol" → Middle pattern → Right pattern "Stopping mode (also referred to as" first stop mode "), and (2) Stopping mode of each symbol is" Left symbol → Right symbol → Middle symbol "(" (Also referred to as "second stop mode"), and (3) all stop times (stop timing) of each symbol are substantially the same (also referred to as "simultaneous stop") (also referred to as "third stop mode"). And (4) the stop time of the left symbol and the right symbol is substantially the same, and then the stop pattern in which the middle symbol is stopped (also referred to as “fourth stop mode”) is provided. These stop modes (stop patterns) are included in the execution mode of the effect symbol game effect, and the variable effect pattern selected (set) in S4505 determines in which stop mode the variable display is stopped. It has become a thing. That is, in this embodiment, the selection / determination (setting) of the variation effect pattern also serves as the selection / determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). However, it is possible to separately process the selection / determination (setting) of the variation effect pattern and the selection / determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). In addition, the stop order of the first stop symbol is also called "first stop symbol", the stop symbol of the second stop symbol is also called "second stop symbol", and the stop symbol is the third stop symbol. That is also referred to as a "third stop symbol" or a "final stop symbol".

  Among the first to fourth stop modes, the first stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol) is mainly in the production mode C (state C), and the result of the second special symbol hit / miss judgment is “small. This is a stop mode that can be executed when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the fact that the hit is “win”.

  The second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) is mainly (1) when the production mode A, B (state A), the result of the first special symbol hit determination is "out" or "big hit" When the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on that, (2) When the effect mode E (state B), the result of the second special symbol hit determination is “out” or “big hit” When the variable display of the effect design 8 is performed in a variation mode with reach (also referred to as "reach variation") or a variation mode without reach (also referred to as "normal variation"), and (3) production mode C, In the case of D (state C), when the result of the second special symbol hit determination is “out” or “big hit”, when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed as reach variation or normal variation, In a stop mode that can be executed when the variable display is stopped That.

  The 3rd stop mode (all symbols simultaneous stop) is mainly in (1) production mode A, B (state A), under the situation where the function of shortening fluctuation according to the special figure holding ball number works (when fluctuation starts). Special figure 1 The number of reserved balls is "3" or "4") and the result of the first special symbol hit determination is "out", and based on this, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed in a normal variation , (2) In the production mode E (state B), the variation display of the production symbol 8 is normally changed based on that the result of the second special symbol hit determination is “out” or “small hit”. In the case of (3) production mode C, D (state C), when the variation display of the production symbol 8 is performed in the normal variation based on the result of the second special symbol hit determination is “out”, And (4) production mode D (state C), the result of the second special symbol hit determination When variations in performance symbols 8 displayed based on a Koatari "is performed, a viable stop mode during the variation display stops.

  Fourth stop mode (left / right symbol simultaneous stop → middle symbol) is mainly in the production mode D (state C), that the result of the second special symbol hit determination is “out” or “big hit” It is a stop mode that can be executed when the variable display of the effect design 8 is performed based on the reach change based on the stop.

  In this way, a plurality of stop modes when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped are provided according to the effect mode (game state) and the mode of variable display based on the result of the special symbol judgment, and the result (stop display mode). Thus, it is possible to make the stop mode different depending on the game situation. Further, for the player, paying attention to the stop mode when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped, it is possible to infer the display mode (stop display mode) of the effect symbol 8 to be subsequently displayed (derived display). It becomes possible, and it is also possible to infer the type of special game that can be executed, whether it is executed, the possibility, etc. through the stop mode. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the stop mode when the variable display is stopped, and fuel the expectation for the special game thereafter.

  In addition to the first to fourth stop modes, for example, a stop mode in which the stop order of the three symbols forming the effect symbol 8 is “right symbol → left symbol → middle symbol” (fifth stop mode) ), The stop time of the left symbol and the middle symbol is substantially the same, and after that the right symbol is supposed to stop (6th stop mode), it is possible to provide various stop modes, and each stop The conditions under which the mode is executed are not limited to those in the present embodiment, and can be set variously.

  Further, in this embodiment, the symbols "1" to "9" constituting the effect design 8 are colored so that they can be classified by color, and the type of the symbol (symbol type) is determined by the color. As shown in FIG. 53, this symbol type corresponds to the game state (production mode). Specifically, in state A (production mode A, B), "7" of the odd-numbered symbols is a red symbol (hereinafter also referred to as "red symbol"), and other odd-numbered symbols "1", "3". , “5”, “9” are green symbols (hereinafter also referred to as “green symbols”), and even symbols “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” are blue symbols (hereinafter “blue”). (Also referred to as "design"). On the other hand, in the states B and C (rendering modes C, D, and E), "3", "5", and "7" of the odd-numbered symbols are red symbols, and the other odd-numbered symbols are "1" and "9". Is a green pattern, and even-numbered symbols “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” are blue symbols.

  The correspondence relationship between the design and the color according to the present embodiment shown in FIG. 53 is merely an example, and other correspondence relationships can be adopted, and the type of color is not limited to the present embodiment. , Other colors can be used. Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol type (red symbol, green symbol, blue symbol) is determined by color, but it can be determined by elements other than color. For example, a type of character when a character is attached to the effect design, and a numerical design in the case of having an effect design (character design) that represents a predetermined character in addition to the effect design (numerical design) that represents a number and Depending on the character design, the design type may be defined, and further, the design type may be defined simply by the odd design and the even design.

  Variable display of the effect design 8 is performed, by the symbol combination (stop display mode) of the effect design 8 (8L, 8C, 8R) displayed (derived display) when the variable display is stopped according to the above-described stop mode, The result of the variable display is notified. In the present embodiment, as a basic symbol combination (stop display mode), the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all different symbols (numerals), that is, "completely separated eyes" (such as "124"), and effect symbols. 8L (left symbol) and the effect symbol 8R (right symbol) are the same symbol (number), and the remaining effect symbol 8C (middle symbol) is a symbol (number) different from the others, "Reach reach" ("343" etc.) ) Is a disengagement mode (non-specific mode) that does not trigger the execution of the winning game. On the other hand, "Zoro eyes" ("777", etc.) in which the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are all the same as a big hit mode (specific mode) that triggers execution of a big hit game of 4R or more (see FIG. 6) There is.

  On the premise of such a basic symbol combination, in the present embodiment, the "reach roses" among the roses are also used for the 2R jackpot mode which is a trigger for executing the 2R jackpot game (see FIG. 6). . This is because the 2R big hit game has a smaller number of prize balls (the number of acquired prize balls) that the player can obtain compared to the 4R big hit game (4R big hit game, 15R big hit game), and the state C (high It is a special game that triggers the setting of state B (high base state) where it is more difficult to win a prize ball (increased balls) in a small hit game compared to a precise low base state, that is, for the player This is because the special game has a relatively low degree of profit (profit amount). In addition, the "completely broken eyes" among the broken eyes are also used as a small hit mode that is a trigger for executing the small hit game (second special symbol) in the state B (high base state). As described above, in the state B, the second starting opening 21 is open for most of the time, so that the small winning big winning opening (second winning opening 21) located downstream of the second starting opening 21. This is because it is difficult to enter the big winning opening 35) and it is extremely unlikely that the profit from the small hit can be obtained (nearly zero) (substantially equivalent to a miss). Furthermore, the "specific break" to be described later among the breaks is a small hit mode that is a trigger for executing the small hit game (small hit of the second special symbol) in the state C (high-accuracy low base state). Here, the small-hit mode (particularly unbalanced pattern) is also referred to as the "first display mode", and the large-hit mode (double-sided pattern) is also referred to as the "second display mode". Of the eyes), the reach-cleared eye is also referred to as a “third display mode”, and of the out-of-order modes (completely-spaced eye, reach-bare-eyed eye), the completely-spaced eye is also referred to as a “fourth display mode”.

  In addition, since the state A (low accurate low base state) is a game state in which a left-handed game is basically performed, the first special symbol winning / deciding determination (variation display of the first special symbol) is mainly performed. Yes, during the variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol hit determination (variable display of the second special symbol) is rarely performed, so the second special symbol hit determination in such a situation When performed, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to this is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and only the variable display (and stop display) by the effect display device 102 is performed. There is. Similarly, the state B (high base state) and the state C (high-probability low base state) are game states that are basically right-handed games, so mainly the second special symbol winning / deciding judgment (second special) Since the variable display of the symbol) is performed, it is rare that the first special symbol validity determination (variable display of the first special symbol) is performed during the variable display of the second special symbol, such a situation. When the first special symbol hit determination is made below, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to this is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the variable display by the effect display device 102 ( And stop display). However, if a special symbol hit determination is made against the current game state (left-handed game, right-handed game) and a "big hit" determination result is obtained (for example, the first special symbol hit determination in state C When a big hit is made), one or more display devices among the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display an effect indicating that the big hit has occurred. To do. As a result, while the production display (variation production) of the production symbol 8 corresponding to the current game state (variation display of the main special symbol) is mainly performed on the display screen 7a, the line is displayed in parallel with the variation display of the main special symbol. It is possible to inform the player that the result of the variable display of the special symbols to be displayed is a big hit. In addition, by suggesting the occurrence of such a big hit, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player loses the opportunity to obtain a profit by stopping the game without noticing the occurrence of the big hit.

[Game production in state A]
Next, the game effect performed when the game state is controlled to the state A (low accurate low base state) will be described. The game effect performed in the state A is an effect symbol game effect (fluctuation effect) that is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol, mainly based on the result of the first special symbol hit determination. As described above, in the state A, “A” or “B” is set as the effect mode. Therefore, the effect design game effect in the state A is performed under the condition that the background image or the like (not shown) corresponding to the effect mode A or B is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the present embodiment, the setting and transition of the effect mode in the state A are automatically performed under the control of the sub-control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91) according to a predetermined mode control condition. .. Therefore, the player cannot participate in the setting of the effect mode in the state A.

  Further, in the state A, as the effect design 8, “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” designs made of blue designs and “1”, “3”, “5” made of green designs, The symbol "9" and the symbol "7" consisting of red symbols are displayed (see FIG. 53). To display each of these symbols, the image control microcomputer 101 reads out the image data (symbol data) of the corresponding symbol from the ROM of the image control board 100 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Executed.

  Based on such effect mode and symbol type, as shown in FIG. 54, when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 54 (a)), the variable display is basically the second stop mode. (Left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) is stopped (see Fig. 54 (b) → (c) → (d), (e) → (f)) When the function works (see S1707 in FIG. 9 and FIG. 24), it is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 54 (g)). Here, when the left symbol (effect symbol 8L) and the right symbol (effect symbol 8R) stop at the same symbol, reach is established (see FIG. 54 (f)), and then the middle symbol (effect symbol 8C) is displayed in a variable display. The reach effect is executed on the image display device or the like until the stop. In the reach effect, mainly, the effect indicating whether or not the middle symbol (final stop symbol) stops at the same symbol as the symbol previously stopped (whether or not the big hit mode is displayed) is developed. The same is true in the states B and C regarding the establishment of reach and the production of reach.

  In this way, when the effect design 8 is variably displayed, as a result of the variability display, when the effect design 8 is displayed in a disparate pattern (complete disparity pattern or reach disparity pattern), it is “out”. On the other hand, when the effect design 8 is displayed in the big hit mode (doublet) as a result of the variable display, the big hit game can be executed, and when the big hit game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed. But, it switches to the big hit game effect for 4R big hit concerning the 1st special design. If the big hit game is related to the "4R first big hit", the game state after the big hit game is the state C (high-accuracy low base state), and the "4R second big hit" is concerned. If so, the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes the state B (low accurate high base state) (see FIG. 6).

[Game production in state B]
Next, a game effect that is performed when the game state is controlled to the state B (a low-probability high base state or a high-probability high base state) will be described. The high-accuracy high-base state is set after the jackpot game based on the "2R fifth big hit" or "2R sixth big hit" occurs in the state C (high-accuracy low base state).

  The game effect performed in the state B is an effect symbol game effect (fluctuation effect) that is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol, mainly based on the result of the second special symbol hit determination. As described above, in the state B, “E” is set as the effect mode. For this reason, the effect design game effect of the state B is performed under the condition that the background image or the like (not shown) corresponding to the effect mode E is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In this embodiment, the effect mode E corresponding to the state B is automatically set according to the transition to the state B under the control of the sub-control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91). Therefore, the player cannot participate in the setting of the effect mode E.

  Further, in the state B, as the effect symbols 8, “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” symbols made of blue symbols, “1”, “9” symbols made of green symbols, and red. The symbols "3", "5", and "7" composed of symbols are displayed (see FIG. 53). To display each of these symbols, the image control microcomputer 101 reads out the image data (symbol data) of the corresponding symbol from the ROM of the image control board 100 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Executed. In this example, the state (design) of the effect design 8 is different between the state A and the state B.

  Under such an effect mode and symbol type, as shown in FIG. 55, when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 55 (a)), the variable display is basically the third stop mode. It is stopped by (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 55 (b)). This is because, in the state B, the second special symbol time saving function and the high base generating function are activated, so that the out variation and the small hit variation without reach can be digested in the shortest possible time to allow the game to proceed smoothly. This is because. When the variable display is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop), it becomes clear to the player that there is no possibility of executing the special game (big hit game) immediately after the stop. There is no agitation for the people. On the other hand, if there are out-of-reach fluctuations or big hit fluctuations (that is, "reach fluctuations") with reach, or if "reach fluctuations" (acting as "reach fluctuations"), which is actually normal fluctuations (a kind of fluctuation mode without reach) In the case of being displayed, the variable display of the effect design 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left design → right design → middle design) (FIG. 55 (c) → (d), (c) → (e) → ( See f)).

  In this way, when the effect design 8 is variably displayed, when the effect design 8 is displayed in the disengagement mode (separated pattern) as a result of the variably display, it is “disengaged”. On the other hand, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the big hit mode (double eyes) as a result of the variable display, the big hit game can be executed, and when the big hit game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a is switched to the big hit game effect. Instead, a round effect or the like is performed according to the progress of the big hit game. Since the big hit game when the effect design 8 is displayed in the big hit mode in the state B is related to "15R third big hit" or "4R fourth big hit", as the big hit game effect, 15R Big hit game effect for 3 big hit or big hit game effect for 4R 4th big hit is done. Then, the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes the state C (high-accuracy low base state) (see FIG. 6).

  In addition, when the effect design 8 is displayed in the 2R big hit mode (reach variety) as a result of the variable display, the display content on the display screen 7a is switched to the big hit game effect for the 2R big hit with the start of the big hit game. Replace. Then, when the big hit game started is related to "2R fifth big hit" or "2R sixth big hit", the game state after the big hit game is a highly accurate high base state (state B), When the big hit game is related to "2R seventh big hit" or "2R eighth big hit", the game state after the big hit game is a low-probability-high base state (state B) (see FIG. 6). ).

  Further, in the state B, the result of the second special symbol hit determination is a small hit, and when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 based on this is performed, the variable display is performed in the normal variation and stopped in the third stop mode. It Then, as a result of the variable display, the effect design 8 is displayed in a completely disjointed pattern (disengagement mode) (see FIG. 55 (b)). When the small hit in the state B, the small hit game is executed, but even if the small hit game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a remains as the effect design game effect (here, the effect design). 8 is displayed in a completely unclear pattern), and the effect during the small hit game (small hit game effect) is not particularly performed. This is because, as described above, the small hit in the state B is substantially equivalent to the miss. Then, the gaming state after the end of the small hitting game remains the state B unless it overlaps with the transition timing of the gaming state based on the number of times the special symbol changes.

  In the low-probability-high base state that is the state B, when the variable display of the special symbol (mainly the second special symbol) is performed a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 times in this embodiment) without a big hit. , The game state shifts to the state A (low-probability low base state) with the end (stop) of the variation display (outside variation) for the predetermined number of times, and the effect mode shifts from "E" to "A" or "B". To do. Further, in the high-precision high-base state which is the state B, when the variable display of the special symbol (mainly the second special symbol) is performed a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 times in this embodiment) without a big hit, The game state shifts to the state C (high-accuracy low base state) upon the end (stop) of the predetermined number of times of fluctuation display (outside fluctuation), and the effect mode shifts from "E" to "C" or "D". ..

[Game production in state C]
Next, the game effect performed when the game state is controlled to the state C (high-accuracy low base state) will be described. The game effect performed in the state C is mainly based on the result of the second special symbol hit determination, the effect symbol game effect (fluctuation effect) that is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol, and the small hit occurrence. It is an effect (small hit game effect). State C is an advantageous game state (specific game state) in which a large number of prize balls can be expected to be obtained between the big hits by frequently making the small hits until the next big hit occurs. Therefore, in the state C, a special effect in which the effect symbol game effect and the small hit game effect are linked is performed. Details of this point will be described later.

  Further, as described above, in the state C, "C" or "D" is set as the effect mode. Therefore, the game effect in the state C is performed under the condition that the background image or the like corresponding to the effect mode C or D is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The setting of the effect mode in the state C is performed under the control of the sub-control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91) as in the case of the above-described states A and B, but in the present embodiment, during the mode selection period described later. It is possible for the player to select the effect mode by operating the first effect button 63a, and the effect mode C or D is set based on the selection result. Further, in the state C, as in the state B, as the effect symbols 8, "2", "4", "6" and "8" symbols made of blue symbols and "1", "9" made of green symbols. , And symbols “3”, “5”, and “7” composed of red symbols are displayed (see FIG. 53). In this embodiment, the state (design) of the effect design 8 is the same in the state B and the state C.

  Here, in the "effect mode C" and the "effect mode D" in the state C, the contents of the game effect (specification of effect) developed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are significantly different. . Therefore, in the following, the game effect in each effect mode will be described by dividing into “effect mode C” and “effect mode D”.

[Direction mode C]
As shown in FIG. 56 (a), in the effect mode C, the effect symbol 8 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and behind the effect symbol 8 as a background image corresponding to the effect mode C. A predetermined character is displayed. The characters displayed here include an ally character (first character) and an enemy character (second character), and both characters are displayed so as to face each other. These characters are displayed even when the variable display of the symbols is not performed. There are a plurality of types of characters for each of the ally character and the enemy character, and one of the ally characters (also referred to as “ally character”) and one enemy character (also referred to as “enemy character”) of the rendering mode C are included. Displayed when setting. As the effect by the character (character effect), for example, the effect display is performed in such a manner that the teammate character attacks the enemy character or the teammate character is attacked by the enemy character. The effect (character effect) by such a character is performed as a variable effect based on the variable effect pattern (when accompanied by the variable display of the identification information), and when the result of the variable display is a small hit, the small hit game is executed. There is a case where it is performed as a small hit game effect when it is performed (a case where it is performed with a special game after the end of the variable display).

  In addition, the right-handed instruction image M for instructing the right-handedness is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a, and the number of won prize balls (earned profit amount) is displayed in the lower right portion (first display portion) of the display screen 7a. The prize ball count image C1 shown is displayed. The prize ball count image C1 of the present embodiment is composed of an image (numerical image) capable of displaying a five-digit number “00000” to “99999” and a character image of “pt”. This award ball count image C1 mainly shows the number of award balls (the number of award balls to be won) which the player has obtained by a big hit game, a small hit game, etc., and the game state after the big hit game is the state B or the state. In the case of becoming C, the number of prize balls to be acquired during that period (so-called number of prize balls to be acquired during the condominium period) is shown until the game state returns to the state A (except during the big hit game). . In addition, since the state C (high-accuracy low base state) is an advantageous state in which small hits frequently occur (the frequency of executing small hit games increases), winning a prize ball in the small hit game (increasing the number of balls held) The prize ball count image C1 is displayed for the purpose of rendering. That is, as a small hit game effect, effect display (ball entry effect) by the prize ball count image C1 is performed. Details of the effect associated with the occurrence of the small hit will be described later.

  The basic flow of the variable display (fluctuation effect) of the effect symbol 8 in the effect mode C having such a screen configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 57. It should be noted that in FIG. 57, for convenience of explanation, a part of display contents such as effect holding (holding symbol), right-handing instruction image M, and background is omitted. As shown in FIG. 57, when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 57A), the variable display is basically stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (FIG. 57). 57 (b)). This is because, in the state C, the second special symbol time saving function operates, so that the out fluctuations without reach can be digested in the shortest possible time to allow the game to proceed smoothly. When the variable display of the effect design 8 is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop), it becomes apparent to the player that there is no possibility of executing the special game (big hit game, small hit game) immediately after the stop. . Therefore, when the variable display is stopped in the third stop mode, the effect (inclination effect) for increasing the player's expectation is not performed. On the other hand, when the reach variation (off or big hit) or the reach tilt out variation is performed, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) (Fig. 57 ( c) → (d), (c) → (e) → (f)). Also, when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the result of the second special symbol hit determination is "small hit", the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is the first stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → It is stopped at the right pattern) (see FIG. 57 (g) → (h) → (i)).

  In this way, when the effect design 8 is variably displayed, when the effect design 8 is displayed in the disengagement mode (separated pattern) as a result of the variably display, it is “disengaged”. On the other hand, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the big hit mode (double eyes) as a result of the variable display, the big hit game can be executed, and when the big hit game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a is switched to the big hit game effect. Instead, a round effect or the like is performed according to the progress of the big hit game. Since the big hit game when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the big hit mode in the state C is related to "15R third big hit" or "4R fourth big hit", in this case, for the 15R third big hit The big hit game effect or the big hit game effect for the 4R fourth big hit is performed. Then, the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes the state C (high-accuracy low base state) (see FIG. 6).

  In addition, when the effect design 8 is displayed in the 2R big hit mode (reach variety) as a result of the variable display, the display content on the display screen 7a is switched to the big hit game effect for the 2R big hit with the start of the big hit game. Replace. As the big hit game effect in this case, the state C, that is, the effect display showing the end of the advantageous state in which the small hits frequently occur is performed from the start to the end of the 2R big hit game. Then, when the big hit game started is related to "2R fifth big hit" or "2R sixth big hit", the game state after the big hit game is a highly accurate high base state (state B), When the big hit game is related to "2R seventh big hit" or "2R eighth big hit", the game state after the big hit game is a low-probability-high base state (state B) (see FIG. 6). ).

  In addition, in the production mode C (state C), the result of the second special symbol hit determination is a small hit, and when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 based on this is performed, the variable display is performed as a normal variation. It is stopped in the stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol). Then, as a result of the variable display, the effect design 8 is displayed with a specific variation (small hit mode) (see FIG. 57 (i)). Here, in the present embodiment, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are all red symbols, two adjacent symbols of the three symbols are the same, and the remaining one is a different symbol combination (“335”, “355”). , "557", etc.) is defined as a specific pattern (small hit mode). The symbol combination that makes up a specific pattern (small hit mode) does not constitute a reach, but since two adjacent symbols have the same symbol (number), such a symbol combination Is also referred to as "reach sequence".

  Among the symbols (“3”, “5”, and “7”) that make up the specific rose (first display mode), the symbols “3” and “5” make up the specific rose in the state A. Although it is a green design (first design type) that cannot be done, in the state C, it is a red design (second design type) that can form a specific pattern (see FIG. 53). In other words, the symbols "3" and "5" are symbols whose symbol type changes depending on the game state. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the symbol type (color type in this example) of the effect symbol and draw interest in the game.

  In the present embodiment, a part of the effect symbols (“1”, “3”, “5”, “9”) that are the green symbols in the state A, and a specific variability in the state C (first Although the display pattern) is a red pattern that can be configured, for example, a part of the effect design (“2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) that is a blue pattern in the state A is a red pattern. Or, the production design (“2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) that is a blue design in the state A, and the production design (“1”, “3”, “5” that is a green design) It is also possible to make each part (for example, "4" and "5") of "," "9") a red design. Further, as the symbol type, a symbol type dedicated to the state C, which does not exist in the state A, may be provided, and a specific variation (first display mode) may be configured by the symbols belonging to this symbol type. For example, a gold design (gold design) is provided as a design type dedicated to the state C, and a part of the effect design which is the green design in the state A can be the gold design in the state C. As a result, it is possible to make the symbol types that can form a specific pattern more prominent and to make it easier for the player to attract attention. Alternatively, in this embodiment, the symbols "3" and "5" which are the green symbols (first symbol type) in the state A are the red symbols (second symbol type) in the state C, but in this case, In the state A, the red symbol (second symbol type) from the beginning, the symbol “7” may be changed to the gold symbol in the state C. In this case, the symbols "3" and "5" that are red symbols (second symbol type) are the symbols that can form a specific pattern, and the symbol "7" that is a gold symbol (third symbol type) Can be a 15R jackpot mode (“7” doublet) corresponding to the 15R third jackpot of the jackpots. With this, the symbol type (red symbol) that can form a specific rose pattern (small hit mode) and the symbol type (gold pattern) that configures a specific flatter pattern (15R big hit mode) are clearly distinguished, and hit. It is possible to clearly show the correspondence between the type and the symbol type.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the derivation display (stop of the variable display) of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of red symbols) in the effect mode C, the first stop mode that cannot appear in other effect modes (left symbol → It is assumed that the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the order of stop of the middle symbol → the right symbol). Therefore, not only the small hit mode (reach arrangement of red symbols) but also the stopped mode of the variable display, which triggers the display of the small hit mode, are paid attention to by the player. Furthermore, in the effect mode C, when the derivation display of the small hit mode (stop of the variable display), the effect display that emphasizes the display of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of the red pattern) is performed. Specifically, one line image that extends in the lateral direction (horizontal direction) along the stop order of the first stop mode through the center of each pattern (red pattern) that constitutes the small hit mode, and the periphery of each pattern. It is assumed that an effect image E (effect effect image) composed of an image (decorative image) for decorating is displayed. As a result, it is possible to emphasize the display of the small hit mode (that the small hit game is executed) when the variable display is stopped in the first stop mode, and when the variable display is stopped in the first stop mode. It is possible to enhance the effect of. The form of the effect image E is not limited to this embodiment, and various other forms can be adopted.

  In addition, when the game ball enters the second big winning opening 35 in the small hit game executed by the display of the small hit mode, the winning prize ball shown by the prize ball count image C1 for each of the entered balls. The number (numerical image) is added and displayed (updated). In the present embodiment, since the number of prize balls based on the entrance into the second special winning opening 35 is 10 prize balls for one entrance, the winning prize shown by the prize ball count image C1. The number of balls is added in units of 10. Further, when the small hit game is executed triggered by the display of the small hit mode, the ally character (first character) and the enemy character (first character) displayed as the background image on the display screen 7a along with the execution of the small hit game ( An effect display (character effect) by the second character) is performed. Specifically, an effect display (also referred to as "first effect") in which one of an ally character and an enemy character (for example, an ally character) attacks or mounts the other (for example, an enemy character) I am trying. In this case, the character effect (also referred to as “character effect display”) does not include a battle effect described below that depicts the confrontation scene of both characters. The execution period of the small hit game is determined according to the opening time of the small winning big winning opening (second big winning opening 35), but the opening time of the second big winning opening 35 in the small hit game is 1. Because it is 8 seconds, it is difficult to secure the execution time of the battle effect at this time. By performing the character effect along with the small hitting game having a short execution time in this manner, it becomes easy to make the relevant character effect and the character effect performed as a variable effect described later as related effects, and from the variable display. It is possible to obtain an effect (character effect) having a sense of unity between the teammate character and the enemy character in the small hit game. Here, the addition display of the prize ball count image C1 accompanying the small hit is a sub command of the second prize hole entrance command transmitted from the main control unit 80 based on the detection of the game ball by the second prize hole sensor 35a. The character effect display associated with the small hit is performed based on the reception by the control unit 90. The sub control unit 90 receives the opening command (S2066) for the small hit transmitted from the main control unit 80. Since these are performed, all of these effects correspond to the small hit game effect (S4407, S4408). The effect of additionally displaying the number of acquired prize balls (acquired profit amount) indicated by the prize ball count image C1 is also referred to as “first profit effect”.

  In this way, in the effect mode C (state C), the stop in the first stop mode of the effect symbol 8 and the display of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of the red pattern) occur at a high frequency, and accordingly, in the small hit game. Since the addition display of the prize ball count image C1 and the character effect display can be executed at a high frequency, the cooperation of such effect symbol game effect (variable effect) and the small hit game effect strongly causes the occurrence of the small hit to the player. It is possible to make an impression. As a result, it is possible to fuel the expectation for winning prize balls (increasing the number of balls) due to the frequent occurrence of small hits, and to enhance the enjoyment of the game in the production mode C (state C). The character effect display associated with the small hit is performed based on the sub control unit 90 receiving the second big winning opening ball entry command from the main control unit 80, as in the addition display of the prize ball count image C1. It may be configured as follows. In this case, if the game ball does not enter the second special winning opening 35 in the small hit game, the character production is not performed. Therefore, when the game ball enters the second special winning opening 35, It becomes possible to give a strong impression to the player, and it becomes easy to determine whether or not the game ball has entered the second special winning opening 35 in the small hit game.

  Next, description will be made on the contents of the effect display (effect mode) in the case where the reach variation (off or big hit) or the reach tilt out variation is performed in the effect mode C. As described above, in the effect mode C, the effect symbol game effect (variable display of the effect symbol 8 etc.) is displayed with the ally character (first character) and the enemy character (second character) displayed on the display screen 7a as the background. ) Is performed (see FIG. 56 (a)). In addition, when the reach variation (out or big hit) is performed and when the reach out-of-range variation is performed, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol). (See FIG. 57 (c) → (d), (c) → (e) → (f)). In such a situation, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started based on the variation effect pattern of the reach variation or the reach out-of-range variation, then the left symbol (effect symbol 8L) first stops according to the second stop mode. However (see FIG. 57 (c)), when the left symbol (first stop symbol) is stopped, an effect display depicting a scene in which one of an ally character and an enemy character displayed in the background mounts an attack on the opponent (First effect) is performed. The first effect in this case is an effect (character effect) by the character (allied character, enemy character) that is performed before the right symbol (effect symbol 8R, second stop symbol) is stopped. The first effect is roughly divided into a pattern in which an ally character attacks an enemy character (also referred to as "first effect pattern A") and a pattern in which an enemy character attacks an ally character (" (Also referred to as “first effect pattern B”), and for each pattern, there are a plurality of patterns that define the content (type) of the attack to be set, success or failure of the attack, and the like. By providing such a plurality of types of patterns, suggestion of information (big hit reliability, content of production that can be executed later, etc.) relating to the present variation display (the variation) by the content of the production when the first production is performed. (Preliminary notice). It should be noted that the first effect is an effect that one of the ally character and the enemy character mounts an attack on the other and ends, and does not include a battle effect described below.

  For example, when the pattern of the first effect (also referred to as “first effect pattern”) is the first effect pattern A (a pattern in which an ally character mounts an attack), at least the 2R big hit mode is not displayed as a result of the variable display. In other words, it suggests that the big hit that triggers the end of the state C, which is an advantageous state in which small hits frequently occur, does not occur. In this case, in the variation, after that, the right symbol (second stop symbol), the middle symbol (third stop symbol) are stopped without reaching, and the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a complete dislocation (outside mode). Ruka (reach deviation deviation), whether the reach is achieved and developed to reach production, but finally the middle symbol stops with a pattern different from the left and right symbols and the production symbol 8 is displayed in reach reach (outside mode) (Out-of-reach variation), or through the reach production, the effect design 8 is displayed with a doublet (big hit mode) (big hit change). On the other hand, when the first effect pattern is a first effect pattern B (a pattern in which an enemy character mounts an attack), which is the opposite of the first effect pattern, a 2R big hit mode that triggers the end of state C is displayed as a result of the variable display. Suggests a possibility. In this case, in the variation, after that, the right symbol (second stop symbol), the middle symbol (third stop symbol) are stopped without reaching, and the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a complete dislocation (outside mode). Ruka (reach deviation deviation), but reach reached and developed to reach production, but finally the middle pattern stops with a pattern different from the left and right symbols and the production pattern 8 is reach reach (outside mode or 2R big hit mode) It is displayed (out-of-reach variation or 2R big-hit variation), or the effect design 8 is displayed with double eyes (big-hit variation) after reach production. In this way, by the first effect performed by stopping the left symbol (first stop symbol), the subsequent development of the fluctuation (whether the reach is established, whether it is an advantageous development for the player, etc.) It is possible to suggest. It is suggested that the first effect pattern A is more likely to be advantageous to the player for the subsequent development than the first effect pattern B. Such a first effect pattern is included in the variable effect pattern, and the first effect is executed by any of a plurality of types of patterns according to the variable effect pattern set (selected) in S4505 described above. It is decided whether to do it.

  After the left symbol (effect symbol 8L, first stop symbol) is stopped in this way (after execution of the first effect), the right symbol (effect symbol 8R, second stop symbol) is stopped according to the second stop mode. When the right symbol to be stopped becomes a symbol (number) different from the left symbol, the reach is not established, and then the middle symbol (production symbol 8C, the third stop symbol) is stopped and the variable display ends, and the production symbol 8 It is displayed in a completely disjointed pattern (outside mode). In this case, the fluctuation is out-of-reach fluctuation (see FIG. 57 (c) → (e) → (f)).

  On the other hand, if the right symbol that stops following the left symbol becomes the same symbol (number) as the left symbol, the reach is established. At this point, the change is a reach change (see FIG. 57 (c) → (d)). When the reach is established, a predetermined reach effect (also referred to as “second effect”) is performed on the display screen 7a. The second effect, after the reach is established (after the execution of the first effect), the effect by the character (allied character, enemy character) that is performed in a state where the middle symbol (effect symbol 8C, third stop symbol) is still changing ( In the present embodiment, it is performed as a battle effect that depicts a confrontation scene between the ally character and the enemy character that have been displayed as the background. The second effect (battle effect) is roughly divided into a pattern in which an ally character wins a confrontation (battle) (also referred to as "second effect pattern A") and a pattern in which an ally character loses the confrontation (battle). There are three patterns (also referred to as "second effect pattern B") and a pattern (also referred to as "second effect pattern C") that ends the battle (battle) without winning or losing. Further, each pattern has an enemy. There are a plurality of patterns that define the type of character, which of the ally character and the enemy character will attack first (the type of character that makes the preemptive attack), the content of the attack, success or failure, and the like. By providing such a plurality of types of patterns, it is possible to suggest information (big hit reliability etc.) relating to the present variation display (the variation) by the content of the production when the second production (battle production) is performed. There is.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 64 (a), of the second effect patterns (also referred to as “second effect patterns”), the ally character makes a preemptive attack on the second effect pattern A (ally victory pattern). There is a pattern in which the enemy character first wins and the ally character eventually wins. Further, in the second effect pattern B (allied defeat pattern), there is a pattern in which the enemy character makes a first strike and the allied character is defeated. Furthermore, in the second effect pattern C (a winning / losing undecided pattern), a pattern in which an ally character makes a preemptive attack but the enemy character evades the attack, and a pattern in which the enemy character makes a preemptive attack and the ally character bears the attack There is. The second effects (battle effects) based on these second effect patterns all start with a preemptive attack of an ally character or an enemy character, and the effect contents (confrontation results) until the subsequent confrontation result (battle result) becomes clear. Scene, etc.) is predetermined according to each pattern. Such a second effect pattern is included in the variable effect pattern, and depending on the variable effect pattern set (selected) in S4505, the second effect (battle Whether to execute) is decided.

  In this embodiment, when the reach variation in the effect mode C is performed as a big hit variation based on the result of the second special symbol hit determination being a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit), that is, a change When the effect design 8 is displayed as a doublet (big hit mode) as a result of the display, before the big hit mode is displayed (before the derivation display), the second effect (battle) based on the second effect pattern A (ally victory pattern). Production) is performed. In this case, after the variable display is stopped (after the big hit mode is displayed), the big hit game of 15R or 4R is performed, and the game state becomes the state C (high-accuracy low base state) again after the big hit game. Therefore, the player can play the game in the advantageous state (state C) in which the small hits frequently occur again after the big hit game. Since the game in the state C can be continued after the big hit game in this way, the second effect pattern A is a pattern in which the teammate character wins.

  Further, when the reach variation in the effect mode C is performed as a deviation variation (reach deviation variation) based on the result of the second special symbol hit determination being out, that is, the effect symbol 8 is a reach variation as a result of the variation display. When it is displayed with eyes (disappearance mode), the second effect (battle effect) based on the second effect pattern C (undecided pattern) is performed before the disengagement mode is displayed (before derivation display). In this case, the game in the state C is continued after the variable display is stopped (after the disengagement mode is displayed). Since the game in the state C continues in this way, the second effect pattern C is a pattern in which the confrontation (battle) is finished without a winning or losing decision.

  Furthermore, when the reach variation in the effect mode C is performed as a 2R jackpot variation based on the result of the second special symbol hit determination being the 2R jackpot (any of the 2R 5th to 8th jackpots), that is, the variation As a result of the display, when the effect design 8 is displayed in a reach-bare pattern (2R big hit mode), the second effect based on the second effect pattern B (allied defeat pattern) before the 2R big hit mode is displayed (before the derivation display). (Battle production) is performed. In this case, the 2R big hit game is performed after the variable display is stopped (after the 2R big hit mode is displayed), and the game state becomes the state B (high base state) after the big hit game. Therefore, for the player, the game in the advantageous state (state C) in which the small hits frequently occur is ended by the occurrence of the 2R big hits. In this way, the game state shifts from the state C to the state B via the 2R jackpot, so that the second effect pattern B is a pattern in which the teammate character is defeated.

  Here, of the second effect patterns A to C, the patterns including the contents that the ally character makes a preemptive attack are the second effect pattern A (ally victory pattern) and the second effect pattern C (undecided pattern). Therefore (see FIG. 64 (a)), for the player, the battle effect (second effect) is started after the reach is established on the display screen 7a, and the confrontation (battle) in the battle effect is preempted by the ally character. If it starts from an attack, it can be inferred at that point that there is at least no possibility of a 2R jackpot, that is, the end of state C. On the other hand, the pattern including the content of the enemy character making a preemptive attack corresponds to all of the second effect patterns A to C (see FIG. 64 (a)). Therefore, for the player, the reach on the display screen 7a is reached. If the battle production (second production) is started after the formation, and the confrontation (battle) in the battle production starts from the preemptive attack of the enemy character, the possibility of a 2R jackpot (end of state C is possible at that time) Sex) cannot be excluded. Then, after the enemy character's preemptive attack, when the ally character is defeated and the battle effect ends, the pattern of the battle effect (second effect) is the second effect pattern B, so the fluctuation is the 2R jackpot. This is a change, and as a result, the game in state C is over. On the other hand, if the ally character finally wins after the first strike of the enemy character and the battle effect ends, the pattern of the battle effect (second effect) is the second effect pattern A. The variation is a 15R or 4R jackpot variation, and when the teammate dodges the enemy character's preemptive attack to end the battle production, the pattern of the battle production (second production) is the second production pattern C. Therefore, the fluctuation is a deviation fluctuation, and in these cases, the game in the state C can be continuously executed. In this way, in the reach variation in the effect mode C, by performing the second effect (battle effect) based on the second effect patterns A to C, the advantageous state in which small hits frequently occur (state C) continues (victory, undecided). ) Or end (defeat), it is possible to obtain a staging effect that excites the player's expectations and anxiety. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the variable effect (character effect) from the first effect to the second effect (battle effect), and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the effect mode C (state C). Becomes

[Direction mode D]
As shown in FIG. 56 (b), in the effect mode D, the effect pattern 8 is smaller in size (reduced size) than the other effect modes such as the effect mode C in the upper right of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (also referred to as “reduced display”), and the main image X imitating a fighter is displayed in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. In the production mode D that adopts such a screen configuration, usually, while the variable display of the production symbol 8 is displayed in the upper right of the screen, the production display mainly showing the flight of the fighter is developed on the display screen 7a. It has become a thing. Then, when the reach variation is performed, the effect symbol 8 is displayed large in the approximate center of the screen as in the effect mode C described above, and a predetermined reach effect (development effect, etc.) is displayed on the entire display screen after the reach is established. It is possible to use it. In the present embodiment, the main image X imitating a fighter is displayed as the main effect image in the effect mode D, but an image with a motif other than this as the main effect image may be displayed. It is possible. Further, also in the effect mode D, as in the effect mode C, the right hitting instruction image M and the prize ball count image C1 are displayed.

  A basic flow of the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol 8 in the effect mode D having such a screen configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 58. Note that, also in FIG. 58, for convenience of explanation, part of the display contents such as effect holding (holding symbol) is omitted. First, in the rendering mode D, a moving image depicting a scene in which the main image X flies is normally displayed. This moving image is displayed even when the variable display of the symbols is not performed. When the variable display of the effect design 8 is started (see FIG. 58 (a)), the variable display is basically in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) in the case of normal fluctuation (off or small hit). It is stopped (see FIG. 58 (b)). The reason for stopping in the third stop mode is the same as in the effect mode C described above. In the production mode D, the mode of the variable display when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed at the upper right of the display screen 7a is a switching display in which the symbols (numbers) are sequentially switched on the spot without scrolling. .. On the other hand, when the reach variation (outside or big hit) or the reach out-of-range variation is performed, the main image X is hidden, and the effect design 8 that has been displayed small (reduced display) in the upper right of the screen until then is displayed. It is displayed large in the approximate center of the screen 7a, and its variable display is performed by vertical scrolling (see FIG. 58 (c)). Then, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) or the fourth stop mode (left / right symbol simultaneous stop → middle symbol) (FIG. 58 (c) → (D) → (e), (c) → (e), (d) → (f) → (g)). When the variable display is stopped in the fourth stop mode (left / right symbol simultaneous stop → middle symbol), after the main image X is hidden, the effect symbol 8 is largely displayed in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. At the timing, the left symbol and the right symbol may be stopped at substantially the same time, and the middle symbol may be variably displayed (scroll display).

  In this way, when the effect design 8 is variably displayed, when the effect design 8 is displayed in the disengagement mode (separated pattern) as a result of the variably display, it is “disengaged”. On the other hand, 4R or 15R big hit game can be executed when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the big hit mode (Zoro eyes) as a result of the variable display, and 2R big hit game can be executed when displayed in the 2R big hit mode (Reach reach). Becomes The effect during the big hit game and the game state after the big hit game are the same as in the case of the effect mode C, and therefore detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  In addition, in the production mode D (state C), the result of the second special symbol hit determination is a small hit, and when the variable display (small hit change) of the effect symbol 8 based on this is performed, the variable display is displayed on the upper right of the screen. The normal fluctuation is performed and the vehicle is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 58 (b)). At this time, as a result of the variable display, the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a specific variability (small hit mode) (see FIG. 58 (b)). Here, in the effect mode C, the variable display associated with the small hit is stopped in the first stop mode that cannot appear in other effect modes, and the effect image E (effect effect image) is displayed at the time of the stop. The display of the effect design 8 is mainly shown to emphasize the occurrence of the small hit. On the other hand, in the effect mode D, by displaying the effect symbol 8 in the specific upper right corner of the display screen 7a in a specific variation (small hit mode), the notification of the occurrence of the small hit by the stop display mode of the effect pattern 8 is proper. Although it is supposed to be performed in an inconspicuous manner, at that time, an effect image different from the effect pattern 8 can be displayed, and the occurrence of a small hit may be suggested (notice) to the player by the display of the effect image. I am supposed to.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), it is possible to display a plurality of target images Y substantially at the center of the display screen 7a with the start of the small hit variation. The target image Y is displayed according to the number of game balls that can enter the second special winning opening 35 in one small hit game, and in this embodiment, it is approximately 2 per one small hit game. Since three game balls are designed (gauge configuration) to be able to enter the second special winning opening 35, three target images Y are displayed corresponding to this. The display of the target image Y is based on the fluctuation effect pattern in the effect mode D (effect symbol game effect), and the variable effect pattern including the display of the target image Y in S4505 (small for effect mode D). When the hit variation effect pattern) is selected (set), the target image Y is displayed in executing the variation effect. By displaying the target image Y in this way, the player can infer that the result of the variable display is a small hit. Therefore, the target image Y can be said to be a notice effect image that gives a notice of the occurrence of a small hit. The display of the target image Y may be included in the notice effect pattern set in S4506 described above, instead of being included in the change effect pattern.

  Then, when the small hit variation (variable display of the effect design 8) is stopped and the small hit mode (such as "355") is displayed, the small hit game is started, and the second big prize is opened in the small hit game. When a game ball enters the mouth 35, an effect display (also referred to as "destruction effect") showing that the target image Y is destroyed for each entry is performed (see FIG. 59 (b)). The destruction effect is performed based on that the sub-control unit 90 receives the second special winning opening ball entering command transmitted from the main control unit 80 based on the detection of the game ball by the second special winning opening sensor 35a. And corresponds to the small hitting game production (S4407, S4408). In the present embodiment, the destruction effect represents that the target image Y is destroyed by the missile attack from the fighter (main image X). Further, similarly to the effect mode C, the addition display of the prize ball count image C1 based on the entrance into the second special winning opening 35 is also performed.

  The effect from the start of such a small hit variation to the small hit game is the basic effect associated with the occurrence of the small hit in the effect mode D. It is assumed that an effect based on the effect hold information stored in S4402, that is, a so-called "hold ahead read effect" is performed. The holding prefetching effect (also referred to as "small hitting prefetching effect") related to this small hit is realized by the small hitting prefetching effect processing (S5000) shown in FIG. That is, the sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91) performs the small hit prefetch production process (S5000) shown in FIG. 60 when starting the variable display (variable production) of the production symbol 8 in the production mode D. Specifically, when setting the variation effect pattern (S4505) in the variation effect start process (S4402), the small hit prefetching effect process (S5000) shown in FIG. 60 is performed.

  In the small hit prefetching effect process (S5000), first, it is determined whether or not the specific period flag is OFF (S5001). Although the details will be described later, the specific period flag is a flag that can be set to ON in S5006 described later when a predetermined specific period start condition is satisfied during the game in the effect mode D (state C), and the specific period flag is specified. During the period, a special effect will be given to the small hit. If it is determined in S5001 that the specific period flag is ON (NO in S5001), this process ends without performing the processes in S5002 and thereafter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the specific period flag is OFF (not in the specific period) (YES in S5001), as a hold of the currently stored second special symbol (second special symbol hold), the second special symbol hit or not It is determined whether or not a hold (also referred to as "small hit hold") is stored that results in a small hit (S5002). This determination is performed by referring to the effect holding information (preliminary determination result or the like) stored in S4402 described above, that is, the stored content of the effect holding information storage area (acquired information storage means) of the sub-control board 90. The presence / absence of a small hit hold is determined, including the second special figure hold corresponding to the variable display (also referred to as “the relevant change”) of the effect design 8 to be started (S5002). Note that holding a small hit is also referred to as "specific acquisition information".

  When it is determined in S5002 that the small hit hold (specific acquisition information) is not stored (NO in S5002), this processing is terminated without performing the processing of S5003 and thereafter, and the small hit hold (specific acquisition information) is stored. When it is determined that it is (YES in S5002), it is determined whether or not a small hit occurs continuously three times or more as a result of the variation display including the variation (variation display to be started from now) (S5003). That is, it is determined whether or not three or more small hit holdings are continuously stored, including the second special figure holding corresponding to the variation (S5003). This determination can also be made by referring to the effect holding information (stored contents of the effect holding information storage area) stored in S4402 described above.

  If it is determined in S5003 that three or more small hit holdings have not been stored in succession (NO in S5003), this process ends without performing the processes in S5004 and thereafter. In this case, the small hit prefetch effect (small hit continuous notice) based on the small hit prefetch effect process (S5000) is not started. However, when the change is a small hit change corresponding to the small hit hold, as described above, the change effect pattern including the display of the target image Y is set as the change effect pattern related to the change, In the variation (small hit variation), a variation effect accompanied by displaying a plurality of (three in this example) target images Y is performed (see FIG. 59 (a)). That is, three target images Y may be displayed as an effect (announcement of the change) that suggests the occurrence of a small hit in the change.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S5003 that three or more small hit holdings are continuously stored (YES in S5003), it is determined whether or not to start the specific period (S5004). Here, the specific period refers to a period during which a special effect is performed as an effect related to the small hit. In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the small hit game is continuously played three times or more, that is, it is determined that the small hit is derived as a result of each of three or more continuous variable displays. If (YES in S5003), the specific period can be started (executable). The sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91) performs a starting lottery of a specific period (a type of random number lottery for production determination) as a determination as to whether or not to start the specific period. If it is won (YES in S5004), the processing of S5005 to S5007 when starting the specific period is supposed to be performed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the two conditions of (1) three or more small hit holdings are stored in succession and (2) winning the starting lottery of the specific period are satisfied, the specific period is satisfied. Is started. That is, these two conditions (1) and (2) are the conditions for starting the specific period.

  When it is determined in S5004 that the specific period starts (YES in S5004), the specific period counter is set (S5005), the specific period flag is turned ON (S5006), and the small hit prefetch effect pattern A is set (S5007). . On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific period is not started (NO in S5004), the small hit prefetching effect pattern B is set without setting the specific period counter or the like (S5008). Here, the specific period counter is a counter for determining the end of the specific period, and in S5005, a value corresponding to the number of small hits held determined in S5003 is set. In this embodiment, "3" or "4" is set (S5005). After the specific period counter is set in S5005, the value of the specific period counter is decremented by 1 each time the variation display (small hit variation) is stopped (ended). Further, the specific period flag is a flag indicating that it is during the specific period, and is mainly used at the start of the variation effect (S4404, S5001, etc.) or when the second special figure suspension occurs (special figure 2 start incoming ball command reception). ) Is a flag that is referred to when the effect holding information is stored (S4402). The specific period flag is turned on in S5006 and then turned off when the value of the specific period counter becomes zero.

  In this embodiment, three or more small hit holdings are continuously stored (YES in S5003), and when the specific period is not started (NO in S5004), the small hit prefetch effect pattern B is set. However, it may be configured to determine whether or not to set the small hit prefetching effect pattern B, and set the effect pattern B in the case of a positive determination. This makes it possible to provide a case where the small hit prefetch effect is executed and a case where the small hit prefetch effect is not executed when three or more small hit holdings are continuously stored, so that the effect can be diversified. Become.

  When the small hit pre-reading effect pattern (A or B) is set in S5007 or S5008, a variable effect start command for starting the small hit pre-reading effect based on the set effect pattern together with the effect design game effect is given to the image control board 100. The small hit prefetching effect is started together with the effect design game effect on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 by this. At this time, when the specific period is started and the effect based on the small hit prefetching effect pattern A is performed, as shown in FIG. 61, with the start of the variable display of the effect symbol 8 (the first small hit change). , The main image X (see FIG. 56 (b)) is hidden, and the characters "Sequential GET Shiro !!" are displayed on the display screen 7a (see FIG. 61 (a)).

  After that, with the display of the first small hit mode (“355” or the like) due to the stop of the variable display, the specific period display area T (which displays the prize ball count image C2 indicating the number of won prize balls during the specific period. The second display portion) appears on the left side of the display screen 7a (see FIG. 61 (b)). The prize ball count image C2 displayed in the specific period display area T is composed of an image (numerical image) capable of displaying a three-digit number of “000” to “999” and a character image of “pt”. Then, every time a game ball enters the second big winning opening 35 in the small hit game executed with the display of the small hit mode, the number of prize balls paid out for the one entered ball The award ball number image S indicating (10 in this embodiment) is displayed on the right side of the specific period display area T (see FIG. 61C), and the award ball number indicated by the award ball number image S is It is additionally displayed on the prize ball count image C2 (the number of acquired prize balls) in the specific period display area T (see FIG. 61 (d)). Also, during the specific period, when a game ball enters not only the second big winning opening 35 but also the third starting opening 26, a prize ball to be paid out for each ball (each one is entered) The award ball number image S indicating the number (one in the present embodiment) is displayed on the display screen 7a (see FIG. 61C), and the award ball number image indicated by the award ball number image S indicates the award ball count image. It is additionally displayed on C2 (the number of winning prize balls) (see FIG. 61 (d)). As a result, during the specific period, the award ball number image S and the award ball count image C2 are easily displayed, and it is possible to enhance the effect of these ball entry effects. The effect of additionally displaying the number of acquired prize balls (acquired profit amount) indicated by the prize ball count image C2 is also referred to as “second profit effect”.

  The display of the award ball number image S and the addition display of the award ball count image C2 are transmitted from the main control unit 80 based on the detection of the game sphere by the third starting port sensor 26a and the second special winning port sensor 35a. This is performed based on that the sub-control unit 90 receives a ball command (special figure 2 start ball entry command, second big winning opening ball entry command) (S4407, S4408). Since the ball entering the third starting opening 26 can occur during a small hitting game, the display of the number of prize balls image S based on the entering the third starting opening 26 and the addition of the prize ball count image C2. The display can be executed, for example, as an effect during variable display between the previous small hit game and the subsequent small hit game. Further, during the specific period, the addition display of the prize ball count image C1 displayed in the lower right portion of the screen (first display portion) is not performed. This indicates the number of award balls acquired during a specific period (during the period of a small hit condominium) in which the small hit game is continuously performed three times or more, in distinction from the number of award balls acquired during the small hit game during a period other than the specific period. This is because.

  The display of the prize ball number image S and the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 as described above are all of the small hit holdings stored at the start of the specific period (three or four small hit holdings in this embodiment). ) Is carried out until the small hit variation and the small hit game are completed. Then, when the small hit variation corresponding to all the small hit holdings and the small hit game are completed, the specific period ends, and based on the end, the specific period display area T displayed until then is erased from the screen. In addition, the prize ball count image C2 is enlarged and displayed on the screen (see FIG. 61 (e)), and the number of acquired prize balls indicated by the prize ball count image C2 is displayed in the lower right part of the screen (first display portion). The effect display that is added to (added to) the number of won prize balls shown by the prize ball count image C1 displayed in FIG. According to the effect based on the small hit prefetching effect pattern A, the effect form (first profit effect, second profit effect) is changed by changing the display mode of the number of won prize balls (earned profit amount). It is possible to enhance the effect. The mode of effect display based on the small hit prefetching effect pattern A displayed on the display screen 7a (display position, size, shape, etc. of the character image, the specific period display area T, the number of prize balls image S, etc.) is shown in FIG. For example, the specific period display area T is horizontally displayed near the upper left portion on the display screen 7a, and the prize ball number image S is displayed below the specific period display area T. It is possible to adopt various display modes such as

  On the other hand, when the specific period is not started (NO in S5004) and the effect (predetermined effect) based on the small hit prefetching effect pattern B is performed, along with the start of the variable display (small hit change) of the effect symbol 8, A plurality of the above-mentioned target images Y (see FIG. 59A) are displayed on the display screen 7a. The target image Y displayed in this case is the second big winning hole in the small hit game of the number of times corresponding to the number of small hits held (3 or 4) stored at the time when the variable display is started. It is displayed according to the number of game balls that can enter 35. As described above, in the present embodiment, since three target images Y are displayed for one small hit game (see FIG. 59 (a)), the effect based on the small hit prefetch effect pattern B (predetermined effect). Then, 9 or 12 target images Y are displayed. That is, the number of displayed target images Y (effect mode of predetermined effect) varies depending on the stored number of small hits. Due to the display of the target symbol Y, the result of the variable display continuously performed a plurality of times (three or four times in this example) including the variable display is a small hit (specific display result). It is possible to suggest to the player that the consecutive hits). After this, each time a game ball enters the second big winning opening 35 while the small hit game is played for the number of times corresponding to the small hit holding number at the start of the effect based on the small hit prefetching effect pattern B. The destruction effect of the target image Y (see FIG. 59 (b)) is performed.

  The effect (predetermined effect) based on the small hit prefetching effect pattern B is not limited to the display of the target image Y or the destruction effect of the target image Y as in the present embodiment. For example, an image such as a number or a level meter that directly indicates the stored number of small hits held is displayed on the display screen, and the display mode of the number or the level meter is used to enter the second special winning opening 35. A predetermined character image is displayed while the effect of updating based on the effect and the small hit variation based on the small hit hold are performed, and the display mode of the character image (movement of the character, etc.) to the second special winning opening 35. It is possible to make various effects such as effects that change based on the entering of the ball as the predetermined effects. Further, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect patterns of a predetermined effect) corresponding to the small hit prefetch effect pattern B, and to select and set any one of them. This makes it possible to diversify the small hit prefetch effect.

  As described above, in the effect mode D (state C), while the effect display by the main image X is mainly performed (see FIG. 56 (b)), a small hit frequently occurs, so that the player enters the second special winning opening 35. Since effects based on (first profit effect, second profit effect) can also be executed with high frequency, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the effect related to the small hit and improve the interest of the game. In particular, in a situation where there are a plurality of small hitting reservations (“3” or more in the present embodiment), when the specific period is started and the specific period display area T is displayed as a kind of small hit prefetching effect, Until all the small hits are held and the specific period ends, the prize ball number image S and the prize ball count image C2 are additionally displayed (second profit effect). Therefore, the prize ball number image S is displayed and It is possible to secure an opportunity to execute the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 and increase the certainty of the display. Then, after the end of the specific period, the number of won prize balls (the number of won prize balls during the particular period) indicated by the prize ball count image C2 is originally displayed in the lower right part of the screen (first display portion). It is added (summed) to the number of winning prize balls of the ball count image C1. Further, in a situation where there are a plurality of small hitting reservations (“3” or more in this embodiment), even if the specific period is not started, a plurality of target images Y are displayed on the display screen 7a as a kind of small hitting prefetch effect. The effect (small hit prefetch effect pattern B, predetermined effect) is performed, and the effect mode (the number of display of the target image Y in this embodiment) varies depending on the number of small hits held. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect produced by the effect (small hit prefetch effect, first profit effect, second profit effect, etc.) that is executed in association with the small hit, and to enhance the interest of the game in the effect mode D (state C). Become.

  Next, description will be made on the contents of the effect display (effect mode) in the case where the reach variation (off or big hit) or the reach tilt out variation is performed in the effect mode D. As described above, in the effect mode D, the main image X is displayed substantially in the center of the display screen 7a, and the effect design 8 is reduced and displayed in the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the effect design game effect (of the effect pattern 8) is displayed. (Variable display, etc.) is performed (see FIGS. 56B and 58A). In addition, when the reach variation (off or big hit) is performed, and when the reach out-of-range variation is performed, the main image X is hidden after the variation display of the effect design 8 is started, and is displayed on the upper right of the screen until then. The effect symbol 8 that was being displayed is largely displayed in the approximate center of the screen and is displayed in a vertical scrolling manner. After that, the effect display of the effect symbol 8 is the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) or fourth. Stop in a stop mode (left / right symbol simultaneous stop → middle symbol) (see FIG. 58 (c) and thereafter). At this time, if the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same symbol (number) (see FIG. 58 (e)), the reach is established, and thereafter, a predetermined result is displayed before the result of the variable display is displayed (derived display). Reach production is performed. The reach effect is executed based on the variation effect pattern set in S4505 described above, and the content of the reach effect differs depending on the type of the variation effect pattern.

  Here, the reach effect executed in the effect mode D (also referred to as “third effect”) is the same as the second effect executed as the reach effect in the effect mode C described above, in which an ally character and an enemy character are combined. It is a battle effect (confrontation effect) in which a battle scene is drawn, and a plurality of third effect patterns are provided in which the content of the battle effect is different. That is, as shown in FIG. 64B, the third effect (battle effect) in the effect mode D is roughly divided into a pattern in which the teammate character wins (also referred to as “third effect pattern A”) and an ally. There are three patterns: a pattern in which the character is defeated (also referred to as "third effect pattern B") and a pattern in which the confrontation (battle) is completed without winning or losing (also referred to as "third effect pattern C"). Then, for each of these three patterns, there are a plurality of patterns that define the type of enemy character, the type of character that makes a preemptive attack, the success or failure of the attack, and the like. It should be noted that the third effect pattern A (ally victory pattern) is also referred to as a "first variable effect pattern", and the third effect pattern B (ally loss pattern) is also referred to as a "second variable effect pattern". The effect pattern C (a winning / losing undecided pattern) is also referred to as a “third variation effect pattern”. In addition, in the third effect (battle effect) pattern, the attack content of each ally character and the enemy character (for example, the type of weapon used in the attack, the type of technique, etc.) is a pattern with a strong attack power (" A strong pattern) and a pattern with a weak attack power (also called a "weak pattern") are provided. In the present embodiment, among the patterns in which an ally character attacks an enemy character, a strong pattern (also referred to as “ally strong pattern”) can be won by the ally character compared to a weak pattern (also referred to as “ally weak pattern”). It is supposed to indicate that it is highly effective. Further, among the patterns in which the enemy character attacks the ally character, the strong pattern (also referred to as “enemy strong pattern”) is more likely to be won by the enemy character than the weak pattern (also referred to as “enemy weak pattern”). It indicates that. These strong and weak patterns enable the player to be informed of the development and results of the battle production.

  Further, when the reach variation or the reach out-of-range variation is performed in the production mode D, an image (also referred to as a “preliminary image”) that gives a notice (suggestion) of the content of the subsequent game that may be executed through the reach production in the variation. Is displayed (see FIG. 65). The display of the notice image is a kind of notice effect (preliminary notice pattern) set in S4506 described above in accordance with the variation effect pattern in the effect mode D set in S4505 described above, and a notice set in advance is provided. When the notice effect (the notice effect pattern for the effect mode D) based on the notice image is selected (set) on the basis of the effect determination table (not shown), the predetermined display is performed when the change display is performed. Notice image is displayed. There are various timings for starting the display of the notice image, such as when the variable display is started, when the reach is established, after the reach is established, and the like, and these timings are also set in accordance with the form of the notice production (the notice production pattern). However, the display start timing of the notice image due to the reach out-of-range variation is determined from the start of the variation display until it is determined that the reach is not established (reach not established) (for example, until the second stop symbol is stopped). . This is because the reach is not established by the out-of-reach fluctuation. In the present embodiment, the display start timing of the notice image due to the out-of-reach fluctuation is the start time of the variable display. By displaying the notice image, the player can infer the development of the game that can be executed after the fluctuation. Note that the display of the notice image may not be based on the notice effect pattern, but may be included in the variation effect pattern set in S4505 described above. Further, the notice image can be said to be "information about the game after the end of the variable display", and the effect of displaying the notice image is also referred to as "information display effect".

  In the present embodiment, when the notice image is displayed, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), the notice image display area U is located at the lower part of the display screen 7a, and the notice image is displayed in the area. In FIG. 65 (a), the left symbol (effect symbol 8L) and the right symbol (effect symbol 8R) stopped due to the establishment of the reach are respectively displayed small on the left and right upper portions of the display screen 7a, and the reach effect is mainly in the center of the screen. The state (reach state) performed is shown. As a notice image that can be displayed in the notice image display area U, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), a first notice image that gives a notice (suggestion) of occurrence (execution) of a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) 501 (first information), a second notice image 502 (second information) that gives a notice (suggestion) of continuation of the effect mode D (state C), and an notice (suggestion) of a transition to the effect mode E (state B). It has three types of advance notice images including a third advance notice image 503 (third information). At the start of displaying the preview image (start of the information display effect), at least two types of the preview images can be displayed in the preview image display area U. By displaying such a preview image, it is possible for the player to make an alternative guess regarding the subsequent game development, so that it is possible to attract the interest of the player to the content (type) of the displayed preview image. Become. Further, since the contents suggested by the first to third notice images are contents based on the game in the effect mode D (state C) as a reference (base), by displaying such notice images, the effect mode D (state C) is displayed. ) Will give a notice (indication) of the subsequent game development based on the game in (1), and the interest of the game in the production mode D (state C) can be enhanced. It should be noted that the form (display position, size, shape, etc.) of the notice image display area U is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 65, and for example, the horizontally long notice image display area U shown in FIG. Or a vertically long notice image display area U is provided at the left or right part of the display screen 7a, and the first to third notice images are vertically (vertically) provided in the notice image display area U. It is possible to adopt various modes such as displaying them side by side.

  The first notice image 501 is configured to include the characters “big hit”, the second notice image 502 is configured to include the character “continuation”, and the third notice image 503 is configured to include the character “mode E”. To be done. In the present embodiment, when the notice image is displayed, two types of notice images are displayed. As a display pattern (a notice image combination), that is, a notice effect pattern, the “first notice image 501” shown in FIG. And a second display pattern for displaying the “second notice image 502” and a second display pattern for displaying the “second notice image 502 and the third notice image 503” shown in FIG. 65 (d). .. In addition to this, a display pattern for displaying the “first notice image 501 and the third notice image 503” may be provided. In addition, in the present embodiment, three types of notice images are provided. However, for example, when the 15R third big jackpot and the 4R fourth big jackpot are separately (discriminately) given, or there are more types of big jackpots. More types of advance notice images may be provided, such as providing advance notice images according to the type of jackpot. Even in this case, at least two types of notice images may be displayed in the notice image display area U, and the display pattern of the notice image (notice effect pattern) can be arbitrarily determined.

  Which of the first notice image 501, the second notice image 502, and the third notice image 503 is to be displayed is determined by the type of notice effect (notice effect pattern) set in S4506 described above. For example, when the reach out-of-range variation is performed (reach out-of-range variation effect pattern), the first notice image 501 and the second notice image 502 (first display pattern) or the second notice image 502 from the start of the variation. The third notice image 503 (second display pattern) is displayed in the notice image display area U (upper part of the display screen 7a), and this display is due to the stop of the left symbol (effect symbol 8L) and the right symbol (effect symbol 8R). It is performed until the reach failure is confirmed. Then, after the start of the display of the notice image (after the start of the information display effect), when the reach failure is confirmed, the notice image displayed until then is erased from the screen. In this case, the variable display of the effect design 8 is ended (stopped) without the reach effect being performed thereafter.

  Here, the determination (selection) of the display pattern in the case of displaying the notice image is performed by the display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66 which is referred to when setting the notice effect by the display of the notice image in S4506, and It is supposed to be performed based on the display pattern determining random number which takes a value in the range of 99. The feasibility of each display pattern is determined according to the respective selection rates of the first display pattern and the second display pattern determined by this display pattern determination table. As shown in FIG. 66, in the reach out-of-range fluctuation, both the display of the notice image according to the first display pattern and the display of the notice image according to the second display pattern can be executed. The latter has a higher possibility of execution than the above (the selection rate of the first display pattern is “30%”, the selection rate of the second display pattern is “70%”).

  On the other hand, when the reach variation is performed (reach variation effect pattern), the variation is a big hit variation based on the result of the second special symbol winning / discarding determination being a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit). In the case where the effect design 8 is displayed as a doublet (big hit mode) as a result of the variable display (big hit variation effect pattern), the third effect is displayed before the big hit mode is displayed (before the derived display). The third effect (variation effect based on the first variation effect pattern) based on the pattern A (friend victory pattern) is performed. In addition, after the variation display is stopped (after the big-hit mode is displayed), the big-hit game is played, and after that, the game in the state C can be continued. Therefore, the third effect pattern A (first variable effect pattern) is It is a pattern in which an ally character wins. In the variation (big hit variation), a notice image is displayed (information display effect) at a predetermined time during the variation before the third effect (battle effect) is started, for example, when the variation starts or when the reach is established. Is started. In this case, the advance notice image can be displayed based on the first display pattern or the second display pattern. When the display of the first notice image 501 and the second notice image 502 is started based on the first display pattern (see FIG. 65 (c)), the player at least as a result of the change (battle effect). It can be inferred that there is no possibility that a 2R jackpot will occur, that is, there is a possibility that the game in state C will end (a possibility that the subsequent game development will be disadvantageous). On the other hand, when the display of the second notice image 502 and the third notice image 503 is started based on the second display pattern (see FIG. 65 (d)), the player has a 2R big hit at that time. It is impossible to exclude the possibility (the possibility that the later game development may be disadvantageous).

  Here, in the present embodiment, the display of the notice image when the third effect (battle effect that is a ally victory) based on the third effect pattern A is executed due to the jackpot change is displayed first rather than the second display pattern. The display pattern is more likely to be executed (see FIG. 66). Therefore, the display of the advance notice image according to the first display pattern is larger than the display of the advance notice image according to the second display pattern. It can be said that the expectation (big hit reliability) of executing the game (15R big hit game or 4R big hit game) is high. Further, when the battle effect based on the third effect pattern A is executed based on the “ally strong pattern” due to the jackpot variation, the possibility of displaying the notice image by the first display pattern is made higher. (See FIG. 66).

  Further, when the third effect based on the third effect pattern A is the “ally strong pattern” and the display of the notice image is the first display pattern, a predetermined time (for example, a ally character and an enemy) after the notice image is displayed. Assuming that the first notice image 501 (big hit) may be displayed in an enlarged manner in the notice image display area U at a predetermined time before the end of the battle, such as at the start of the character's showdown or during the showdown. (See FIG. 65 (e)). This enlarged display of the notice image is based on the notice effect pattern set in S4506 described above, and when the notice effect pattern including the enlarged display of the notice image is selected (set), the enlarged display of the notice image is displayed. Done. Further, along with the enlarged display of the first notice image 501, the second notice image 502 (continuation) is displayed smaller than at the beginning of display, or is erased (erased in this embodiment). That is, the display mode of the preview image being displayed in the preview image display area U changes. As a result, the third effect (battle effect) to be executed is based on the ally strong pattern, and a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) may occur as a result of the variation (battle effect). It is possible to increase the sense of expectation and security of the player by suggesting to the player that the value is high. When the first notice image 501 is enlarged and the second notice image 502 is erased, the display may be used to give notice of confirmation of the big hit (big hit confirmation notification). In addition, after the first notice image 501 is enlarged and the second notice image 502 is reduced and displayed, the first notice image 501 is further enlarged, the second notice image 502 is deleted, and the like. The display mode of the notice image being displayed on U may be changed stepwise. In addition, as a change in the display mode of the notice image, for example, the "big hit" character of the first notice image 501 may be changed to "super big hit" suggesting the 15R big hit, or the "big hit" character and its background color may be changed. It is also possible to change the characters, colors, shapes, etc. that make up the notice image, such as changing to the color of. Furthermore, the change of characters and the like and the change of the display size of the present embodiment (enlarged display, reduced display, etc.) may be combined to be executable.

  On the other hand, when the third effect based on the third effect pattern A is executed based on a pattern other than the “ally strong pattern”, that is, a “ally weak pattern”, an “enemy strong pattern”, or an “enemy weak pattern” In any of these three patterns, the first notice image 501 is not enlarged and displayed, and the display mode of the notice image does not change. The display of the notice image in the notice image display area U is performed until the third effect (battle effect) or the end of the variable display. Even when the third effect based on the third effect pattern A is other than the "ally strong pattern", the first notice image 501 can be enlarged and displayed, and in this case, the "ally strong pattern". The possibility of performing the enlarged display (change of display mode) may be made lower than that of (1). This makes it easier to understand the relationship between the battle effect pattern (strong pattern, weak pattern) and the enlarged display of the advance notice image (change in display mode).

  Further, when the reach variation is performed (reach variation effect pattern), when the variation is performed as an outlier variation (reach outlier variation) based on the result of the second special symbol winning / disapproving determination being out, ie, , When the effect design 8 is displayed as reach variation (displacement mode) as a result of the variable display (reach deviation variation effect pattern), before the disengagement mode is displayed (before derivation display), the third effect pattern C (win or lose) The third effect (variation effect based on the third variation effect pattern) based on the settlement pattern) is performed. In addition, since the game in the state C is continued after the variation display is stopped (after the disengagement mode is displayed), the third production pattern C (third variation production pattern) does not have a winning or losing battle (battle). It is a pattern to finish. Then, in the variation (out-of-reach variation), for example, at the start of the variation or when the reach is established, the first notice image 501 and the first notice image 501 and the The display of the second notice image 502 (first display pattern) or the display of the second notice image 502 and the third notice image 503 (second display pattern) is started. At this time, when the notice image is displayed according to the first display pattern, the player is unlikely to have at least a 2R jackpot as a result of the change (battle effect) (end possibility of state C). Can be guessed. On the other hand, when the notice image is displayed according to the second display pattern, the player is likely to have at least a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) as a result of the change (battle effect). You can guess that there isn't. In addition, in the present embodiment, the display of the notice image when the third effect (battle effect of undecided battle) based on the third effect pattern C is executed by the out-of-reach variation is the first display pattern and the second display. The selectivity of each pattern is set to 50% so that the practicability is the same for each pattern (see FIG. 66).

  Here, the display of the notice image according to the first display pattern (big hit or continuation) is also a display indicating that the game in the state C can be executed thereafter, so the game in the state C ends. It does not give the player any anxiety that it will end up. On the other hand, the display of the notice image according to the second display pattern (continuation or effect mode E) cannot exclude the possibility that the 2R jackpot will occur, and it becomes impossible to continue the game in the state C. Since it also includes sex, it gives the player such anxiety. The display of the notice image according to the first display pattern or the second display pattern in such a reach-out variation is performed at a predetermined time after the display is started (for example, a predetermined time during a match between an ally character and an enemy character or at the end of the match). Only the second notice image 502 (continuation) is displayed, and the other notice images (the first notice image 501 or the third notice image 503) are erased (display mode change of notice image). Thereby, the player recognizes that the big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) does not occur as a result of the variation (battle effect) and is out, and the game in the state C is continued. You can As described above, the display of the final notice image in which only the second preliminary notice image 502 (continuation) finally remains in the preliminary notice image display area U is performed until the end of the variable display.

  It should be noted that in the out-of-reach variation, the big hit mode is not displayed as a result of the variation display (a big hit is not generated). The enlarged display of 501 is not performed. Further, in the out-of-reach variation, after displaying the notice image according to the first display pattern or the second display pattern, the second notice image 502 of the notice images may be enlarged and displayed. The second notice image 502 is a notice image for giving (indicating) the continuation of the state C in which small hits frequently occur, and the enlarged display of the second notice image 502 does not give the player the benefit of the big hit occurrence. Since the advance notification (indication) is made that the possibility of continuation of the state C is high, it is possible to alleviate the player's anxiety that the game in the state C ends.

  Further, when the reach variation is performed (reach variation effect pattern), the variation is based on that the result of the second special symbol winning / deciding determination is 2R big hit (any of 2R fifth to eighth big hit). When it is performed as a 2R jackpot variation, that is, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed as reach reach (2R jackpot variation rendering pattern) as a result of the variation display (2R jackpot variation rendering pattern), before the 2R jackpot variation display (before derived display ), The third effect (variable effect based on the second variable effect pattern) based on the third effect pattern B (allied defeat pattern) is performed. In addition, after the fluctuation display is stopped (after the 2R big hit mode is displayed), the 2R big hit game is played, the game state after the big hit game is the state B (high base state), and the game in the state C is continued. Since it becomes impossible, the third effect pattern B (second variable effect pattern) is a pattern in which the teammate character is defeated. Then, in the variation (2R jackpot variation), for example, when the variation is started or when the reach is established, at the predetermined time during the variation before the third effect (battle effect) is started, the second notice image 502 and the second notice image 502 are displayed. 3 The display of the notice image 503 (second display pattern) is started. By displaying the second notice image 502 and the third notice image 503, the player estimates that there is a possibility of a 2R jackpot (end of state C) as a result of the change (battle effect). be able to. In addition, in the present embodiment, the display of the notice image when the third effect (battle effect of ally defeat) based on the third effect pattern B is executed in the 2R jackpot variation is not executed in the first display pattern, Only the second display pattern is used for execution (see FIG. 66). This is, although the notice image is displayed by the first display pattern (the notice effect suggesting a relatively advantageous game development), the game in the state C ends due to the occurrence of the 2R big hit (relative This is because the game development is disadvantageous to the player). By doing so, the player can feel a sense of discomfort or distrust when displaying the notice image and the third effect (battle effect), and when displaying the notice image (information display effect) and the third effect (battle effect). It is possible to avoid feeling.

  After that, the display of the notice image according to the second display pattern in the fluctuation (2R jackpot fluctuation) is performed at a predetermined time after the start of the display (for example, during a competition between an ally character and an enemy character or at a completion time of the competition). Only the third notice image 503 (effect mode E) is displayed, and the second notice image 502 (continuation) is deleted (change in display mode of notice image). As a result, the player can recognize that two big hits (any of the 2R fifth to eighth big hits) have occurred as a result of the fluctuation (battle effect), and the game in the state C has come to an end. it can. In this way, the display of the preview image that only the third preview image 503 (effect mode E) finally remains in the preview image display area U is performed until the end of the variable display.

  In this way, in the production mode D, when a reach variation or an out-of-reach variation is performed, based on the variation production pattern related to the variation, the content (game development) of the game that can be executed after the variation is announced (indicated). The notice image to be displayed is displayed on the display screen 7a (the notice image display area U). In this notice image, a first notice image 501 (first information) that gives a notice (suggestion) of the occurrence of a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) that triggers the setting of state C (high-accuracy low base state). And, a second notice image 502 (second information) that gives a notice (suggestion) of the continuation of state C, and a notice (suggestion) that the game state will shift to state B upon completion of the 2R jackpot (game end in state C) ) The third notice image 503 (third information), and the display patterns of these notice images include a first display pattern composed of a combination of the first notice image 501 and the second notice image 502, and a second notice image. There is a second display pattern including a combination of 502 and the third notice image 503. The display of the notice image based on the first display pattern or the second display pattern is performed from the start of the fluctuation in the reach outlier fluctuation before the reach failure is established, and in the reach fluctuation the third effect from the start of the fluctuation. By starting at a predetermined time before the result of (battle effect) becomes clear (before the battle effect or the end of the fluctuation), the fluctuation continues to the state C (an advantageous state where small hits frequently occur) (win) , It is possible to obtain a staging effect that excites the player's expectation and anxiety such as whether the player is undecided or finished (defeated). When the reach variation is a big hit variation, depending on the mode of the third effect (battle effect) in the variation (strong ally pattern, weak ally pattern, etc.), the third effect is executed after the notice image is displayed. At a predetermined time in the middle (during battle production), the display mode of the notice image displayed at that time can change. Due to such a change in the display mode, attracting the interest of the player to the notice image being displayed, and suggesting that there is a high possibility that the subsequent game development will be advantageous to the player, may be suggested at an early stage before the end of the fluctuation, It is possible to increase the player's expectation and security.

[Mode selection period]
Next, the mode selection period for selecting the effect mode of state C will be described. As described above, when the game state is controlled to the state C (high-accuracy low base state), one of the effect modes C and D is set, and the selected effect mode is set. Is configured to be performed based on the operation of the first effect button 63a by the player. The selection of the effect mode can be executed at a predetermined time when a big hit that triggers the setting of the state C (high-accuracy low base state) occurs. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, the "4R first big hit", "15R third big hit" and "4R fourth big hit" are big hits that are the triggers for setting the state C (high-accuracy low base state) (see FIG. 6). ), It becomes possible to select the effect modes C and D at a predetermined time when these big hits occur.

  In this embodiment, at a predetermined time after the big hit game is started, a mode selection period in which the effect mode after the big hit game is finished can be selected from the two effect modes C and D is generated. The generation timing (occurrence timing) of this mode selection period is different between "4R first big hit" and "4R fourth big hit", and "15R third big hit". The sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91) performs control processing relating to production mode selection such as generation of a mode selection period and selection of a production mode based on operation of the first production button 63a during the mode selection period. It is executed under control, and specifically, it is executed by the hit game effect process (S4408) of the received command analysis process (S4302).

  First, in the state A (left-handed game), when the big hit symbol (specific display result) is displayed and "4R first big hit" occurs, that is, when "4R first big hit" occurs as the first hit, the state B or C (right hitting game) big hit pattern (specific display result) is displayed and "4R 4th big hit" occurs, that is, mode selection when "4R 4th big hit" occurs as a condominium The period occurs in the ending period after all rounds of the 4R jackpot game are over. Here, as described above, when the final round of the big hit game ends (when the value of the round counter becomes “0”), the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) sets the big hit ending command and (S2116), the jackpot ending period is started (S2117). When the sub control unit 90 receives the ending command, the sub control unit side can recognize the start of the ending period. The ending command is, for example, “4R ending command” for “4R first big hit” and “4R fourth big hit”, and “15R ending command” for “15R third big hit”. It is provided according to the type of jackpot. The ending period is executed until a predetermined ending time elapses. In this embodiment, the ending time for the 4R big hit game is "15 seconds", and the ending time for the 15R big hit game is "5". Seconds ". It should be noted that the ending time shown in the present embodiment is an example, and can be arbitrarily set in consideration of the specifications of the gaming machine, playability, and the like.

  Upon receiving the ending command, the sub control unit 90 transmits an ending effect command corresponding to the received ending command to the image control board 100 (image control unit). In response to this, the ending effect is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When this ending effect is triggered by the 4R ending command, as shown in FIG. 62, the mode selection screen 700 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a as the ending effect. The mode selection screen is mainly composed of an image 701 (hereinafter also referred to as “mode C selection image”) indicating “effect mode C” and an image 702 (hereinafter also referred to as “mode D selection image”) indicating “effect mode D”. And are arranged side by side, and an image 703 (hereinafter also referred to as “button image”) imitating the first effect button 63a is arranged between the left and right. The display of the mode selection screen 700 informs the player that the mode selection period is in progress.

  When the player operates the first effect button 63a while the mode selection screen 700 is being displayed, the image 701 (mode C selected image) and the image 702 (mode D selected image) to be selected alternate with each operation. It is assumed that the image highlighted and displayed (that is, the effect mode) is displayed as being selected (see FIGS. 62A and 62B). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the selected mode selection image (effect mode) is displayed (emphasized) in a thick frame and the unselected mode selection image (effect mode) is displayed darkly (dark display). There is. Therefore, the player operates the first effect button 63a so that the mode selection image corresponding to the desired effect mode is highlighted, thereby selecting the effect mode of the state C (high-accuracy low base state) thereafter. can do.

  Further, in this embodiment, the mode selection period after the end of 4R is 10 seconds from the start of the ending period. Then, when 12 seconds have passed from the start of the mode selection period (start of the ending period), the countdown display indicating the remaining period until the end of the mode selection period is started on the upper side of the button image (FIG. 62 (c)). reference). The countdown display is performed in a mode in which the number image 704 is subtracted by 1 in the order of “3” → “2” → “1” and displayed. This countdown display informs the player that the mode selection period is about to end (notification before the end of the selection period). When the numerical image 704 becomes "1" in the countdown display, the countdown display ends shortly thereafter, and the mode selection period ends. At this time, the highlighted mode selection image (enclosed by a thick frame) is displayed as the selected effect mode (selection result). After that, an effect display (not shown) showing the transition to the state C is executed on the display screen 7a until the ending period ends. The effect mode (C or D) selected in this way is set as the effect mode of the state C that is subsequently executed (started), and thereafter, in the state C, the set (selected) effect mode (C or D). The source design game production is executed.

  On the other hand, when the big hit symbol (specific display result) is displayed in the state B or C (right-handed game) and "15R third big hit" occurs, that is, "15R third big hit" occurs as a per condominium In the case of doing, the mode selection period occurs in a predetermined round game during the 15R big hit game. Specifically, in the present embodiment, of the 1R to 15R, the period from the start of 14R to the middle of 15R is the mode selection period. Here, as described above, with the start of the round game, the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) sets a round start command (S2106), and the sub control unit 90 receives the round start. , It becomes possible to recognize the start of the round game on the sub-control unit side. The round start command is provided according to the number of rounds to be started (executed) such as “1R start command”, “2R start command” ... “15R start command”.

  When the sub-control unit 90 receives a "13R start command" designating the start of the round game immediately before the 14R (predetermined round game) which is the start round of the mode selection period, that is, the start of 13R, it responds to this. The round effect command to be performed is transmitted to the image control board 100 (image control unit). In response to this, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the round effect of 13R is executed. In the 13R round effect, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), the 13R round effect screen 800 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a and a part of the round effect screen 800 (in the present embodiment, the upper left side of the screen). A notification screen 810 indicating that the mode can be selected from the next round (14R) is displayed. The display of the notification screen 810 notifies the player that the mode selection period will start from the next round (14R in the present embodiment) (pre-selection period start notification, first notification means). In this way, after notifying in advance that the production mode can be selected (the mode selection period is started), the production mode in a new mode is reached such that the production mode selection period is generated (started). Selection is possible. As a result, it becomes possible to attract the player's interest in the effect mode selection.

  The round effect screen 800 also displays a predetermined round effect image (not shown), an image showing the current number of rounds, a prize ball count image C1 and the like. The prize ball count image C1 displayed here is added and displayed for each winning ball based on the entrance into the first special winning opening 30 during the big hit game (the reception of the first special winning opening entrance command). It is designed such that it is continuously displayed even in the state C after the big hit game is over, and then the first big hit in the big win game and the entry to the second big winning opening 35 in the small hit game. The addition is also displayed by entering the winning hole 30. Therefore, the award ball count image C1 displays the total number of award balls acquired during the consecutive holiday period from the first hit.

  Next, when the sub control unit 90 receives the “14R start command” that specifies the start of 14R, which is the start round of the mode selection period, the sub control unit 90 transmits the corresponding round effect command to the image control board 100 (image control unit). To do. In response to this, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the 14R round effect is executed. In the 14R round effect, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the 14R round effect screen 800 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a, and a part of the round effect screen 800 (the upper left side of the screen in this embodiment). A mode selection screen 900 is displayed on. This mode selection screen 900 has the same screen configuration as the mode selection screen 700 (see FIG. 62) in the mode selection period that occurs during the ending period of the 4R big hit game described above, and it is assumed that the mode selection screen 700 is reduced. There is. The display of the mode selection screen 900 informs the player that the mode selection period is in progress (notification during the selection period, second notification means). The effect mode selection on the mode selection screen 900 (switching the mode selection images up and down) is the same as the effect mode selection on the mode selection screen 700 described above with reference to FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (b). Therefore, detailed description of the effect mode selection in 14R is omitted. The screen configuration (display contents) of the mode selection screen 900 may be different from a part or all of the mode selection screen 700 displayed in the mode selection period during the ending period, and the mode is displayed on the entire display screen 7a. The selection screen 900 may be displayed.

  Next, when the sub-control unit 90 receives the “15R start command” that specifies the start of 15R following the start round (14R) of the mode selection period, the sub-control unit 90 sends the corresponding round effect command to the image control board 100 (image control unit). ) To. In response to this, a round effect of 15R is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the 15R round effect, as shown in FIG. 63 (c), a 15R round effect screen 800 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a and a part of the round effect screen 800 (the upper left side of the screen in this embodiment). A mode selection screen 900 is displayed on. At this time, on the mode selection screen 900, the countdown display is started when 15R starts. This countdown display is similar to the countdown display on the mode selection screen 700 during the ending period described above (see FIG. 62 (c)), and the numerical image is “3” → “2” → as the 15R progresses. It decreases to "1" (see FIG. 63 (d)). This countdown display informs the player that the mode selection period is about to end (notification before end of selection period, third notifying means). Then, the countdown display ends in the middle of 15R (when about 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of 15R), and the mode selection period ends.

  After this, until the end of 15R, the mode selection screen 900 is displayed on the display screen 7a together with the round effect screen 800, and the selected effect mode (selection result) is displayed on the mode selection screen 900. The selected effect mode (C or D) is set as the effect mode of the state C to be subsequently executed (started), and thereafter, in the state C, the set (selected) effect mode (C or D). The source design game production is executed.

  In this way, when a big hit that triggers the setting of the state C (high-accuracy low base state) occurs, the effect mode of the state C is changed to "effect mode C" at a predetermined time after the big hit game related to the big hit is started. , Or “effect mode D”, a mode selection period occurs. Regarding the generation timing (start timing) of this mode selection period, the 4R first big hit occurs in state A (left hitting game) and the 15R third big hit occurs in state B or C (right hitting game). The time of occurrence differs depending on the case. That is, the occurrence timing of the mode selection period is different between the first hit in the state A in which the left-handed game is played and the consecutive win in the state B or C in the game-played the right-handed game. It has become a thing. In addition, if you take another way of thinking, the type of jackpot game to be executed (type of jackpot), that is, 4R jackpot game (4R 1 jackpot, 4R 4 jackpot) or 15R jackpot game (15R 3 jackpot) The generation timing of the mode selection period varies depending on whether or not For this reason, depending on the game state when the big hit occurs (whether it is the first hit or the long game) and the type of big hit game to be executed, the time when the production mode can be selected is different, or the production mode selection is different. It is possible to change the mode.

  Particularly, in the present embodiment, when the 4R jackpot game is executed, a mode selection period occurs during the ending period after all round games have ended, and the mode selection screen 700 is displayed (see FIG. 62). On the other hand, when the 15R big hit game is executed, a mode selection period occurs (starts) in the middle of 14R to 15R (final R) during the big hit game, but in 13R before the occurrence of the mode selection period (before start) , A notification screen 810 for notifying that the mode selection period will be started from the next round is displayed (notification before start of selection period, see FIG. 63 (a)), and in 14R, the mode selection period occurs and the mode selection screen 900 is displayed. It is displayed (notification during selection period, see FIG. 63 (b)), and countdown display is executed in 15R (notification before end of selection period, see FIGS. 63 (c) and (d)). In this way, in the 4R jackpot game, the player is given the opportunity to select the effect mode after the completion of all round games, and in the 15R jackpot game, the player is given the opportunity to select the effect mode by the end of all the round games. Given to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect mode selection from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to give the player a different impression regarding the effect mode selection.

  In addition, the ending period of the 4R jackpot, which has a relatively small number of rounds, is longer than the ending period of the 15R jackpot, which has a relatively large number of rounds, and the mode selection period is generated using the ending period of the 4R jackpot. ing. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the negative image for the player that the number of rounds (the number of winning balls) is small compared to the 15R big hit and the execution period of the big hit game is short as much as possible, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the enjoyment of the game. Become.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the 15R jackpot game is executed, the player is prompted to select the effect mode after the jackpot game over a plurality of round games (13R to 15R in the present embodiment). There is. Therefore, it becomes possible to attract the player's interest in the effect mode selection. In addition, the mode selection period is from the start of 14R (predetermined round game) to the middle of 15R (next round game), and the notification related to the effect mode selection (the selection period from the start to the end of the mode selection period) Notification before the start, notification during the selection period, notification before the end of the selection period) are performed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from losing the opportunity to select the effect mode without noticing the occurrence of the mode selection period.

[Arrangement of Image Display Device]
Next, an arrangement mode of the image display device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes the three image display devices (display means) of the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72. Of the three image display devices, the first image display device 7 has a display screen 7a (display surface) of which faces the opening provided in the approximate center of the game board 2 (game area 3). It is provided on the back side (see FIG. 3). On the other hand, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are provided on the left and right sides of the front surface of the front frame 51 (see FIG. 1).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 1, in the vertically long rectangular front frame 51, the front surface (game board surface) of the game board 2 (the game board surface) is in front of the game machine (front side) with the front frame 51 closed (closed state). ) Is provided with a viewing window 51a (viewing portion). The viewing window 51a is made of a transparent glass plate, and has a vertically long, substantially elliptical shape that occupies most of the upper part of the hitting ball supply plate 61. Through the visual recognition window 51a (glass plate), the player displays the game area 3 formed on the surface of the game board 2 and the display screen 7a (display contents) of the first image display device 7 arranged on the back side of the game board 2. ) Etc. can be visually recognized. Further, as described above, the front frame 51 is rotatably supported by the frame hinges 56, 56 provided at the upper and lower corners on one end side (the left side in this embodiment) of the front frame 51. There is.

  In the present embodiment, the second image display device 71 is provided on the front surface of such a front frame 51 and on the upper side of one end (left side) on which the front frame 51 is pivotally supported. The third image display device 72 is provided on the other end (right side) opposite to the end (left side) (see FIG. 1). Each of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 is a liquid crystal display device that is smaller than the first image display device 7 (see FIG. 3), and has a quadrangular display that is nearly square. It has screens 71a and 72a. Further, in the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, the respective display screens 71a and 72a maintain a substantially straight state (posture) in the vertical direction (vertical direction) when viewed from the front, while the front frame 51 is maintained. It is configured to be inclined to the side of the viewing window 51a (inside the front frame 51). As shown in FIG. 1, the degree of inclination of the display screens 71a and 72a is such that the angle between the display screens 71a and 72a and the window surface of the viewing window 51a (or the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7) is an obtuse angle. It is set to a predetermined angle (for example, 130 degrees to 150 degrees), so that the player playing the pachinko gaming machine 1 can visually recognize the display screens 71a and 72a from the front (front side) of the gaming machine. ing. In this way, the display screens 71a and 72a are inclined to the side of the viewing window 51a (inside the front frame 51), so that the game area 3 and the first image display device 7 can be viewed through the viewing window 51a. For a player who plays a game while visually recognizing the display screen 7a (display contents), it is possible to visually recognize the display screens 71a and 72a (display contents) of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 with a small movement of the line of sight. Is possible. The display contents of the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 will be described later.

  The first image display device 7 provided on the back side of the game board 2 (inside the game area 3) is also called "board side display means" or "first display means", and the front frame 51 (of the game area 3) The second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 provided on the outer side) are also referred to as “frame side display means” and “second display means”, and the second image display device 71 is referred to as “first frame”. It is also called "side display means" or "left display means", and the third image display device 72 is also called "second frame side display means" or "right display means".

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 (first frame side display means) of the frame side display means is provided on the upper front surface at one side end (left side) of the front frame 51. The second image display device hinge 75 rotatably supports the front frame 51. On the other hand, the third image display device 72 (second frame side display means) is not pivotally supported like the second image display device 71, but is on the other end side (right side) of the front frame 51. ) Is fixed to the upper front part. As described above, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are configured (arranged) such that the display screens 71a and 72a are inclined toward the viewing window 51a (inside the front frame 51), respectively. However, since the second image display device 71 is horizontally rotatable about the axis of the second image display device hinge 75, the second image display device 71 is in an inclined state (initial state, first state). State) and a state (tilted state, second state) further inclined from that state to the visual recognition window 51a side. That is, the angle formed between the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 and the window surface of the viewing window 51a (or the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7) is a predetermined first angle (for example, 130 degrees to 150 degrees). The initial state (first state) and the tilted state (second state) in which a predetermined second angle (for example, 80 degrees to 100 degrees) whose angle is smaller than the first angle can be adopted. Has become. On the other hand, since the third image display device 72 is fixed to the front frame 51, the angle between the display screen 72a and the window surface of the viewing window 51a (or the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7) is predetermined. The angle is fixed (for example, 130 degrees to 150 degrees).

  The reason why the second image display device 71 is rotatable and can be in the initial state (first state) and the tilted state (second state) is as follows. That is, it is possible to lend a game ball (ball lending) to the island facility where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game hall based on the value information recorded in a recording medium (game value storage medium) such as a prepaid card. A card unit 135 (a game ball lending device) is provided, and the card unit 135 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control board 110) are connected (see FIG. 5). The card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is usually adjacent to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, the card unit 135 is located on one end side (left side) on which the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are pivotally supported. For this reason. When the front frame 51 is opened or both the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are opened, the front frame 51 is a shaft of the frame hinges 56, 56 on one side end (left side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1. With the center as the center, the card unit 135 is horizontally rotated to the card unit 135 side (left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1). At this time, when a frame side display means or a frame side effect means such as a frame side movable accessory is provided on one end side (the left side front surface of the front frame 51) on which the front frame 51 and the like are pivotally supported, The frame-side effect means may contact the card unit 135 and hinder the opening of the front frame 51 and the like (rotation toward the card unit 135 side). In this respect, if the second image display device 71 can be tilted (rotated) to the side of the viewing window 51a, which is the side facing the card unit 135, as in the present embodiment, the front frame 51 is formed. When the second image display device 71 is tilted to the viewing window 51a side (in a tilted state) when the second image display device 71 is opened, the presence of the second image display device 71 hinders the opening of the front frame 51 and the like. Therefore, the front frame 51 and the like can be opened without any trouble.

  Further, in a state where both the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are closed, that is, in a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be played, the operation unit of the card unit 135 is operated to record on the card (recording medium). It is assumed that the operation position and the card take-out position are near the second image display device 71 when the take-out of the ball is carried out based on the held ball information or the card (recording medium) is taken out from the card unit 135. Also, by tilting the second image display device 71 to the viewing window 51a side (in a tilted state), it is possible to smoothly perform the operation, the taking-out, and the like. In consideration of the opening of the front frame 51 and the like and the operation on the card unit 135, the second image display device 71 can be rotated. As a result, the second image display device 71 (first frame side display means, left display means) is provided as frame side display means on one end side (left side of the front frame 51) on which the front frame 51 is pivotally supported. It is possible to adopt such a novel arrangement mode, and it is possible to make the appearance of the gaming machine feel a novelty that has not existed in the past. In particular, as in the present embodiment, not only the one side end (the left side of the front frame 51) on which the front frame 51 is pivotally supported, but also the other side end (the front frame 51 of the front frame 51 that faces the one side end). By providing the third image display device 72 (second frame side display means, right display means) as the frame side display means also on the right side), the front frame 51 forming the front (front surface) of the gaming machine is novel. The novelty of the external appearance of the gaming machine becomes even more remarkable. Such novelty in appearance is effective for motivating the player to play.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a mechanism (maintaining means) for maintaining the second image display device 71, which can be in the initial state and the tilted state, in the initial state. Specifically, as a means for maintaining the second image display device 71 in the initial state, a torsion coil spring (not shown) that urges the second image display device 71 to one side end (left end side) of the front frame 51. Are provided in the vicinity of the second image display device hinge 75. The second image display device 71 is kept in the initial state by the biasing force of the torsion coil spring (biasing means). Therefore, in order to bring the second image display device 71 into the tilted state, for example, the back surface side (the surface opposite to the display screen 71a) of the second image display device 71 is manually pushed to twist the coil spring (biasing means). The second image display device 71 can be tilted (rotated) toward the viewing window 51a by applying a force against the urging force of the second image display device 71. Further, when the front frame 51 and the like are opened and the back surface of the second image display device 71 comes into contact with the card unit 135, the force applied to the back surface of the second image display device 71 by the contact causes the second image display device 71 to move. It will be tilted (rotated) to the visual recognition window 51a side. On the other hand, when the force that tilts (rotates) the second image display device 71 toward the viewing window 51a (the force that opposes the urging force of the torsion coil spring) is released, the second image display device 71 causes the torsion coil spring ( The original initial state is restored by the urging force of the urging means). This allows the second image display device 71 to be kept in the initial state under the condition that the front frame 51 is in the closed state, so that the display screen 71a (display content) of the second image display device 71 can be visually recognized well. It is possible to secure the sex. Further, the second image display device 71 tilted to the viewing window 51a side automatically returns to the initial state when the tilting force is released, so that the second image display is performed without any special operation or treatment. The device 71 can be reliably brought to the initial state.

[Display contents of image display device]
Next, the display contents of the three image display devices included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. In the image display device (the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72) included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, an effect symbol game effect (variation effect), a notice effect (indication effect), Various effect displays such as big hit game effects and demonstration effects can be executed (effect display execution means). In the following, the display content of the image display device will be described focusing on the effect design game effect (variation effect) and the notice effect (indication effect) when the game state is controlled to the state A (low accurate low base state). ..

[Display contents of production design game production]
First, the display contents of the image display device when the effect symbol game effect is executed in the state A will be described. The effect display related to the effect symbol game effect is mainly executed on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a) (see FIG. 54). As described above, in the state A, “A” or “B” is set as the effect mode, and therefore the background image corresponding to the effect mode A or B is displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7. The display of the effect design 8 is displayed on the display screen 7a under the background display. Then, depending on the fluctuating effect pattern and the notice effect pattern set at the time of starting the change display of the effect symbol 8, the effect display relating to the reach effect, the notice effect, etc. is added to the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a). It may also be executed in the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a). That is, in the case where the effect display is mainly performed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7 and the effect display is supplementarily performed on the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 or the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72. There is. From this, the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a) is also referred to as "main display device" or "main liquid crystal", and the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display device 72 ( The display screen 72a) is also referred to as "sub display device" or "sub liquid crystal".

  In this embodiment, as the variation mode (variation production pattern) of the effect design 8, a variation mode without reach (normal variation) and a variation mode with reach (reach variation) are provided, and as the type of reach production, Normal reach effect and super reach effect (also called "SP reach") are provided. Therefore, when the reach variation is executed, one of the reach effects is set based on the variation pattern designation command and the variation effect pattern determination table in S4505 described above. Then, when the super reach effect is executed, the possibility of a big hit (big hit reliability) is set higher than when the normal reach effect is executed.

  When the sub-control unit 90 receives the variation start command from the main control unit 80 (S4403) based on such variation effect specifications, the first image display is performed based on the variation effect pattern set in response to this. The variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started on the display screen 7a of the device 7 (variable display starting means). If the variation display is normal variation without reach, reach variation due to normal reach production (also referred to as "normal reach variation"), and reach variation due to super reach production (also referred to as "SP reach variation"), which will be described later. In the case of the SP reach variation excluding the SP reach variation, the variation display and the effect display such as the reach related to the variation are displayed on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a from the start to the end as shown in FIG. 67. ) And not the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a). However, as will be described later, the notice effect (indication effect, suggestion display) related to the variation display and the subsequent variation display (variation display based on the suspension of special drawing) is the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display device. It may be performed on one or both of the image display devices 72 (display screen 72a). Note that FIG. 67 shows an example of normal fluctuation without reach. Further, the effect display related to the reach effect (normal reach change, SP reach change) is also referred to as “specific display”.

  Here, a predetermined background image (predetermined display) is usually displayed on the respective display screens 71a and 72a of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 (predetermined display execution means). This background image is different from the background image (not shown) displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7 on which the variable display of the effect design 8 is performed, and the background common to the effect modes A and B. It is an image and is a unique (dedicated) background image (predetermined display) in the case where the effect display relating to the change effect, the notice effect, etc. is not performed on the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72. Therefore, the background image displayed on the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal) is also referred to as "main background" or "main background", and the background image displayed on the display screens 71a and 72a is referred to as "sub-background". Also called "sub-background". Note that, in FIG. 67 and the like, background images (sub-backgrounds, sub-backgrounds) displayed on the display screens 71a and 72a are shaded.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67, when a sub-background is displayed on each of the display screens 71a, 72a of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, one of the display screens 71a (left The display means) displays a variation number image 710 (predetermined display) showing the number of symbol variations. This fluctuation number image 710 shows the number of times of execution (variation number) of the variable display of the special symbol (and effect symbol) performed until the next big hit occurs, and the variable display of the special symbol is performed once. Each time (in the present embodiment, every time the fluctuation display ends), the fluctuation count indicated by the fluctuation count image 710 is incremented by 1 and displayed. The variation count image 710 is displayed under the control of the sub control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91) based on a variation stop command from the main control unit 80 (predetermined display execution means). On the other hand, an effect mode image 720 (predetermined display) showing the current effect mode is displayed on the display screen 72a (right display means) on which the sub-background is displayed. This effect mode image 720 shows the name of the effect mode indicating the type of effect mode currently set in the state A (for example, the XX mode corresponding to the effect mode A, the ΔΔ mode corresponding to the effect mode B, etc.). The display is performed based on the mode status set under the control of the sub control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91) (predetermined display execution means).

  On the other hand, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 to be executed is the specific SP reach variation of the SP reach variation, as the execution mode of the variation display (effect display) related to the specific SP reach variation, in the present embodiment, There are roughly two modes. Specifically, one of the modes is in the reach state from the beginning of the variation display related to the specific SP reach variation, and the reach effect (specific SP reach effect) related to the variation is displayed on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a). ), The second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a) are executed (also referred to as "first mode"). In another aspect, at the beginning of the variation display related to the specific SP reach variation, the effect display related to the variation is executed only on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a), and after the reach is established, the effect content is changed. When developing to SP reach, in addition to the first image display device 7 the effect display related to the variation, any of the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a) This is a mode in which one or both are executed (also referred to as “second mode”).

  In the present embodiment, if the ally character and the enemy character confront each other in the contents (production mode) of the specific SP reach production executed in the state A (production mode A or B), if the ally character wins, it is a big hit, and the player loses. If the content is off. Such a specific SP reach effect is also referred to as "specific effect". As this specific effect, the first specific effect (effect display based on the first mode) executed based on the first mode (three-screen display from the beginning) and the second mode (initially single-screen display) are executed. The second specific effect that is subsequently executed based on the two-screen display or the three-screen display). Further, as the second specific effect (effect display based on the second aspect), the variable display (specific SP reach effect) including the effect (specific SP reach effect) is initially executed (started) on the first image display device 7. “Second specific effect A” that is also executed by the second image display device 71 later, and “Second specific effect A” that is initially executed (started) by the first image display device 7 and then executed by the third image display device 72. “Specific effect B” and “second specific effect C” that is initially executed (started) on the first image display device 7 and then executed on the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72. ing. For this reason, when the specific SP reach variation is executed, any one of the specific effects (first specific effect, second specific effect A to C) causes the variation pattern designation command and the variation in S4505 described above. It is set based on the effect pattern determination table, and the set specific effect is executed (specific display execution means, effect display execution means).

  Next, the display content of the image display device when the specific effect is executed will be described. First, when the first specific effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 68, a state in which reach is established on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7 from the beginning of the variable display (effect display) (reach state) ) Is displayed, and an effect display indicating the start of the confrontation between the ally character and the enemy character is performed. At this time, the left symbol (effect symbol 8L) and the right symbol (effect symbol 8R) in the reach state are respectively displayed small on the left and right upper portions of the display screen 7a, and the effect display indicating the start of the competition on the entire display screen 7a. Is performed (see the middle part of FIG. 68). Further, at this time, on the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71, instead of the sub-background and the number-of-changes image 710, a sub-character on the teammate character side involved in the battle (battle) related to the specific effect (“teammate”). Sub character ") is displayed, and instead of the sub background and the effect mode image 720, the sub character on the enemy character side involved in the battle (battle) related to the specific effect is displayed on the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72. A character (also called “enemy sub-character”) is displayed (see the middle part of FIG. 68). Then, along with the progress of the variable display, a confrontation scene between the ally character and the enemy character is displayed on the display screen 7a, and in the course of the progress, "the ally sub character displayed on the display screen 71a supports the ally character. "Demonstration display", "Demonstration display in which the enemy sub-character displayed on the display screen 72a supports the enemy character", "Allied sub-character displayed on the display screen 71a moves to the display screen 7a and joins the confrontation (allied character side) "Production display", "effect display in which the enemy sub-character displayed on the display screen 72a moves to the display screen 7a, and participates in the confrontation (on the enemy character side)" and the like are performed.

  After that, in the first specific effect, as shown in FIG. 69, an effect display (allied victory scene) in which the ally character side (ally character, ally sub character) wins over the enemy character side (enemy character, enemy sub character) is performed. Then, the change is a big hit change, and the effect design 8 is displayed (stop display) in a doublet pattern (a big hit mode) (see FIG. 69 (a)). On the other hand, when an effect display (allied defeat scene) in which an ally character side (ally character, ally sub character) is defeated by an enemy character side (enemy character or enemy sub character) is performed, the variation is out of alignment (out of reach variation). That is, the effect design 8 is displayed (stopped display) in a reach-spaced pattern (disengagement mode) (see FIG. 69 (b)).

  Here, in the present embodiment, the effect display of the settlement scene (allied victory scene or ally defeated scene) indicating the end of the confrontation in the specified effect (first specified effect, second specified effect A to C) is mainly displayed on the display screen 7a. (Main LCD) is executed. Then, in the case of the first specific effect and the second specific effect C described later, when the ally winning scene is displayed on the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal), as shown in FIG. 69 (a), the display screen 71a on the left side is displayed. Is displayed on the right side of the display screen 72a, and the character of "Victory" is displayed on the display screens of the two sub-liquid crystals. On the other hand, in the case of the first specific effect and the second specific effect C described later, when the ally defeat scene is displayed on the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal), as shown in FIG. 69 (b), the left display screen 71a is displayed. Is displayed on the right side of the display screen 72a, and the character of "defeat" is displayed on the two sub liquid crystal display screens.

  Further, when the second specific effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 70, the variable display (effect display) is started on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7, and when the reach is established thereafter, the The left design (production design 8L) and the right design (production design 8R) stopped (temporarily stopped) due to the establishment of the reach are displayed small on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a, respectively, and as a friend character on substantially the entire display screen 7a. The effect display showing the start of the confrontation of the enemy character is performed, and subsequently, the effect display showing the confrontation scene of the ally character and the enemy character is started. During this period, on the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 and the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72, the sub-background and the like are displayed without any special effect display related to the variable display (described later). Except when the notice production is done). Up to this point, the display contents are common to the second specific effects A to C.

  When the second specific effect to be executed is the second specific effect A (display screen 7a → display screens 7a and 71a), effect display of the confrontation scene is started on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 71. Shortly thereafter, on the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71, the display area of the sub-background displayed on the display screen 71a is gradually reduced, and the silhouette of the ally sub-character is displayed in the decreasing area. The production display (appearing production of friendly sub-character) is displayed. When the ally sub-characters are displayed on the entire display screen 71a through this ally sub-character appearance effect, the confrontation scene between the ally characters and the enemy characters is displayed on the display screen 7a as the variable display progresses. , "Production display in which the ally sub-character displayed on the display screen 71a supports the ally character" or "Production display in which the ally sub-character displayed on the display screen 71a is moved to the display screen 7a and added to the confrontation (allied character side)" And so on. In such a second specific effect A, when an effect display in which the ally character side (ally character, ally sub character) wins the enemy character (ally victory scene) is performed, the variation is a jackpot variation, and the effect pattern 8 Is displayed (stopped display) as a doublet (big hit mode) (see the display screen 7a of FIG. 69 (a)). On the other hand, when an effect display (ally defeated scene) in which an ally character side (ally character, ally sub character) is defeated by an enemy character is performed, the variation is an outlier variation (reach outlier variation), and the effect symbol 8 Is displayed (stopped) in a reach crossover pattern (disengagement mode) (see the display screen 7a in FIG. 69 (b)).

  Although the teammate sub-character appearance effect is started on the display screen 71a, the teammate sub-character appearance effect is completed before the teammate subcharacter is displayed on the entire display screen 71a, and the entire display area of the display screen 71a is the sub-background. It is also possible to provide a pattern for returning to the display of. In other words, it is also possible to provide a Gase ally sub character appearance effect. In this case, the SP reach effect is that the confrontation scene is displayed on the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal) without using the display screens 71a and 72a (sub liquid crystal).

  When the second specific effect to be executed is the second specific effect B (display screen 7a → display screens 7a and 72a), the effect display of the confrontation scene is started on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. Shortly thereafter, on the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72, the display area of the sub-background displayed on the entire display screen 72a gradually decreases, and in the decreasing area, the silhouette of the enemy sub-character appears. Is displayed (the enemy sub-character appearance production). When the enemy sub-characters are displayed on the entire display screen 72a through this enemy sub-character appearance effect, the confrontation scene between the ally character and the enemy characters is displayed on the display screen 7a as the variable display progresses. "Demonstration display in which the enemy sub-character displayed on the display screen 72a supports the enemy character", "Demonstration display in which the enemy sub-character displayed on the display screen 72a moves to the display screen 7a and joins the confrontation (enemy character side)", etc. Is done. In such a second specific effect B, when the effect display in which the ally character wins the enemy character side (enemy character, enemy sub-character) (ally victory scene) is performed, the change is a big hit change, and the effect pattern 8 Is displayed (stopped display) as a doublet (big hit mode) (see the display screen 7a of FIG. 69 (a)). On the other hand, when an effect display (ally defeated scene) in which an ally character is defeated by the enemy character side (enemy character, enemy sub-character) is performed, the change becomes an outlier change (reach outlier change), and the effect design 8 Is displayed (stopped) in a reach crossover pattern (disengagement mode) (see the display screen 7a in FIG. 69 (b)).

  Although the enemy sub-character appearance effect is started on the display screen 72a, the enemy sub-character appearance effect is terminated before the enemy sub-character appearance is displayed on the entire display screen 72a, and the entire display area of the display screen 72a is the sub-background. It is also possible to provide a pattern for returning to the display of. In other words, it is also possible to provide an enemy sub character appearance effect. In this case, the SP reach effect is that the confrontation scene is displayed on the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal) without using the display screens 71a and 72a (sub liquid crystal).

  Further, when the second specific effect to be executed is the second specific effect C (display screen 7a → display screens 7a, 71a, 72a), as shown in FIG. 73, the effect display of the confrontation scene is displayed on the display screen 7a. Shortly after the start, in the display screens 71a, 72a of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, the display area of the sub-background displayed on the whole of each display screen gradually decreases, In the decreasing area, effect display (sub-character appearance effect) in which the silhouette of the friend sub-character (display screen 71a) and the silhouette of the enemy sub-character (display screen 72a) appear is performed. When the sub-characters are displayed on the entire display screen 72a through this sub-character appearance production, the confrontation scene between the ally character and the enemy character is displayed on the display screen 7a as the variable display progresses, and the "display screen" is displayed. 71a is an effect display in which an ally sub-character supports an ally character "," an effect display in which an enemy sub-character displayed in a display screen 72a supports an enemy character "," an ally sub-character displayed in a display screen 71a is a display screen " 7a, effect display to be added to the confrontation (allied character side) "," effect display in which the enemy sub-character displayed on the display screen 72a is moved to the display screen 7a and added to the confrontation (enemy character side) ", etc. . In such a second specific effect C, when an ally character side (ally character, ally sub character) wins the enemy character side (enemy character, enemy sub character) (ally victory scene), the variation is a big hit variation. Therefore, the effect design 8 is displayed (stopped display) in a double eye (big hit mode) (see the display screen 7a of FIG. 69 (a)). On the other hand, when an effect display (allied defeat scene) in which an ally character side (ally character, ally sub character) is defeated by an enemy character side (enemy character or enemy sub character) is performed, the variation is out of alignment (out of reach variation). That is, the effect design 8 is displayed (stopped display) in a reach-spaced pattern (disengagement mode) (see the display screen 7a in FIG. 69 (b)).

  Although the sub-character appearance effects have been started on the display screens 71a and 72a, the sub-character appearance effects in which the ally sub-characters and the enemy sub-characters are displayed on the entire display screens are completed, and the display areas of the display screens 71a and 72a are ended. It is also possible to provide a pattern in which the entire display returns to the sub-background display. That is, it is possible to provide a sub character appearance effect of Gase. In this case, the SP reach effect is that the confrontation scene is displayed on the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal) without using the display screens 71a and 72a (sub liquid crystal).

  Regarding the jackpot reliability of the second specific effects A to C, the jackpot reliability of the second specific effect A (allied character, ally sub character VS enemy character) is the highest in view of the fact that the ally character wins a big hit. Are set as follows, and in the following, the jackpot reliability is set in the order of the second specific effect C (friend character, ally sub character VS enemy character, enemy sub character), and the second specific effect B (ally character VS enemy character, enemy sub character). It is set to be low.

  As mentioned above, the effect design game effect that can be executed in the state A is illustrated, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also provided with various other variable effects (fluctuation effect patterns) with different display contents (effect modes). It goes without saying that this can also be executed using one or more display devices of the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72. Especially, regarding the effect display (specific display) related to the reach effect, in addition to the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71 and the third image display, like the first specific effect and the second specific effect described above. By providing a mode in which one or both of the devices 72 are used, it is possible to further enhance the effect of production.

  As described above, when the effect design game effect (variation effect) is executed in the state A, the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the second image display device 7 (display screen 7a) are mainly used. The effect display in which one or both of the three-image display device 72 (display screen 72a) is added can be executed. Therefore, after the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started on the first image display device 7, with respect to the effect display related to the change, in addition to the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71 and the third image It is possible to bring the player's attention to the display device 72, and it is possible to display a wide range inside and outside the game area. As a result, it is possible to display an effect with a high impact, increase the variation of the effect display, and enhance the interest.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, when the variable display based on the specific SP reach variation is executed, that is, when the specific effects (first specific effect, second specific effect A to C) are executed, the variable display is performed. There is also a mode (first mode) in which the effect display is executed on the three image display devices from the beginning of the above, and the effect display is executed on the first image display device 7 at the beginning of the variable display, and then the second image is displayed. There is also a mode (second mode) in which the effect display is executed by one or both of the display device 71 and the third image display device 72. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution mode of the effect display related to the variable display from becoming uniform, and to enhance the interest in the case where the effect display related to the variable display is performed.

  Further, when the variable display including the second specific effect is executed, the variable display is initially started by the first image display device 7, and thereafter, the effect display that shows the confrontation scene between the ally character and the enemy character after the reach is established. Is started on the display screen 7a, the display area of the sub-background of one or both of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 is gradually reduced, and the reduced amount is displayed. The area is changing to a display area for sub character appearance production. That is, the effect of gradually expanding the display area of the effect display related to the change from the first image display device 7 to one or both of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 is executed. It is possible. As a result, it becomes possible to enhance the interest in the case where the variable display including the second specific effect is executed.

[Display contents of notice production]
Next, the display content of the image display device when the notice effect is executed in the state A (low accurate low base state) will be described. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, based on the effect holding information (preliminary determination result, etc.) stored in S4402, or the notice effect pattern set in S4506 (see FIG. 52), the notice effect It is possible to execute (indication production, suggestion display) (indication display execution means). In the present embodiment, in state A (low accurate low base state), as a notice effect that can be executed using the image display device (first image display device 7, second image display device 71, third image display device 72). , Has multiple types of notice production. Below, 5 types of 1st notice production to 5th notice production are demonstrated among those notice productions. In the notice effect described below, the notice effect (the notice of the variation) currently stored is stored as a notice effect (the notice of the variation) that suggests that the display result of the currently displayed change display (the change) may be a big hit (specific display result). There is a notice effect (holding prefetch notice) that suggests that the display result of the variable display executed based on the suspension of the special map is a big hit (specific display result).

  First, the first notice effect is executed on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a), and the first effect hold displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display section). It is a notice effect (also referred to as “effect pending notice”) in the display mode of 9a. The first notice effect (effect hold notice) is executed as a hold prefetch notice. State A is a low-probability low-base state, so normally, the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly performed. Correspondingly to this, in state A, the suspension advance notice is executed based on the result of the preliminary determination (S322) of the acquisition information (first special map suspension) acquired based on the entry into the first starting opening 20. It is possible. The control related to the execution of the first notice effect (effect notice) is performed by the sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91), and the preliminary determination result of the first special figure hold is the sub-control unit 90 (production control). It can be recognized on the sub-control side by the production microcomputer 91) referring to the effect holding information stored in S4402.

  As shown in FIG. 74 (a), in the present embodiment, the effect holding notice is given in the display color of the first effect holding 9a. Therefore, the display color of the first effect hold 9a is provided with the normal color corresponding to the case where the effect hold notice is not given and the notice color corresponding to the case where the effect hold notice is given. There is. The normal color is one type of "white", and the notice color is three types of "blue", "green" and "red". The sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91) determines whether or not to execute the production hold notice when the game ball enters the first starting opening 20 (the first special figure hold occurs). When the determination result indicating that it is to be executed is obtained, the effect suspension notice is executed. As a condition for executing the effect pending notice, for example, at least one first special figure hold is stored (special figure 1 hold ball number ≧ 1), and the first special figure hold stored at that time It is possible to determine that a predetermined execution lottery is performed and a lottery is won when the production suspension notice is not given. It should be noted that the execution condition of the effect pending notice is not limited to this, and for example, the condition that two or more of the first special figure reservations are stored, or even if the effect pending notice is given, further effect The hold notice may be executable.

  When executing the production suspension notice, the sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91) executes the display color (preliminary color) of the first production suspension 9a, that is, the production suspension notice execution pattern (first notice production pattern). ) Is determined. This determination is made on the basis of the effect-holding notice deciding table shown in FIG. 74 (b), which is a type of notice-leaving effect deciding table, and the effect-holding notice deciding random number which takes a value in the range of 0 to 99. The sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91) selects, based on the preliminary determination result (production hold information), the first special figure hold which is the target of the production hold notice, and the first special figure hold is "disengaged. It is identified as "hold 1", "off hold 2", "off hold 3", or "big hit hold", and the corresponding display color (first notice effect pattern) of the first effect hold 9a is specified. , The decision is made (selected) by referring to the effect pending notice decision table. Here, "outside hold 1" is the first special map hold in which normal fluctuation (outside) is performed, "outside hold 2" is the first special map hold in which normal reach fluctuation (outside) is performed, and "outside hold" "3" is the first special figure hold in which the SP reach variation (out) is performed, and "big hit hold" is the first special figure hold in which the big hit variation is performed. In the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability is set to be highest when the display color of the first effect suspension 9a is "red", and hereinafter, the jackpot reliability is set in the order of "green" and "blue". Is set to be low (see FIG. 74 (b)). In addition to the effect-holding color, the effect-holding notice can be given based on, for example, the shape (design) or size of the effect-holding, and each element such as color, shape, or size. It is also possible to carry out by the combination of. In addition, the execution timing of the effect pending notice is various timings such as when the game ball enters the first starting opening 20 (when the first special figure is held) or during the variable display of the effect pattern 8 on the display screen 7a. It is possible to

  The second notice effect is executed on the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a), and the notice effect according to the display mode of the number-of-variations image 710 displayed on the display screen 71a (also referred to as “number notice notice”). ). As described above, when the effect display such as the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed on the first image display device 7 and the sub-background is displayed on the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71, the display screen 71a is displayed. Displays the number-of-changes image 710 (see FIG. 67 and the like). The second notice effect (notice of the number of times display) uses the variation number image 710 (display of the number of variations), and regarding the variation display of the effect symbol 8 being executed on the first image display device 7, the variation display thereof. Is displayed as a big hit (the effect design 8 is displayed in a big hit manner), which is executed as a change notice that suggests that the possibility is higher than usual.

  The control related to the execution of the second notice effect (the notice of the number of times display) is performed by the sub-control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91). When the variable display of the effect symbol 8 (variable effect) is started, the second image is displayed. When the sub-background is displayed on the display device 71, it is determined whether or not to execute the number-of-times display notice by referring to the result of the determination regarding the variation display that starts and the variation mode (variation effect pattern). (Execution lottery, etc.) When executing the number-of-times display notice, by setting the second notice effect pattern (number-of-times display notice pattern) as the notice effect related to the variation display (S4506), the variation display of the effect symbol 8 on the display screen 7a. At the same time, it is possible to execute the number of times display notice on the display screen 71a. The number-of-times display notice is set so that the execution possibility is higher when the variation display that triggers the execution is an SP reach variation (out) or a big hit variation than when it is a normal variation (out). ing. In the present embodiment, the display color of the variation count image 710 is normally "white", and the display count is changed by changing the display color to "red". It should be noted that the form of the number of times display notice is not limited to the change of the display color of the variation number image 710, and may be, for example, the size of the number of times display, the method (arithmetic numerals, Chinese numerals, etc.), the position, or the like.

  The third notice effect is executed on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a) and the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a). It may be executed. As shown in FIG. 75, this third notice effect is a notice effect using a launch fireworks as a motif (also referred to as “fireworks notice”), and when the variable display of the effect pattern 8 is started on the display screen 7a, Along with this, fireworks are launched from the display screen 7a toward the display screen 71b, and the background of the display screen 71b becomes the background of the starry sky. The color of the fireworks suggests the jackpot reliability. In the present embodiment, four colors of "white", "blue", "green" and "red" are provided as the color of the fireworks, of which "red" has the highest jackpot reliability, and hereinafter, "green", The jackpot reliability is set to decrease in the order of “blue” and “white”.

  The control relating to the execution of the third notice production (fireworks notice) is performed by the sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91), but when it is executed as a hold prefetch notice, the above-mentioned first notice effect (production hold notice) ), It is possible to execute a fireworks notice in the same way. That is, when the variable display of the effect design 8 is started, the type of the first special figure hold that triggered the execution of the firework announcement is referred to by referring to the first special figure hold (effect hold information) stored at that time ( For example, by specifying (selection) the fireworks color as the third notice effect pattern (fireworks notice pattern) according to the specified type, the display can be performed Along with the variable display of the effect design 8 on the screen 7a, it is possible to execute the firework notice on the display screen 7a and the display screen 71a. In this case, the firework notice is executed each time the variable display is started until the notice subject reservation that triggered the execution of the fireworks notice (holding prefetch notice) is exhausted.

  In addition, when the fireworks announcement is executed as the variation announcement, when the variation display (variation production) of the effect design 8 is started, refer to the judgment result or variation mode (variation production pattern) of the starting variation display. Then, by determining (selecting) the color of the fireworks as the third notice effect pattern (fireworks notice pattern) (S4506), the display screen 7a and the display screen 71a are displayed together with the variable display of the effect design 8 on the display screen 7a. It is possible to execute fireworks notice. It should be noted that the determination (selection) of the third notice production pattern (fireworks notice pattern) can be performed by referring to a fireworks notice determination table (not shown), as described in the above-mentioned notice of production suspension, for example. .

  The fourth notice effect is executed on the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a) and may be executed as the change notice or as the hold prefetch notice. As shown in FIG. 76, the fourth notice effect is a notice effect (also referred to as “chance zone notice”) in which the characters of the “chance zone” and the background are displayed on the display screen 72a. When executing the zone notice), it is started along with the start of the variable display of the effect design 8 on the display screen 7a. In the present embodiment, there is one kind of presentation mode (notice production pattern) of the fourth notice production (chance zone notice) (character display of chance zone). However, it is of course possible to provide a plurality of modes such as the above-mentioned first notice effect (effect pending notice) and the third notice effect (fireworks notice).

  The control relating to the execution of the fourth notice production (chance zone notice) is performed by the sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91), but when it is executed as a hold prefetch notice, at least the variable display of the production symbol 8 is displayed. It is possible to execute a chance zone notice on the display screen 72a together with the variable display of the effect design 8 on the display screen 7a, provided that two or more first special figure reservations are stored when starting. Has become. In this case, the chance zone notice is continuously executed until the notice target hold that triggered the execution of the chance zone notice (holding prefetch notice) is exhausted. For example, three 1st special figure reservation is stored, when executing the chance zone notice for the 3rd 1st special figure reservation, the production design which is based on the 3rd 1st special figure reservation The characters "chance zone" continue to be displayed on the display screen 72a until the variable display 8 is executed. Further, when the chance zone notice is executed as the change notice, when the change display (change effect) of the effect design 8 is started, the fourth notice effect pattern (chance zone notice pattern) is set as the notice effect related to the change display. By setting (S4506), the variation display of the effect symbol 8 on the display screen 7a and the chance zone notice can be executed on the display screen 72a. The chance zone notice, in both the case of executing as a hold prefetch notice and the case of performing the change notice, is more important than the case where the first special figure hold or the change display, which is the execution opportunity, is the normal change (out). It is set so that the possibility of execution becomes higher in the case of SP reach fluctuation (out-of-range) or big hit fluctuation.

  The fifth notice effect is executed using all of the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a), the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a), and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a). Then, it is executed as a notice of the change accompanying the big hit change. In other words, it is a notice effect that confirms the big hit. In the present embodiment, as a mode (variable effect pattern) of the variable display of the effect symbol 8 that is performed as a big hit change, three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are flat eyes shortly after the start of the variable display of the effect symbol 8. Has a full-rotation effect that makes low-speed fluctuations in a state of being aligned with each other.

  The control relating to the execution of the fifth notice effect (notice of all rotations) is performed by the sub-control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91), and when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 (variation effect) is started, the variation is changed. In the case of a big hit variation and an effect mode including all-rotation effect, it is possible to execute the all-rotation notification by setting the fifth notice effect pattern (all-rotation notice pattern) (S4506). In this embodiment, the full-rotation effect is positioned as a so-called "premier effect", so that the possibility of executing the full-rotation notice and the full-rotation effect is extremely low.

  As shown in FIG. 77, the fifth notice effect (notice of all rotations) of the present embodiment is “all” on the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) with the start of the variable display of the effect symbol 8. The characters "turn" are displayed on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a) and the characters "roll" are displayed on the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a), respectively. A screen 7a (main liquid crystal) and three display screens 71a, 72a (sub liquid crystal) located on the left and right of the display screen 7a and outside the game area 3 for displaying the characters "full rotation" Has become. After a while from the execution of the notice of all rotations (display of the characters "all rotations"), one of the three display screens is displayed with one digit of the same number of the production design. Aspect) is displayed. That is, when viewed from the front, the left display screen 71a (left sub liquid crystal) has a left symbol (effect symbol 8L), the central display screen 7a (main liquid crystal) has a middle symbol (effect symbol 8C), and the right display screen 72a (right symbol). The right symbol (effect symbol 8R) is displayed on the liquid crystal) with the same number. This corresponds to the start of the full rotation effect. After that, with the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the three display screens aligned with each other, the screens are slowly scrolled from the top to the bottom of each screen ("111" to "999" in ascending order. Fluctuates slowly). After this scroll display (full rotation), any combination of "111" to "999" is stopped and displayed on each of the three display screens, and then the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are finally obtained. Is displayed (determined display) on the display screen 7a in a big hit mode.

  The above-described first to fifth notice effects may be executed individually, or a plurality of notice effects may be executed at the same time, provided that the image display devices used to execute the notice effects do not overlap. There are also things to do. As an aspect in which a plurality of notice effects are executed at the same time, for example, while the first notice effect (effect pending notice) is being executed on the first image display device 7, the second notice effect (display of the number of times is displayed on the second image display device 71). A notice is executed, or the third notice effect (fireworks notice) is executed on the first image display device 7 and the second image display device 71 while the fourth notice effect (chance zone notice) is performed on the third image display device. There is a mode to execute.

  As described above, the notice effect (indication effect, suggestion display) that can be executed in the state A has been illustrated. It is also possible to execute these using one or more display devices of the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72. Further, not only the state A (production mode A, B), but also the notice production that can be executed in the state B (production mode E) and the state C (production mode C, D), the first image display device 7, the. It is possible to execute using one or more display devices of the two-image display device 71 and the third image display device 72. Further, some or all of the above-described first to fifth notice effects may be configured to be executable in the state B (effect mode E) and the state C (effect modes C and D).

  As described above, when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a), when the notice effect (indication effect, suggestion display) related to the variable display is executed, the first image Not only the display device 7, but also the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a) can perform the notice effect. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to pay attention to the notice effect by the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a) is located substantially in the center of the game board 2 (inside the game area 3), and on the left side of the front frame 51 (outside the game area 3). One or more image displays of the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) located and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a) located on the right side of the front frame 51 (outside the game area 3) Since it is possible to execute the notice effect by the device, it is possible to display a wide range inside and outside the game area 3. As a result, it is possible to make a notice presentation with a high impact, and it is possible to increase the variation by increasing the variation of the notice production. Among them, in the all rotation notice (fifth notice effect) for giving notice of the execution of the all rotation effect, the characters "all rotation" are displayed on the three display screens 7a, 71a, 72a of the first to third image display devices. , After that, the effect symbols of the same number are displayed one digit at a time on each of the three display screens 7a, 71a, 72a, and the full rotation effect is performed in a state where the double stitches are maintained, and among "111" to "999" After any one of the combinations is stopped and displayed by the three display screens 7a, 71a, 72a, the effect design 8 (8L, 8C, 8R) is finally stopped and displayed (fixed display) on the display screen 7a in a big hit mode. It Thereby, with respect to the stop display (display of the stop effect design) of the effect design 8 mainly performed on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a), the variation of the display of the stop effect design is increased, and the stop effect design is displayed. It will be possible to increase the interest in the event.

  Further, in executing the first to fifth notice effects by the first to third image display devices, a plurality of notice effects are performed at the same time (with the same variable display) on condition that the image display devices used do not overlap. It is possible to execute. In this case, since the notice effects of different modes are executed on the respective image display devices, it becomes possible to attract the player's attention to the notice effects that are compositely executed. This makes it possible to effectively increase the player's expectation.

[Other display contents]
As described above, the effect design game effect (variation effect) and the notice effect are usually executed in the first image display device 7 corresponding to the main liquid crystal, and when the specific change effect or the notice effect is executed, One or both of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, which correspond to liquid crystal, are used. Then, when such a specific change effect or notice effect is not executed, the sub-background, the change number image 710, and the effect mode image 720 are displayed on the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72. (See FIG. 67 and the like). In the present embodiment, it is possible to display various information on the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 in addition to the variation number image 710 and the effect mode image 720.

  For example, on the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a), it is possible to display information regarding the settings of the gaming machine during a game or waiting for a customer (standby). As the information on the setting of the gaming machine, for example, the volume of the sound effect (effect sound) output from the speaker 67, the brightness (luminance) of the display screens 7a, 71a, 72a, the appearance rate of the predetermined change effect or the notice effect. There is information about the production environment. In the present embodiment, on the left side of the upper surface of the hitting ball supply plate 61 (upper plate) (to the left of the first effect button 63a), in addition to the first effect button 63a, operation means such as an operation lever that can be operated by the player ( (Not shown) is provided, and by operating the operation means while waiting for a customer (standby) or during a game, the information on the above-mentioned production environment is displayed on the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a). It is supposed to be done. The player can operate the operating means for the effect environment based on the displayed information to set the environment according to his / her preference. The operation means provided on the left side of the upper surface of the hit ball supply plate 61 (upper plate) is operated. During the game, the firing handle 60 provided on the lower right part of the front of the game machine is operated with the right hand. This is because it is considered that the player's right hand is closed and the left hand is empty because the player shoots a game ball. In this way, by performing the setting related to the production environment by using the operation means located on the left side of the center of the gaming machine or the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a), during the game (of the firing handle) Even if the operation is being performed), the setting operation can be performed without any trouble, and the convenience can be improved.

  Further, for example, the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a) displays information about specifications such as a jackpot probability and a probability variation ratio (probability variation rush rate) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 while waiting for a customer (waiting). It is possible. By thus displaying the information regarding the specifications on the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a) provided on the front frame 51, for example, for a person who selects a gaming machine (model) to play in a gaming hall. , The front of the game machine without looking into the front (front) of the image display device (main liquid crystal) provided on the back side (inside the game area) of the game machine in the waiting state (standby state) It is possible to confirm the specifications by just looking at the display screen of the image display device (outside the game area) protruding to the side. As a result, it becomes possible to easily select a model to play in the game hall. The information regarding the specifications may be displayed on the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a).

  In this way, when the effect display relating to the specific change effect or the notice effect is not executed on the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, the sub-background or the background image is displayed on those display devices (display screens 71a, 72a). It is possible to perform another display (predetermined display) that does not interfere with the performance performed by the first image display device 7, such as the number-of-changes image 710, the effect mode image 720, information about settings of the gaming machine, information about specifications, and the like. Is becoming This makes it possible to effectively utilize the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72.

[Specific reach production]
Next, with reference to FIG. 78 and FIG. 79, a specific reach effect (thunder reach) 149, which is one mode of the reach effect included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment is similar to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment in terms of specifications such as winning / probability determination probabilities and control surfaces, and therefore description thereof is omitted. In the specific reach effect 149, while the reach effect is being executed (may be from the beginning of the reach effect execution, or may be in the middle of the execution of the reach effect), the specific effect symbol (“7” in this embodiment) is always used. The reach production in is executed. Therefore, when the specific reach effect 149 is executed and a big hit occurs, the big hit symbol of the specific effect symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, the big hit (big hit type) when this specific effect design is stopped and displayed as a big hit design is a big hit (specific big hit) advantageous to the player. Specifically, in the present embodiment, this particular jackpot is a jackpot (first identifying result) in which the gaming state after the jackpot game ends is a low probability high base state. Therefore, when the specific reach effect (thunder reach) 149 is generated, the player can increase the sense of expectation for the generation of an advantageous big hit and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of reach effects (game effects) having different execution modes (effect modes) including a specific reach effect (thunder reach) 149 as a reach effect (game effect). ing. Depending on the reach effect (game effect) to be executed, the effect symbol (special symbol) may be stopped and displayed in a big hit mode (the result of the variable display of the effect symbol is a big hit), that is, the big hit reliability is different. It is said that.

  FIG. 78 (a) shows a scene where the variable display of the effect design 8 is started. 78 (b), while performing the variable display of the same effect symbol 8 as in FIG. 78 (a), the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the same effect symbol ("7"), The scene which became a reach mode is shown. The effect symbol "7" is also referred to as a first specific symbol 146 (specific symbol). When the big jackpot in the first specific symbol 146 ("777"), when the big jackpot in the second specific symbol 147 (non-specific symbol) (for example, "444"), the jackpot advantageous to the player is executed. To be done. In addition, when the big hit in the first specific symbol 146, the big hit is a big hit (first specified result) advantageous to the player who surely generates a highly accurate low base state after the big hit game is over. On the other hand, when it becomes a big hit with the second specific symbol 147, the big hit becomes a disadvantageous big hit (the second specified result) which may not generate a highly accurate low base state after the big hit game ends (may be).

  FIG. 78 (c) shows "Thunder reach (specific reach effect, specific game effect)" in which the character A appears as a reach effect (game effect) while the variable display of the same effect symbol 8 as in FIG. 78 (b) is being executed. Is executed. As shown in FIG. 78 (c), a reach type display unit 141 (game effect type display unit) indicating the type (name) of the reach effect to be executed is displayed in the upper center part of the display screen 7a, and "Thunder reach". Is displayed. In addition, a character A performing a predetermined motion during Thunder Reach is displayed in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. In addition, on the left and right upper portions of the display screen 7a, the production design (first specific design 146) of "7" which is the reach design (reach production design) is displayed. The reach symbol (first specific symbol 146) has a smaller size when displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a than when displayed near the center of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 78 (b). Is displayed.

  78 (d) shows an execution mode of the thunder reach (specific reach effect) while the variable display of the same effect symbol 8 as in FIG. 78 (c) is being executed. Specifically, this is an effect in which the lightning pattern 145 is thrown to the medium effect design 8L that the character A144 is variably displayed, and the lightning pattern 145 is stabbed in the predetermined middle effect pattern 8L. Then, when the lightning pattern 145 is stuck in the same medium effect design (“7”) as the reach symbol (first specific symbol 146), it becomes a big hit and becomes a medium effect symbol different from the reach symbol (first specific symbol 146). If stabbed, it will come off. In FIG. 78 (d), the scene in which the lightning pattern 145 is stuck in the same medium effect design (“7”) as the reach pattern (first specific pattern 146) (that is, the scene in which the player is notified of the confirmation of the big hit) is shown. Shows.

  As a result of Thunder Reach, FIG. 78 (e) shows a scene in which all of the left, right, and right effect symbols are stopped and displayed (confirmed stop display) with the first specific symbol 146 (“7”), and the big hit is confirmed. 78 (f) shows that the lightning pattern 145 is stuck in the middle effect symbol ("6") different from the reach symbol (the first specific symbol 146) during the execution of the variable display of the same effect symbol 8 as in FIG. 78 (c). The scene (that is, the scene in which the player is informed of the disconnection) is shown. In FIG. 78 (g), as a result of Thunder Reach, the left and right effect symbols are the first specific symbol 146 (“7”), and the middle effect symbol is a stop effect display (“6”) different from the reach symbol (determined stop). It is displayed), and the scene where the deviation is confirmed is shown. Thus, in the specific reach effect 149 (Thunder reach), the effect symbol is always in the reach mode with the first specific symbol (specific symbol), and the reach effect is executed. Then, in the case of a big hit in the specific reach effect 149 (thunder reach), the big hit is always made in the first specific symbol (specific symbol), and the big hit comparatively advantageous to the player is executed.

  Next, another execution mode of the specific reach effect 149 (thunder reach) will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 (a) shows a scene where the variable display of the effect design 8 is started. 79 (b), while performing the variable display of the same effect symbol 8 as in FIG. 79 (a), the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the same effect symbol ("6") ( The intermediate presentation pattern continues to be displayed variably), showing the scene in the reach mode. The effect symbol "6" is also referred to as a second specific symbol 147 (specific symbol). In the case of a big hit (“666”) with this second specific symbol 147, there is a possibility that a jackpot with a lower degree of advantage (unfavorable) for the player than with a big jackpot with the first specific symbol is executed. Is high. Specifically, a big jackpot with a low degree of advantage may always be executed for the player, and a big jackpot similar to the case where a big jackpot with a low degree of advantage is executed and a big jackpot with the first specific symbol is executed. There may be cases where it is done.

  79 (c) shows a scene in which "Thunder reach (specific reach effect)" is executed as a reach effect (game effect) while the variable display of the same effect pattern 8 as in FIG. 79 (b) is being executed. There is. As described above, in the present embodiment, the "thunder reach (specific reach effect)" is the case where the effect symbol 8 is the reach mode with the first specific symbol 146 and the second specific symbol 147. , Are all reachable effects (game effects). However, in the case of "Thunder reach (specific reach production)", the production design is always the first specific design (specific design) in the reach mode, and when "Thunder reach (specific reach production)" is a big hit, it is always the first. It is a big hit with one specific symbol (specific symbol), and a big hit that is relatively advantageous to the player is executed.

  79 (d) to (f) show the reach symbol (“6”) from the second specific symbol 147 (“6”) during execution of the variable display of the same effect symbol 8 as in FIG. 79 (c). The scene which performs the symbol change effect 148 (change effect) which changes to 1 specific symbol 146 ("7") is shown. In FIG. 79 (d), the left and right reach symbols (“6”) displayed at the first position 142 (first display area) on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a are enlarged and swayed and displayed. The scene which moves to the 2nd position 143 (2nd display area) below the center part of the screen 7a is shown. By displaying the reach symbol in an enlarged manner and moving it to a position closer to the center of the display screen, it is possible to reliably notify (visualize) the occurrence of the symbol change effect 148 (change effect itself) to the player. Become.

  79 (e) and (f) show the execution mode (effect mode) of changing from the second specific symbol 147 (“6”) to the first specific symbol 146 (“7”) in the symbol change effect 148. There is. FIG. 79 (g) shows a scene in which the reach pattern (“7”) after the change is displayed in the enlarged state at the second position 143 in the symbol change effect 148. This surely informs the player that the reach symbol in the "thunder reach (specific reach effect)" has changed from the second specific symbol 147 ("6") to the first specific symbol 146 ("7"). It becomes possible to do. As a result, the player can enjoy the game. Further, FIG. 79 (h) ends the symbol change effect 148, moves and displays the changed reach symbol (“7”) from the second position 143 to the first position (returns to the original position), and reaches. The scene in which the design is reduced and displayed (returned to the original size) is shown.

  After that, the reach symbol is set to "7" of the first specific symbol 146, and "thunder reach (specific reach effect)" is started. Since the execution mode after FIG. 79 (h) is the same as that of FIG. 78 (d) to (g) described above, the description thereof will be omitted. In addition, during execution of the "thunder reach (specific reach effect)", the left and right effect symbols may be displayed only on the second display screen 71a and the third display screen 72a. That is, in the specific reach effect, the time when all of the left and right middle effect symbols are displayed on the display screen 7a, the left effect symbol is displayed on the second display screen 71a outside the game area, and the right effect symbol is the third outside the game area. And a time of displaying on the display screen 72a. Accordingly, by displaying a part or all of the effect design on the second display screen 71a and the third display screen 72a outside the display area, the character effect is made more prominent on the display screen 7a, and the player reaches the specific reach effect. It becomes possible to draw attention.

  In the second embodiment, the specific reach effect 149 is a game effect that can be executed in a specific game state among a plurality of game states. Specifically, the specific reach effect is a game effect that can be executed in a low accurate low base state (a normal effect mode described later), and other game states (low accurate high base state, high accurate low base state, high accurate high In the base state), the specific reach effect is set not to be executed. That is, the specific reach effect in which the character A appears is a game effect that can be executed only in the normal effect mode, and the super effect mode (first super effect mode, second super effect mode), first count effect mode, second It is not executed in the count production mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from getting tired by changing the game effects that can be executed in each game state (depending on the effect mode being executed).

[Advance notice]
Next, with reference to FIG. 80 and FIG. 81, the notice effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, with the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol), the result of the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol) can be a big hit (stop display with the big hit symbol). The notice effect showing the nature (big hit game execution possibility) is executed. In the second embodiment, four types of notice effects (fourth notice effect, fifth notice effect, sixth notice effect, seventh notice effect) shown in FIG. 80 are provided, and these notice effects are changed in the effect symbol. Along with the display, it is displayed on the display screen 7a at a predetermined timing. Further, these notice effects have different jackpot game executability (also referred to as "big hit reliability") indicated by the notice effects. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 80, the fourth notice effect <the fifth notice effect <the sixth notice effect <the seventh notice effect is set, and the jackpot reliability of the fourth notice effect is the lowest. 7 The big hit reliability of notice production is set to the highest.

  Thereby, when the fourth notice effect and the fifth notice effect are executed along with the variation display of the effect symbols, it is difficult to increase the amusement of the game because the expectation of a big hit is low, but the sixth notice effect is difficult. When the 7th notice production is executed, the expectation of a relatively big hit is high, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game. Therefore, the player expects that the sixth notice production and the seventh notice production are executed as the notice production during the variable display of the production symbols.

  Specifically, the fourth notice production 151 is a production mode in which the jackpot reliability is set to 2% and the character B152 imitating a boy appears at a predetermined timing. The fifth preliminary announcement effect 153 is an effect mode in which the jackpot reliability is set to 4% and the character C154 imitating a fish appears at a predetermined timing. The sixth notice production 155 has a jackpot reliability set to 33% and is a production mode in which a character D156 imitating a silhouette of a human running at a predetermined timing and a character E157 imitating a southern island appear. The sixth notice effect 155 (first game effect) has a jackpot reliability set to 33%, and the fourth notice effect 151 (second game effect) and the fifth notice effect 153 (second game effect). By comparison, it is said to be a notice production with a high possibility of a big hit.

  Further, among the plurality of characters (characters D and E) appearing in the sixth notice effect 151, the character D (specific character) represents the specific character in a silhouette mode, and a game profit (prize ball) acquisition effect described later. Is also the character that appears in. The character D (specific character) commonly appears in a situation where there is a relatively high possibility of being advantageous to the player (when the game effect is executed) or a situation where the player is advantageous. Further, the character D (specific character) is set so as to appear in common in a plurality of scenes. However, the same character data may be used in common for this, or the data used differs depending on the appearance scene. May be characters having the same shape (appearance to the player), or may be characters having similar shapes but different sizes. Further, as long as characters having the same shape (including similar shapes) are included, other characters (decoration) may be added to other portions. Also, the colors may be different. It suffices that the characters appearing in a plurality of scenes are similar enough that the player can recognize that they are similar characters (both are running human silhouette characters).

  The seventh notice effect 158 has a jackpot reliability set to 45% and a plurality of (a large number of) characters F159 imitating a bird appear. In addition, the jackpot reliability of the seventh notice production 158 is set to 45%, which is a notice production with a high possibility of a big hit compared with the fourth notice production 151 and the fifth notice production 153.

  In addition, an execution mode of the fourth notice effect 151 to the seventh notice effect 158 will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 70A shows a scene in which the variable display of the effect design 8 is started. 81 (b) to 81 (e) are different variable displays, and after changing from the scene of FIG. 81 (a) to any of FIGS. 81 (b) to 81 (e), FIG. ). Further, since the jackpot reliability varies depending on the notice effect, the result of the reach mode shown in FIG. 81 (f) can be a big hit depending on which notice effect is passed and then the scene of FIG. 81 (f) is entered. Sex (expectation) is different.

  81 (b) shows a scene in which the character B152 of the fourth notice effect 151 is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the scene in FIG. 81 (a) in the same variable display as in FIG. 81 (a). 81 (c) shows a scene in which the character C154 of the fifth advance notice effect 153 is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the scene in FIG. 81 (a) in the same variable display as in FIG. 81 (a). 81 (d) shows a scene in which the character D156 and the character E157 of the sixth notice effect 155 are displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the scene in FIG. 81 (a) in the same variable display as in FIG. 81 (a). There is. 81 (e) shows a scene in which the character F159 of the seventh notice effect 158 is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the scene in FIG. 81 (a) in the same variable display as in FIG. 81 (a).

[Game profit acquisition production]
Next, with reference to FIG. 82 and FIG. 83, the game profit acquisition effect of the second embodiment will be described. The game profit acquisition effect is an effect showing how much game profit is acquired in the specific state when the game state is in the specific state. The specific state (specific period) is a so-called condominium state (condominium period), and in the low-probability low base state (state A), the gaming state becomes the low-probability low base state again when the big hit occurs. Up to (excluding jackpot gaming state) state. This is an effect showing the amount of game profit obtained in this specific state.

  FIG. 82 (a) shows a big hit (4R first big hit) in a low accurate low base state, a big hit game related to the big hit (4R first big hit game) is being executed, and is displayed on the round display portion 161. As it is, it shows the execution scene of the 4th round game which is the final round ((F) shows the final round). That is, it is a big hit that occurs in a low accurate low base state (normal state) and is a so-called first hit. And a specific state starts from this big hit (big hit game). In addition, in the lower center of the display screen 7a, an earned profit display unit 166 showing the amount of game profit (number of prize balls) obtained in the big hit game is provided. It is shown that the (prize ball) has been paid out (obtained). Since the big hit shown in FIG. 82 (a) is the first big hit game in the specific state, the gained game profit displayed in the gained profit display unit 166 is the total gained game profit in the specific state (specific period). Become. Therefore, the earned profit display unit 166 shown in FIG. 82A is also referred to as a total earned profit display unit 164.

  In addition, a jackpot game effect 163 in which a teammate character and an enemy character battle each other is displayed in a substantially central portion of the display screen 7a during the jackpot game. Then, in FIG. 82 (a), since the effect that the teammate character defeats the enemy character is displayed, it is possible for the player to change the game state after the jackpot game is finished to a game state relatively advantageous to the player. It is shown. In the big-hit game production, when the teammate's defeat of the enemy character is displayed, the gaming state after the big-hit game is finished becomes a relatively advantageous gaming state (high-probability low base state) for the player. When the effect in which the enemy character defeats the teammate character is displayed, the game state after the big hit game is finished is shifted to a game state relatively unfavorable to the player (low accurate high base state). In addition, in the case of transitioning to the highly accurate and high base state (2R fifth big hit, 2R sixth big hit), the player displays that the enemy character defeats the teammate character, and once the player shifts to a disadvantageous game state. As shown in, when the variation display number of the effect symbol (special symbol) reaches a predetermined number (50 times or 100 times) after the big hit game, it is informed that it is in an advantageous state.

  82B shows the ending period after the final round (4 rounds) of the big hit game (4R first big hit game) shown in FIG. 82A. On the display screen 7a, the big hit game is finished, the game state after the big hit game is changed to a state C (high-accuracy low base state) that is advantageous to the player, and the earned game profit in the big hit game is "00600pt". It was shown that it was. FIG. 82 (c) shows a scene in which a transition from the state of FIG. 82 (b) to the state C is performed and the effect symbols (special symbols) are variably displayed a predetermined number of times. In FIG. 82 (c), the specific state (state of condominium) continuing from FIG. 82 (a) continues, and “T: 00650pt” is displayed on the total gained profit display portion 164 shown in the lower center of the display screen 7a. The display is made, and it is shown that the total gained game profit in the above-mentioned big hit game and the subsequent state C is “650 pt”. In this embodiment, it is possible to increase the gained game profit not only during the big hit game but also in the state C. A firing direction display unit 162 is provided in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a to notify the player of the firing direction of the game ball. In addition, the effect for state C is displayed in a predetermined display mode on the substantially central portion of the display screen 7a.

  82 (d), after the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol) is performed a predetermined number of times from FIG. 82 (c), the result of the variable display of the prescribed effect symbol (special symbol) is a big hit, and a big hit symbol ( "777") indicates a scene in which the display is stopped. FIG. 82 (e) is executing the big hit game (15R third big hit game) relating to the big hit shown in FIG. 82 (d), and shows the execution scene of the second round game. At the upper center of the display screen 7a, there is provided a total earned profit display unit 164 which shows the total earned game profit in a specific state (specific period), and at the lower center of the display screen 7a, the big hit game being executed (15R). An earned profit display unit 166 showing the current earned game profit in the third jackpot game) is provided. In addition, a big hit game effect 163 in which a teammate character and an enemy character are fighting is displayed in a substantially central portion of the display screen 7a.

  FIG.82 (f) has shown the scene which the round game progressed to the 15th round which is the final round in the same big hit game as FIG.82 (e). The display of the acquired profit display unit 166 increases to "02050pt", and accordingly, the display of the total acquired profit display unit 164 increases to "02750pt". In addition, as a big-hit game effect for the final round, an effect in which the teammate character defeats the enemy character is displayed. Therefore, the game state after the big-hit game is finished is relatively advantageous to the player (state C, highly accurate). The player has been shown to transition to a low base state).

  FIG. 83 (g) shows the ending period after the end of the final round (15 rounds) of the big hit game (15R third big hit game) shown in FIG. 82 (f). On the display screen 7a, the big hit game is over, the game state after the big hit game is changed to a state C (high-accuracy low base state) advantageous to the player, and the big hit game (15R third big hit game) It is shown that the acquired game profit is “02200pt” and the total acquired game profit in the specific state is “02900pt”. FIG. 83 (h) shows a scene in which the state transitions from FIG. 83 (g) to state C and the effect symbols (special symbols) are variably displayed a predetermined number of times. In FIG. 83 (h), the specific state (state of condominium) continuing from FIG. 82 (a) continues, and “T: 03500pt” is displayed in the total gained profit display portion 164 shown in the lower center of the display screen 7a. The display is made, and it is shown that the total gained game profit in the above-mentioned plurality of big hit games and the state C executed during that time is "03500pt".

  FIG. 83 (i) is after performing the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol) a predetermined number of times from FIG. 83 (h), and after a predetermined number of jackpot games, a predetermined effect symbol (special symbol). The result of the variable display is a big hit, and the big hit symbol (“777”) is stopped and displayed. It should be noted that also in FIG. 83 (i), the specific state (the condominium state) continuing from FIG. 82 (a) continues. FIG. 83 (j) is executing the big hit game (15R third big hit game) related to the big hit shown in FIG. 83 (i), and shows the execution scene of the 12th round game. The display of the acquired profit display unit 166 becomes “01850pt”, and the display of the total acquired profit display unit 164 increases to “09950pt”.

  FIG. 83 (k) is the same 12th round in the same big hit game as FIG. 83 (j), and shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from FIG. 83 (j). As shown in FIG. 83 (k), the obtained game profit in the big hit game being executed is "01900pt", which shows that the total game profit in the specific state is "10000pt". In this pachinko game machine 1, the fact that the total gained gaming profit is "10000 pt" is a standard that the specific state has continued for a long time and that a large amount of gaming profit (prize ball) can be acquired. That is, the situation is advantageous for the player. Therefore, in order to show the advantageous situation to the player, a specific profit display portion 167 is provided at a substantially central portion of the display screen 7a.

  The specific profit display unit 167 is provided in response to the acquired profit displayed on the total profit profit display unit 164 being “10000 pt”, and the amount of the total acquired game profit exceeds the specific amount on the specific profit display unit 167. “10000 ptOVER” indicating that it has become a specific amount has been displayed. Further, in the specific profit display portion 167, the character D156 (specific character) is displayed together with the display of “10000 ptOVER”. As a result, the fact that the player continues to be in the specific state (state of condominium) and obtains a large amount of gaming profit, that is, "10,000 pt" as the earned profit, is a favorable situation for the player. Is easily recognizable.

  Note that, as described above, the character D156 (specific character) is a character used as a notice effect with a relatively high jackpot reliability, and its display mode also imitates a running human silhouette similar to the notice effect. Because of the display mode, the player can easily recognize that the same character is used. In this way, by using a character similar to the character (specific character) used in the game production with high jackpot reliability, the current game situation, that is, the situation in which the game profit of “10000 ptOVER” is obtained, is for the player. It is possible to easily grasp the favorable situation. Although all the characters appearing in the sixth notice effect 155 may be used, only the character D is used as the common character in this embodiment. That is, it is sufficient if at least some characters are common in both scenes.

  Further, in order for the player to surely recognize the display mode (“10000 ptOVER” and the specific character) of the specific profit display unit 167, a specific time (“4 s” in the present embodiment, from the time when the total acquired game profit is 10,000 pt). ) Display continuously. In the meantime, even when the display of the total earned profit display unit 164 exceeds "T: 10000pt", the display mode of the specific profit display unit 167 is maintained as "10000ptOVER" (the specific character also continues the display. Do). Further, in order for the player to surely recognize the display mode of the specific profit display unit 167, the profit amount (“10000 pt”) displayed on the specific profit display unit 167 is displayed on the total gained profit display unit 164 ( It is displayed in a larger size than "10000pt". Further, the profit amount displayed on the specific profit display unit 167 (“10000 pt”) is displayed in a larger size than the profit amount displayed on the acquired profit display unit 166 (“01900 pt”).

  In addition, the specific amount (“10000” pt) that triggers the display of the specific profit display unit 167 is set to an amount that cannot be obtained in one big hit game even if it is a big hit game that can obtain the most game profit. . In addition, in the present embodiment, since the gained game profit can be increased even in the state C, one big hit game and the state C continue for a long time (that is, a small hit game is generated many times). Although it is possible to obtain a specific amount of game profit, normally, a specific amount of game profit is obtained by generating a plurality of big hit games. Therefore, it is impossible to obtain a specific amount of game profit only by the game profit obtained by one big hit game, but it is possible to obtain a specific amount of game profit by generating a plurality of big hit games. It can be said that it is possible.

  Further, in FIG. 83 (k), the case where the amount of the total gained gaming profit exceeds the specific amount (“10000 pt”) during the big hit game has been described. On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is not in the big hit game, but in a specific state, and in a state other than the big hit game (high accurate low base state, high accurate high base state, low accurate high base state) The amount of game profit may exceed a specific amount (“10000 pt”). FIG. 83 (l) shows such a situation, and when the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is in state C, the amount of the total gained game profit is a specific amount (“10000 pt”) due to the occurrence of the small hit game. It shows the scene beyond. As shown in FIG. 83 (l), in the lower center part of the display screen 7a, a total earned profit display unit 164 is provided, "T: 10000pt" is displayed, and the total earned gaming profit is "10000pt". It is shown that.

  Further, accordingly, as in FIG. 83 (k), a specific profit display portion 167 is provided at a substantially central portion of the display screen 7a. Then, the specific profit display unit 167 displays “10000 ptOVER” indicating that the amount of total acquired game profit exceeds the specific amount (becomes the specific amount). Further, in the specific profit display portion 167, the character D156 (specific character) is displayed together with the display of “10000 ptOVER”. As a result, the fact that the player continues to be in the specific state (state of condominium) and obtains a large amount of gaming profit, that is, "10,000 pt" as the earned profit, is a favorable situation for the player. Is easily recognizable. Also, when the total gained game profit is "10000pt" in the state C, the player can surely recognize the display mode ("10000ptOVER" and the specific character) of the specific profit display unit 167 as in the big hit game. Therefore, from the time when the total gained gaming profit reaches 10,000 pt, it is continuously displayed for a specific time (“4 s” in this embodiment).

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, by displaying a common character in a plurality of advantageous situations, a situation in which the jackpot is highly reliable and a large amount of game profit can be obtained, etc. It is possible to increase the appearance frequency of the character (specific character) that appears in a situation advantageous to the player. In addition, by causing the specific character to appear in a plurality of advantageous situations in this way, the player who sees the specific character in one scene sees the other character from the experience of seeing the specific character in the previous advantageous situation. It is possible to intuitively recognize that the current situation may be an advantageous situation when looking at the specific character. As described above, in a gaming machine having a wide variety of game effects, by causing a specific character to appear in an appropriate scene, the contents of the game effect (such as jackpot reliability and advantageous degree) can be efficiently provided to the player. It becomes possible to inform (recognize) to. As a result, the player can easily understand the game machine and enhance the interest of the game.

[Mode of mode transition]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, an effect mode (effect mode) executed in each gaming state will be described. The types of big hits, the types of game states to be transferred after the end of big hits, etc. are the same as those in the first embodiment (see FIG. 6 and the like). The game state in the initial state after the power is turned on is a low accuracy low base state, and the effect mode is set to the "normal effect mode 181" shown in FIG. 86 (a). The means for setting a predetermined effect mode from a plurality of effect modes is also referred to as "effect mode setting means". In the second embodiment, the “effect mode setting means” is provided in the sub control unit 90.

  In the normal production mode (low accurate low base state), while the game (special symbol win / loss judgment, variable display of special symbols / effect symbols, etc.) is being executed, the result of the special symbol win / loss judgment (first special symbol win / loss judgment) is a big hit. Then, the big hit special symbol (big hit effect symbol) is stopped and displayed, and the big hit game is executed. As described in the first embodiment, similarly in the second embodiment, in the low-probability low base state, the game ball is shot in the left game area, and the variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol winning / absence determination) is performed. It has become the main game, and in the high accurate high base state, high accurate low base state, and low accurate high base state, shoot a game ball in the right game area and display the variation of the second special symbol (second special The game is mainly based on the determination of whether or not the symbol is valid.

  Big hits as a result of the first special symbol hit determination that can occur in the normal effect mode (low accurate low base state) are 4R first big hit and 4R second big hit. When the result of the first special symbol hit determination is a predetermined ratio when the 4R first big hit (for example, 50% when the 4R first big hit), and / or during the big hit game In addition, the "first bonus (4R first big hit game)" that informs (indicates) the player that the effect mode (game state) after the big hit game will be the super effect mode (high accurate low base state) Executed. When the first bonus (first bonus effect) is executed, the player can easily recognize that the game state shifts to the player's advantageous game state after the big hit game, so that the player can play the game with a sense of security. It will be possible. That is, when the first bonus (first bonus effect) is executed along with the big hit game, it is sure to shift to the super effect mode (high-accuracy low base state) after the end of the big hit game. It should be noted that there are two types (a plurality of types) of production modes in the super production mode shown in FIGS. 86 (b) and 86 (c).

  Also, the result of the first special symbol hit determination is a predetermined ratio when the 4R first big hit (the remaining ratio, for example, 50% when the 4R first big hit), and the 4R second big hit When it becomes, "the second bonus (4R first big hit game)" is executed. In the second bonus (second bonus effect), when the big hit or / and during the big hit game, the effect mode (game state) after the big hit game shifts to the count effect mode (low accurate high base state). An effect is given to notify (suggest) the player to do. However, even when the second bonus is executed, if the result of the first special symbol hit determination is the 4R first big hit, the effect mode after the big hit game is not the count effect mode. , Transition to super production mode (high-accuracy low-base state). The production mode of the count production mode (first count production mode) that can be shifted from the first special symbol winning / disapproval determination is a mode shown in FIG. 86 (d).

  That is, when the second bonus (second bonus effect) is executed in association with the big hit game, the effect mode after the big hit game ends is transferred to the super effect mode (high-accuracy low base state) ( 4R first big hit) and a case of shifting to the count effect mode (low accurate high base state) (when 4R second big hit). Further, in the case of shifting from the second bonus to the super effect mode, during the big hit game or at the end of the big hit game, promotion effect indicating the shift to the super effect mode can be performed to enhance the enjoyment of the game. . Therefore, even if the second bonus effect is executed, the player can maintain a high interest in the game for a long time without expecting the promotion effect, without losing the expectation of the advantageous game state. Becomes

  A plurality of effect modes are provided in the super effect mode executed in the high-accuracy low-base state as in the first embodiment, and the player can select one of the effect modes at a predetermined timing such as during a big hit game. It is possible to select using the effect button (see FIG. 86 (f)). Further, as selectable effect modes, a first super effect mode 182 (first effect mode, specific effect mode) and a second super effect mode 183 are provided. During execution of these super effect modes, the game state is set to the high-accuracy low base state, and as described in the first embodiment, it is possible to increase the amount of gained game profit by the small hit game. This is a game state that is advantageous to the player. The super effect mode (high-accuracy low base state) continues until the next big hit (first bonus, third bonus, or fourth bonus) occurs.

  When the first count effect mode (count effect mode, second effect mode) executed in the low accurate high base state does not become a big hit until the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol) of a predetermined number of times (100 times) is finished , The game state shifts to the normal effect mode. As a result, the gaming state shifts from the low-probability high-base state to the low-probability low-base state (the most unfavorable gaming state for the player). As described above, in the super effect modes 182, 183 (high-accuracy low base state) and the first count effect mode (low-accuracy high base state), the variation time of the second special symbol becomes a time saving state, and the game ball is in the right game area. Is emitted and the game is played mainly with the variable display of the second special symbol (the second special symbol judgment).

  Then, in the super effect mode 182, 183 or the first count effect mode, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination is 15R third big hit, "third bonus (15R third big hit game)" is executed It This third bonus is a big win most advantageous to the player, in which the game profit that can be obtained is the largest and the game state after the big hit game is set to the super production mode. Therefore, when the third bonus (third bonus effect) is executed, the player can easily recognize that the game state (super effect mode, high-accuracy low base state) advantageous to the player after the big hit game is entered. Therefore, it becomes possible to play the game with a sense of security. That is, when the third bonus (third bonus effect) is executed along with the big hit game, it is sure to shift to the super effect mode (high-accuracy low base state) after the end of the big hit game.

  Further, in the super production mode 182, 183 or the first count production mode, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination is the 4R fourth big hit, "first bonus (4R fourth big hit game)" is executed It Since the 4R fourth big hit game and the 4R second big hit game are similar big hit games (the number of times of opening the special winning opening, the opening time, etc.), the first bonus effect of the same effect mode is executed. Further, as described above, by the first bonus effect, after the big hit game, it is possible to easily recognize that the game state shifts to the player's advantageous game state, so that it is possible to play the game with a sense of security.

  In addition, in the super production mode 182, 183 or the first count production mode, the result of the second special symbol hit determination is 2R fifth big hit, 2R sixth big hit, 2R seventh big hit, or 2R eighth big hit. In this case, the “fourth bonus (2R fifth big hit game, 2R sixth big hit game, 2R seventh big hit game, or 2R eighth big hit game)” is executed. In the fourth bonus (fourth bonus effect), when the big hit or / and during the big hit game, the effect mode (game state) after the big hit game shifts to the count effect mode (low accurate high base state). An effect is given to inform (suggest) the player of the fact. However, even when the fourth bonus is executed, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination is 2R fifth big hit or 2R sixth big hit, the production mode after the big hit game end, Although it transits to the count effect mode (second count effect mode) once, when the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol) has passed the predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) (if it is not a big hit in the meantime), the effect The mode shifts to the super production mode (high-accuracy low base state). That is, the count effect mode (second count effect mode) is executed in the high-accuracy high-base state, and then the game state is changed to the high-accuracy low-base state, and the effect mode is changed to the super-effect mode.

  On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination is 2R 7 big hit or 2R 8 big hit, the effect mode after the big hit game is finished, shift to the count effect mode (second count effect mode) However, when the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol) has passed the predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) (if it is not a big hit in the meantime), the effect mode shifts to the normal effect mode (low accurate low base state). To do. That is, the count effect mode (second count effect mode) is executed in the low-accuracy high-base state, and then the game state is changed to the low-accuracy low-base state and the effect mode is changed to the normal effect mode. The production mode of the count production mode (second count production mode) that can be shifted from the second special symbol winning / disapproval determination is the mode shown in FIG. 86 (e).

  Further, in the super effect mode, when the fourth bonus (2R fifth big hit, 2R sixth big hit, 2R seventh big hit, or 2R eighth big hit), it is always the second count effect after the big hit game. The fourth bonus is a disadvantageous jackpot compared to the first bonus and the second bonus because the mode shifts (and the amount of game profit that can be obtained is small). On the contrary, the third bonus and the first bonus are advantageous big hits because they always shift to the super mode after the big hit game (the amount of game profit that can be obtained is large, especially the third bonus is large). .

  Here, the first count effect mode 184 that shifts based on the result of the first special symbol hit determination, based on the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol) a predetermined number of times, shifts only to the normal effect mode. On the other hand, the second count effect mode 185 that shifts based on the result of the second special symbol hit determination, based on the variable display of a predetermined number of special symbols (effect symbol), when shifting to the normal effect mode 181 They are different from each other in that they have a case of shifting to the super production modes 182 and 183.

  On the other hand, in the effect modes of the first count effect mode 184 and the second count effect mode 185, the common effect mode name “count mode” is displayed on the effect mode display unit 171, and the background character 172 is also displayed. A common character (cloud background) is displayed. The difference is that different images (display units) are provided in a partial area of the display screen 7a. Specifically, in the second count effect mode 185, a remaining number display section for indicating the remaining period of the count effect mode is provided at the upper right of the display screen 7a. The display modes of both effect modes are different in that the first count effect mode 184 is not provided with such a display unit. In this way, since there is a slight difference in display mode between the two effect modes, it is difficult for the player to distinguish the effect modes. As a result, even if the player is in the first count effect mode 184, he / she expects to switch to the super mode to maintain a high gaming interest for a long time, or when the second count effect mode 185 shifts to the super mode. In addition, it is possible to surprise the player and enhance the interest in the game.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the bonus effect and the effect mode shown in FIG. 84 are executed according to the transition of the game state, the game effect is diversified and diversified, and the tiredness of the game is prevented. It is possible to enhance the interest in playing games.

[Game production in each production mode]
Next, a game effect (reach effect or character effect) executed in each effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 87. As shown in FIG. 85, a normal effect mode 181 (third effect mode), a first super effect mode 182 (first effect mode, specific effect mode), a second super effect mode 183, a count effect mode (second effect mode, In the first count effect mode 184 and the second count effect mode 185, game effects having different effect modes (display modes) are provided. Further, in the normal effect mode 181, four types (plurality) of game effects (reach effects) can be executed, and jackpot reliability is set for each of these four types of game effects. The jackpot reliability indicates the possibility that, when the corresponding game effect (for example, Thunder Reach) is executed, the effect symbol (special symbol) that is variably displayed together with the game effect is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol. That is, it shows the possibility of being a big hit (first bonus or second bonus) (possibility of executing a big hit game).

  Further, each game effect executed in the normal effect mode mainly based on the first special symbol winning / decision determination allows different characters to appear, the character S in S reach, the character T in T reach, and the character A in Thunder reach ( 78 (c), (d), etc.), the character Y appears in the full rotation reach. By seeing these appearing characters and effect modes, the player can easily understand the jackpot reliability of the executed game effect. Of course, other than these characters shown in FIG. 85, other common or different characters may be displayed (appeared) in these game effects.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 85, different game effects can be executed in the first super effect mode 182, the second super effect mode 183, and the count effect modes 184 and 185, which mainly have the second special symbol winning / disabling judgment. Here, the reliability of the game effect in these effect modes is referred to as "advantageous jackpot reliability". This is different from mere "big hit reliability", and may be an advantageous big hit, that is, the third bonus or the first bonus that the super mode continues (possible to be the 15R third big hit or the 4R fourth big hit). ) Is shown. In the super production mode, the game profit that can be obtained is small, and the big hit that the production mode after the big hit game shifts to the count production mode is a big hit that is disadvantageous to the player even if it is a big hit. Since it is a big hit), the "reliability of big hits" indicates the possibility of becoming an advantageous big hit excluding these disadvantageous big hits.

  Specifically, the character A confrontation reach 191 that can be executed in the first super effect mode 182 is a game effect in which the character X and the character A appear and confront each other, and the advantageous jackpot reliability is the first super effect. It is the lowest "1%" of the game effects that can be executed in the mode 182. That is, when the character A confrontation reach 191 is executed in the first super effect mode 182, it is very unlikely that the result of the variable display of the effect symbol is a big hit. Therefore, when the character A confrontation reach 191 is executed, the player does not become a disadvantageous jackpot rather than expecting a jackpot, that is, the player expects that the result of the special symbol hit determination is out of play. To do.

  Further, the character G confrontation reach 192 is a game production in a production mode in which the characters X and G appear and confront each other, and the advantageous jackpot reliability is set to "10%". Further, the character H confrontation reach 193 is a game effect in which the characters X and H appear and confront each other, and the advantageous jackpot reliability is “30%”. Further, the character I confrontation reach 194 is a game effect in which the characters X and I appear and confront each other, and the advantageous jackpot reliability is the highest among the game effects that can be executed in the first super effect mode 182. It is said to be "50%". Further, the above-mentioned confrontation reach is an advantageous jackpot if the ally character X defeats the enemy characters A, G, H, or I. If you lose, it will be a big hit, and in the case of a draw, the result of the special symbol win / loss judgment will be out, and the gaming state will continue. In addition, the first count effect mode 184 and the second count effect mode 185 execute common game effects. This makes it more difficult to determine which count effect mode. It should be noted that in each effect mode, game effects other than those defined in FIG. 85 (notice effect, prefetch effect, reach effect, character effect) may be provided.

[Production mode of each production mode]
FIG. 86 (a) is a diagram showing an effect mode of the normal effect mode 181. In the normal effect mode 181, a character imitating a mountain and a tree is displayed as the background character 172. In the normal effect mode, the effect mode display unit 171 indicating the normal effect mode is not provided. Therefore, since the background character and the effect mode display unit 171 are not present, it is understood that the normal effect mode is set. FIG. 86 (b) is a diagram showing an effect mode of the first super effect mode 182 when the player selects the first super effect mode 182 among the super effect modes. On the display screen 7a, a character simulating the sun is displayed as the background character 172, and the "first super mode" is displayed on the effect mode display portion 171 to clearly indicate the effect mode to be executed to the player. There is.

  Also, FIG. 86 (c) is a diagram showing an effect mode of the second super effect mode 183 when the player selects the second super effect mode 183 of the super effect modes. On the display screen 7a, a character simulating the moon is displayed as the background character 172, and by displaying the "second super mode" on the effect mode display unit 171, the effect mode to be executed is clearly indicated to the player. There is. Also, FIG. 86 (d) is a diagram showing an effect mode of the first count effect mode 184 when the effect mode is set to the first count effect mode 184. A character imitating a cloud is displayed as the background character 172 on the display screen 7a, and the "count mode" is displayed on the effect mode display portion 171 to indicate the effect mode to be executed by the player.

  Also, FIG. 86 (e) is a diagram showing an effect mode of the second count effect mode 185 when the effect mode is set to the second count effect mode 185. On the display screen 7a, a character imitating the same cloud as the first count effect mode 184 is displayed as the background character 172, and the same "count mode" as the first count effect mode 184 is also displayed on the effect mode display unit 171. It is carried out. This shows the effect mode to be executed by the player. Further, in the upper right of the display screen 7a, a remaining number display section 173 of the first count effect mode 184 is provided, and shows the remaining period of the second count effect mode 185. The execution period of the first count effect mode 184 is a period in which the number of times of variable display of special symbols is fixed at 100 times, while the execution period of the second count effect mode 185 is the number of times of variable display of special symbols is 50. It has a plurality of periods of 100 times and 100 times. Therefore, in the second count effect mode 185, such a display unit is provided in order to show the remaining time period to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, or to increase the interest of the game by performing the effect of increasing the remaining time period. This difference in display mode is the difference between the first count effect mode 184 and the second count effect mode 185, and the other configurations, appearance characters, executable game effects, etc. are common.

  In FIG. 86 (f), when the effect mode is set to the super effect mode, the player can select any effect mode from the first super effect mode 182 and the second super effect mode 183. The production mode selection screen 186 is shown. The effect mode selection period is provided at a predetermined time during the big hit game before the effect mode is set to the super effect mode (similar to the first embodiment).

[Game production in specific production mode]
Next, using FIG. 87, a game effect (reach effect, in a specific effect mode (specifically, the first super effect mode) among a plurality of effect modes that the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment has. The effect mode (execution mode) of (character effect) will be described. When the gaming state is set to the high-accuracy low base state, any one of a plurality of effect modes (first super effect mode, second super effect mode) is selected by the player's effect button operation (selection by the player). The production mode can be selected. As described above, these effect modes have different game effects depending on the effect mode to be executed. Therefore, the player can prevent the game from getting tired or enhance the interest of the game by selecting an arbitrary effect mode or switching to a different effect mode according to his / her preference. ..

  As shown in FIG. 85, FIG. 87, etc., in the first super effect mode 182, a game effect having a characteristic effect mode different from other effect modes is executed. Specifically, four types (plural) of game effects (reach production): character A confrontation reach, character G confrontation reach, character H confrontation reach, and character I confrontation reach (collectively referred to as "confrontation reach"). ) Is feasible. In these game effects, a teammate character (character X) and an enemy character (character A, G, H, or I) are confronted with each other, and the result of the confrontation is a judgment result advantageous to the player. I'm showing you. That is, it indicates whether or not to execute a big hit game (first bonus or third bonus) which is advantageous to the player whose game state after the big hit game is set to the super effect mode, depending on the game effect to be executed.

  In addition, in each game effect, an option display unit 179 that suggests the result of the competition is provided at the upper part of the display screen 7a, and the result of the competition is any of the results displayed on the option display unit 179. There are three types of options displayed on the option display unit 179: [Victory], [Continue], and [Defeat]. When the result of the confrontation reach is [Victory] ([Result display unit 178 displays Victory] is displayed), the player wins a big win, the third bonus or the first bonus (big hit game) is executed, and the effect mode after the big hit game is set to the super effect mode. The game state in the super production mode is a highly accurate low base state that is advantageous to the player.

  When the result of the confrontation reach is [Continued] (when [Continued] is displayed in the result display unit 178), the result of the special symbol hit / miss judgment is out, and the jackpot game is not executed. The first super production mode continues even after the end of the confrontation reach. Then, after that, in the first super effect mode, the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol) is continuously executed. When the result of the confrontation reach is [defeat] (when [defeat] is displayed in the result display unit 178), it is a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, the fourth bonus (jackpot game) is executed, and the jackpot game ends. The subsequent effect mode is set to the second count effect mode 185. Incidentally, as described above, the game state in the second count effect mode has a low accurate high base state and a high accurate low base state.

  Further, a plurality of game effects that can be executed in the first super effect mode 185 are set, and among these plurality of game effects, the game effect in which the option “defeat” can be displayed on the option display unit 179 is an enemy character. Only the character A confrontation reach 191 (first special game effect) in which the character A appears is set. That is, in the situation where the game is being executed in the first super effect mode 185, the effect mode being executed shifts from the first super effect mode 185 to the second count effect mode 185 without passing through the character A confrontation reach 191. There is nothing to do. Therefore, in the first super production mode 185 in the high-accuracy low-base state, the character A confrontation reach 191 is always executed when the 2R seventh big jackpot and the 2R eighth big jackpot, which are disadvantageous to the player, are obtained. The character A confrontation reach 191 is always executed even when the 2R fifth big hit and the 2R sixth big hit that can be promoted from the second count effect mode to the super effect mode. That is, when the fourth bonus (see FIG. 84) is executed in the first super effect mode and the effect mode after the jackpot game is over is shifted to the second count effect mode, the character A confrontation reach 191 is always executed.

  FIG. 87 (a) shows a scene in which the character A confrontation reach effect 191 (first special game effect) is executed along with the variable display of a predetermined effect symbol in the first super effect mode 185. On the left part of the display screen 7a, a background character 172 simulating the sun is displayed, which indicates that the effect mode being executed is the first super effect mode 185. Further, in the approximate center of the display screen, a teammate character X174 and an enemy character A144, which are confronted in the confrontation reach, are displayed. In addition, on the left and right upper portions of the display screen, the effect pattern of the reach mode is displayed (the left and right effect patterns "2" constituting the reach mode are displayed). Further, an option display section 179 is provided at the upper part of the display screen, and options that can be the result of the confrontation reach are displayed. As shown in FIG. 87 (a), in the character A confrontation reach effect, [continue] and [defeat] are displayed as the options in the option display section.

  In the character A confrontation reach effect (first special game effect) of the second embodiment, [defeat] is always displayed as an option. Also, [Victory] is not displayed as an option. Therefore, the character A confrontation reach effect is a reach effect showing a situation that is considerably disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the player plays the game in the expectation that [Continue] is displayed on the result display unit 178, that is, the result of the special symbol hit determination is out of order, and that the first super effect mode is continued. Although not shown in the figure, in the second embodiment, although "win" is not displayed as an option, after "defeat" is displayed as a result of the confrontation, a reversal effect is executed, which is advantageous to the player. It also has a big hit.

  As another aspect of the second embodiment, in the character A confrontation reach effect (first special game effect), the option of "win" may be displayed, or "defeat" may not be displayed. In addition, even if three options of [Win], [Continue], and [Defeat] are displayed, or only one of them is displayed (in this case, the displayed option is used for confirmation). Good.

  FIG. 87 (b) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from the scene of FIG. 87 (a), and shows a scene in which [Continue] is displayed in the result display section as the result of the confrontation of the character A confrontation reach effect. ing. Further, the detachment reach effect design [232] is displayed in the center portion of the display screen, and it is shown that the detachment result is out as a result of the reach effect. Further, the character "draw" indicating that the confrontation between the character X and the character A was a draw is displayed. This indicates that the first super effect mode continues after that without ending the first super effect mode (the fourth bonus is executed and shifting to the second count effect mode). That is, it indicates that the character A confrontation reach effect is executed when the result of the special symbol hit determination is out.

  FIG. 87 (c) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from the scene of FIG. 87 (a), and shows a scene in which [defeat] is displayed in the result display section as the confrontation result of the character A confrontation reach effect. ing. Further, in the central portion of the display screen, the outreach effect design [212] is displayed, which shows that the result of the reach effect did not result in an advantageous jackpot advantageous to the player. Incidentally, as the effect design, the out-reach reach effect design of [212] is displayed (the effect design which is not the same in three digits), but the result of the special symbol validity judgment is a big hit (2R fifth big hit, 2R sixth big hit, 2R). 7th jackpot or 2R 8th jackpot). In the confrontation between the character X and the character A, an effect indicating that the character A has won (the character X has lost) is displayed. This indicates that the first super effect mode ends (the fourth bonus is executed and the second count effect mode is entered). That is, the character A confrontation reach effect executed when the result of the special symbol hit determination is a comparatively unfavorable jackpot (2R 5 jackpot, 2R 6 jackpot, 2R 7 jackpot or 2R 8 jackpot) Is shown.

  As described above, when the character A confrontation reach effect is executed and [defeat] is displayed in the result display section, in principle (in most cases), the fourth bonus is executed and the second count effect mode is set. Transition. However, in a rare case (with a considerably low possibility), the reverse production may be executed after the defeat production of FIG. 87 (c), and the production showing that the advantageous jackpot has been achieved may be performed. In this case, the third bonus (or the first bonus) is executed, and then the super effect mode is entered. In the table of FIG. 85, the advantageous jackpot reliability of the character A confrontation reach is not 0% but 1% because it has such a rare case. Further, instead of such an aspect, the advantageous jackpot reliability when the character A confrontation reach effect is executed may be set to 0%.

  FIG. 87 (d) shows a scene in which the character G confrontation reach effect 192 (second special game effect) is executed along with the variable display of the predetermined effect symbol in the first super effect mode 185. On the left part of the display screen 7a, a background character 172 simulating the sun is displayed, which indicates that the effect mode being executed is the first super effect mode 185. Further, in the approximate center of the display screen, a teammate character character X174 and an enemy character character G192, which are confronted in the confrontation reach, are displayed. In addition, on the left and right upper portions of the display screen, the effect pattern of the reach mode is displayed (the left and right effect patterns "2" constituting the reach mode are displayed). Further, an option display section 179 is provided at the upper part of the display screen, and options that can be the result of the confrontation reach are displayed. As shown in FIG. 87 (d), in the character G confrontation reach effect (second special game effect), unlike the character A confrontation reach effect (first special game effect), [win] and [continue] are available as options in the option display section. ] Is displayed and [Defeat] is not displayed.

  That is, in the character G showdown reach effect (second special game effect) of the second embodiment, [defeat] is not displayed as an option. Also, [Victory] is always displayed as an option. Therefore, the character G confrontation reach effect is a reach effect showing a situation that is quite advantageous to the player (there is no disadvantage that the game effect is a big hit). Therefore, the player expects that [win] is displayed on the result display unit 178, that is, the result of the special symbol winning / judgment determination is an advantageous big hit, and that the first super production mode is continued after the big hit game is finished. And play a game. Further, even if [win] is not displayed and [continue] is displayed, the first super effect mode continues after that, so that the player can play with a sense of security. . Further, although not shown in the figure, it may have a pattern for displaying only [win] (one choice).

  FIG. 87 (e) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from the scene of FIG. 87 (d), and shows a scene in which [win] is displayed on the result display section as the result of the confrontation of the character G confrontation reach effect. ing. In addition, a hit (advantageous big hit) reach effect design [222] is displayed in the central portion of the display screen, and it is shown that a win (advantageous win) has been achieved as a result of the reach effect. Further, an effect image showing that the character X, which is a teammate character, has won the character G, which is an enemy character, is displayed. As a result, it is an advantageous big hit, a big hit game (third bonus or first bonus) is executed, and it is shown that after the big hit game is finished, the first super effect mode is set again. That is, it is shown that the result of the special symbol hit determination is the character G confrontation reach effect executed in the case of an advantageous big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit).

  Also, FIG. 87 (f) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from the scene of FIG. 87 (d), and a scene in which [Continue] is displayed in the result display section as the confrontation result of the character G confrontation reach effect. Is shown. Further, the detachment reach effect design [232] is displayed in the center portion of the display screen, and it is shown that the detachment result is out as a result of the reach effect. Further, the character "draw" indicating that the confrontation between the character X and the character G was a draw is displayed. This indicates that the first super effect mode continues after that without ending the first super effect mode (the fourth bonus is executed and shifting to the second count effect mode). That is, it indicates that the character G confrontation reach effect is executed when the result of the special symbol hit determination is out.

  FIG. 87 (g) shows a scene in which the character H confrontation reach effect 193 (second special game effect) is executed along with the variable display of the predetermined effect symbol in the first super effect mode 185. Further, in the approximate center of the display screen, a teammate character X174 and an enemy character H176, which face each other in the battle reach, are displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 87 (g), the option display section 179 displays [Victory] and [Continue] as options as in the case of the character G showdown reach effect, and does not display [Defeat]. .

  That is, in the character H confrontation reach effect (second special game effect) of the second embodiment, as in the case of the character G confrontation reach effect, [defeat] is not displayed as an option. Also, [Victory] is always displayed as an option. Therefore, the character H confrontation reach effect (second special game effect) is a reach effect indicating a situation that is quite advantageous to the player (no disadvantage will be a big hit as a result of the game effect). Although illustration is omitted, the result of the character H showdown reach effect is, as in FIG. 87 (e) or FIG. 87 (f), when the result is [win], an advantageous jackpot is executed and then the first supermarket is executed. When the effect mode is set again and [Continue], the first super effect mode is continued without executing the big hit game.

  FIG. 87 (h) shows a scene in which the character I confrontation reach effect 194 (second special game effect) is executed along with the variable display of the predetermined effect symbol in the first super effect mode 185. Further, a character X174, which is a ally character and a character I177, which is an enemy character, to be confronted in the confrontation reach are displayed in the approximate center of the display screen. In addition, as shown in FIG. 87 (h), the option display unit 179 displays [Victory] and [Continue] as options as in the case of the character G showdown reach effect, and does not display [Defeat]. ..

  That is, in the character I confrontation reach effect (second special game effect) of the second embodiment, like the character G confrontation reach effect, [defeat] is not displayed as an option. Also, [Victory] is always displayed as an option. Therefore, the character I confrontation reach effect (second special game effect) is also a reach effect showing a situation that is quite advantageous to the player (no disadvantage is a big hit as a result of the game effect). Although illustration is omitted, as for the result of the character I showdown reach effect, as in the case of FIG. 87 (e) or FIG. 87 (f), when the result is “win”, an advantageous jackpot is executed and then the first supermarket is executed. When the effect mode is set again and [Continue], the first super effect mode is continued without executing the big hit game.

  As described above, in the first super effect mode (first effect mode, specific effect mode), whichever of character G confrontation reach effect, character H confrontation reach effect, or character I confrontation reach effect is executed, [Loss] is not displayed as an option, and as a result, [Loss] is not displayed in the result display section. That is, in the first super effect mode, only the character A confrontation reach effect has a possibility of being a disadvantageous jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, and other game effects (character G confrontation) except for the character A confrontation reach effect. Reach production, character H showdown reach production, and character I showdown reach production) have no possibility of being a disadvantage jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player.

  As a result, when a game effect other than the character A confrontation reach effect (second special game effect) is executed, the possibility of a disadvantageous jackpot at that time is eliminated, and the player's sense of security is increased and the character A confrontation is performed. It is possible to increase the expectation for an advantageous jackpot when a game effect other than the reach effect (second special game effect) is executed. As shown in FIG. 85, the character G confrontation reach effect, the character H confrontation reach effect, and the character I confrontation reach effect differ in the possibility of being an advantageous jackpot reliability (advantageous jackpot reliability). Confrontation reach production is the most advantageous.

  Further, even if the character A confrontation reach effect is executed, there is an option of [Continue] that does not result in a disadvantageous jackpot, and there is also a possibility of an advantageous jackpot, although it is a slight possibility. As a result, when the character A confrontation reach effect (first special game effect) is executed, the tension to the disadvantageous jackpot is increased to enhance the enjoyment of the game, and the expectation for the continuation of the first super effect mode and the advantageous jackpot. It becomes possible to maintain high entertainment level for a long time by improving the game.

  In the first super effect mode, the value of the character A (specific character) in the first super effect mode is set low by setting the game effect in which the character A appears to be the most unfavorable game effect for the player. ing. On the other hand, as described above, the "specific reach effect", which is a game effect that can be executed in the normal effect mode and in which the character A common to the character A confrontation reach effect appears, has a relatively high jackpot reliability. At the same time, a big hit is always an advantageous big hit (set to a high-accuracy low base state and a super effect mode).

  That is, the specific reach effect (refer to FIGS. 78 and 79, etc., the third special game effect) executed in the normal effect mode (third effect mode), and the character A confrontation reach effect executed in the first super effect mode. (Refer to FIG. 87 and the like, the first special game effect) is a game effect (reach effect) in which the character A appears, but the value of the game effect for the player (a result advantageous to the player and The probability of winning, and the reliability of winning jackpots) are completely different. As a result, depending on the effect mode (normal effect mode, first super effect mode) to be executed and the game state (low accurate low base state, high accurate low base state), the value of the game effect in which the same character A appears (big hit reliability) , Advantageous jackpot reliability, and the possibility of giving advantageous results to the player). Further, as a result, the player's excitement (tension) when the game effect (reach effect) in which the character A appears is executed is increased depending on the effect mode and the game state, and the game effect is diversified to improve the game. It is possible to prevent getting tired.

  In addition, by allowing the player to arbitrarily select the effect mode that can be executed in the super effect mode, when the effect mode such as the first effect effect is not desired, the second effect effect mode is selected. You can play games. As a result, it is possible to provide a game effect according to the taste of the player, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game for various players. In the first super effect mode, there is a possibility that the jackpot is a big hit only when a specific game effect (character A confrontation reach) is executed, and it is a big hit when another game effect is executed. By excluding the possibility, the production mode is given with the highest priority on which game production is executed.

  On the other hand, in the second super effect mode, even if any of a plurality of game effects (J-reach, K-reach, A-reach, L-reach) is executed, there is a possibility of being an advantageous jackpot or a disadvantage. Therefore, the possibility of an advantageous jackpot is different depending on the game effect to be executed. As a result, no matter which of the plurality of game effects is executed, it is possible to view the game effect with a certain degree of expectation for the advantageous jackpot. On the contrary, whichever of the plurality of game effects is executed, it is possible to see the game effects with a certain degree of anxiety that a big hit occurs. Further, as a result, it is possible to enhance the player's excitement (tension) and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

[Other execution mode of game profit acquisition production]
Next, with reference to FIG. 88 to FIG. 94, another execution mode of the game profit acquisition effect of the second embodiment will be described. As described above, the game profit acquisition effect is an effect that indicates how much game profit is acquired in the specific state when the game state is in the specific state. The specific state (specific period) is a so-called condominium state (condominium period), and in the low-probability low base state (state A), the gaming state becomes the low-probability low base state again when the big hit occurs. Up to (excluding jackpot gaming state) state. This is an effect showing the amount of game profit obtained in this specific state. Further, in another execution mode of the game profit acquisition effect which will be described later, the total gained game profit acquired in the specific state (specific period) and the unit period of the specific state (specific period) (the period including one jackpot game) ), The unit gained game profit, and the first image display device 7 (second display device), the second image display device 71 (first display device), and / or the third image according to the game situation. The images are displayed on the display device 72 (first display device).

  That is, the gained game profit amounts for different periods are displayed on a plurality of separately arranged display devices, and different display devices are displayed according to the game situation. It is preferable that at least one of the plurality of separately arranged display devices is provided inside and outside the game area. As a result, the player can easily and surely grasp the game profit obtained in the desired period according to the game situation. It should be noted that "display according to the game situation" is displayed according to a game state such as a low-probability high base state, a high-probability high base state, a high-probability low base state, a normal production mode, a first super production mode. , The second super effect mode, the first count effect mode, the second count effect mode, and so on. The display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 and the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72 may display the effect symbol 8 depending on the game situation, such as when performing the reach effect. The display screen 71a is also referred to as a second effect symbol display unit, and the display screen 72a is also referred to as a third effect symbol display unit.

  FIG. 88 (a) shows a scene in which the variable display of the effect symbol (first special symbol) is being executed in the low accurate low base state (normal state). As shown in FIG. 88 (a), in the low accurate low base state (normal state), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (first image display device, first effect display device) provided in the approximate center of the game area 3 On the (first display screen), a production design display area 7b (production design display section) for displaying the production design 8 and a production hold display area (display for holding production (first production hold 9a or second production hold 9b)) The first effect hold display area 9c or the second effect hold display area 9d) is provided. Further, on the display screen 71a (second display screen) of the second image display device 71 provided in the outer area (first outer area) of the game area 3 (on the left side of the paper in FIG. 88), or If the big hit game is executed after the power is turned on, the first change number display section 203 (the first bonus change number display section, the execution period display) that displays the change display number of the effect symbol from the end of the previous big hit game Section) is provided.

  Here, it is shown that the variable display of the effect symbol 78 times has been completed since the last big hit game ended (currently the 79th variable display is being executed). In addition, on the display screen 72a (third display screen) of the third image display device 72 provided in the outer area (the second outer area) of the game area 3 (on the right side in the drawing of FIG. 88), the effect indicating the current effect mode is displayed. A mode display unit 171 is provided. Then, the characters of "normal mode" indicating that the current effect mode is the normal effect mode 181 are displayed.

  FIG. 88 (b) shows a scene in which the above-described “Thunder reach (specific reach effect)” is executed as a reach effect (game effect) while the variable display of the same effect symbol 8 as in FIG. 88 (a) is being executed. Showing. At this time (during the reach effect execution), the effect mode display unit 171, the first effect hold display unit 9c, and the variable display unit 9e are erased, and the first display screen, the second display screen, and the third display screen are displayed. A game effect (reach effect) is displayed using three display screens (substantially the whole). However, as shown in FIG. 88 (b), etc., such other display units (effect mode display unit 171, effect hold display unit, variable display unit, total earned profit display unit and second earned profit display described later). Even in a situation in which a copy etc. is temporarily not displayed, the first fluctuation number display unit 203 maintains the display without being erased. This makes it possible to clearly inform the player of the game period from the previous big hit game (game period from power-on) regardless of the game situation.

  In addition, this makes it possible for the player to check how long he / she has played the game without going through the big hit game, and prevent excessive investment in the game. In addition, even when the player is not playing the game (during the demonstration image display, etc.), the first variation count display unit 203 is not erased, and the display is maintained. This allows other players to use the information as reference information when selecting a gaming machine. Even when the game information is not displayed on the island facility or the like, the game information is always displayed on the game machine, so that the game information can be clearly and surely notified.

  88 (c) shows the result of the variable display of the same effect symbol 8 as FIG. 88 (b), and the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 88 (b) is a big hit, and a big hit effect symbol (“777”). )) Is stopped and displayed. In addition, the bonus type display portion 201 displays the characters "first bonus" for notifying that the jackpot type is the first bonus advantageous to the player. In the normal state (low-probability low base state), since it is executed by the first special symbol hit determination, the jackpot type advantageous to the player here is the 4R first jackpot. The first bonus (big hit) advantageous to the player means that the effect mode (game state) after the big hit game is finished is transferred to the super effect mode (high-accuracy low base state). Also at this time, the first variation number display unit 203 maintains the display without being erased.

  FIG. 89 (d) shows a scene during execution of the big hit game based on the big hit shown in FIG. 88 (c) (4R first big hit game) (3R). Based on executing the big hit game from the normal state, a special period (long-sleeved holiday period) is started. Then, during the special period, the total gained profit display unit 164 (second profit information display unit) that displays the game profits acquired during the special period, and the second gained profit display unit 204 (first profit information display unit) ), And are provided. The special period ends when the game state is set to the normal state (low-probability low base state) again during the period excluding the big hit game. As shown in FIG. 89 (d), in the game situation during the big hit game, the center of the upper part of the display screen 7a (first display screen) of the first image display device 7 provided in the game area is acquired in the special period. A total gained profit display unit 164 showing the total number of game profits is provided (T: 00350pt). This means that 350 game balls have been paid out during the special period.

  Further, on the lower right of the display screen 7a, there is provided a second earned profit display unit 204 showing the total number of game profits obtained in the big hit game being executed (350/600). This means that the maximum number of game balls (number of prize balls) to be paid out in this jackpot game is 600, which means that 350 game balls are currently paid out. During the big hit game in the first hit (the big hit that occurs in the normal state), the value displayed on the total earned profit display unit 164 and the value displayed on the second earned profit display unit 204 are the same value. Therefore, only one of them may be displayed, or both may be displayed as in the present embodiment. Further, in this embodiment, only at the time of the first win, the "maximum number of game balls (number of prize balls) to be paid out in the big hit game" is displayed, and thereafter, only the number of game balls actually paid out is displayed. Is displayed. Further, the number of rounds of the big hit game being executed is shown on the upper left of the display screen 7a (3R: third round).

  Further, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, a firing direction display unit 162 showing the firing direction (firing area) of the game ball is provided. In addition, a jackpot game effect such as a predetermined character picture or background picture is displayed in a substantially central portion (other display area) of the display screen 7a. Further, on the second display screen 71a, the first variation count display unit 203 is displayed without being erased. Thereby, during the big hit game, from the previous big hit game to the big hit game of this time, the variable display (special symbol hit / miss judgment) of the effect symbol of the value (78 times) displayed on the first variation number display unit 203 is required. You can easily check what you have done. In addition, in other display areas of the second display screen 71a and the third display screen 72a, a big hit game effect such as a predetermined character pattern or background pattern is displayed.

  FIG. 89 (e) shows a scene in which the effect symbols are variably displayed a predetermined number of times in the highly accurate low base state set after the big hit game shown in FIG. 89 (d) is finished. Specifically, from the display of the first variation number display unit 203 (14 times), it is possible to grasp that the variation display of the effect symbol has been performed 14 times after the jackpot game shown in FIG. 89 (d) is finished. Since the gaming state after the jackpot game shown in FIG. 89 (d) is set to the high-accuracy low base state (since it is not set to the low-accuracy low base state), the special period is continuing. Here, in the second embodiment, as described above, the production modes of the super production mode include the first super production mode 182 and the second super production mode 183, and the player in the predetermined selection period. By selecting, it is possible to select one of the effect modes. The effect mode selection period and selection method in the high-accuracy low-base state are the same as those in the first embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted. On the second display screen 71a, a second effect mode display unit 202 (selection mode display unit) that displays the effect mode selected by the player and an effect mode display unit 171 (first effect that displays the effect mode that is being executed). Mode display section).

  Characters of “super effect mode” indicating that it is the super effect mode are displayed on the effect mode display portion 171, and the first super effect mode is indicated on the second effect mode display portion 202 as the effect mode of the super effect mode. The characters "1st SM" indicating that the item has been selected are displayed. Further, in the gaming state of the high-accuracy low base state (first super production mode), at the bottom of the display screen 7a, the total earned profit display unit 164 (which indicates the total number of gaming profits acquired in the special period (second period)). A second profit information display section) is provided (T: 00720pt). This means that 720 game balls were paid out during the special period. From the scene shown in FIG. 89 (d), 370 game balls are additionally paid out during the remaining period of the big hit game and the period of 14 revolutions in the first super effect mode.

  Further, in the substantially central portion of the display screen 7a, the effect for the first super effect mode such as a character pattern simulating an airplane is displayed. A second effect hold display section 9d is provided on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. Further, the third display screen 72a is provided with a second acquired profit display unit 204 (first profit information display unit). In the second earned profit display unit 204, in the gaming profit obtained in the big hit game shown in FIG. 89 (d), in the highly accurate low base state after the end of the big hit game shown in FIG. 89 (e) (small hit game Display the game profit by adding the acquired game profit. In other words, the second earned profit display unit 204 displays the total amount of game profit obtained in the period of one big hit game and the period until the next big hit game occurs from the big hit game. The period from the start of this one big hit game to the start of the next big hit game is also called a unit special period (first period), and the game profit obtained in this unit special period is the unit game profit (first profit information). ).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 89 (e), the second gained profit display unit 204 displays the unit game profit and the type of the previous big hit (big hit game) (first B: first). Bonus). As a result, it is possible to easily understand what kind of big hit game and how much game profit has been obtained in the subsequent gaming state in the unit special period. Further, the change (increase) in the display (value) of the unit game profit continues as long as the first super effect mode shown in FIG. 89 (e) continues, and the game profit (prize ball) is given by the occurrence of the small hit game. When it is paid (paid out), the value of the total earned profit display unit 164 of the display screen 7a and the value of the second earned profit display unit 204 of the third display screen 72a increase in synchronization (by the same number). .

  Note that in the scene shown in FIG. 89 (e), since the unit special period is the first time in the special period, the value of the total earned profit display unit 164 and the value of the second earned profit display unit 204 match. .. If the special period continues for a long time and a plurality of unit special periods occur in response to the big hit game occurring a plurality of times, these values will be different.

  89 (f), the first super effect mode (high-accuracy low base state) shown in FIG. 89 (e) continues, and the 29th effect symbol from the end of the previous jackpot game (FIG. 89 (d)). The scene in which variable display is being executed is shown. As shown in FIG. 89 (f), the reach effect is generated in the 29th effect variable display of effect symbols. When the reach effect is generated in the first super effect mode (high-accuracy low base state), the second effect mode display unit 202 and the effect mode displayed on the display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a, respectively. The display unit 171, the total earned profit display unit 164, the second effect hold display unit 9d, the firing direction display unit 162, and the second earned profit display unit 204 are the display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a. Will be hidden (erased) from. Then, the reach effect is displayed on all the display screens of the display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a. It should be noted that even during the reach effect, the first variation number display unit 203 is not erased and remains displayed.

  FIG. 90 (g) shows the result of the variable display of the same effect symbol 8 as FIG. 89 (f), and the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 89 (f) is a big hit, and a big hit effect symbol (“777 )) Is stopped and displayed. In addition, the bonus type display portion 201 displays the character "third bonus" for notifying that the jackpot type is the third bonus advantageous to the player. In the first super production mode (high-accuracy low base state), the second special symbol hit determination is executed, so the jackpot type advantageous to the player here is the 15R third jackpot. In addition, the 4R fourth big hit is also a big hit comparatively advantageous to the player. The third bonus (big hit) that is advantageous to the player is a big hit game with the largest game profit that can be obtained. It means to shift to the base state). Also at this time, the first variation number display unit 203 maintains the display without being erased.

  FIG. 90 (h) shows a scene during execution (13R) of the big hit game (15R third big hit game) based on the big hit shown in FIG. 90 (g). The special period started with the start of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 89 (d) is continuing. As shown in FIG. 90 (h), in the game situation during the big hit game, a total earned profit display unit 164 is provided at the center of the upper part of the display screen 7a, the total earned profit display unit 164 indicating the total number of game profits acquired in the special period (T. : 02850pt). This means that 2850 game balls have been paid out during the special period. Specifically, between the game profit obtained in the previous big hit game shown in FIG. 89 (d) and 28 revolutions of the first super effect mode (high-accuracy low base state) until the present big hit game is executed. When the gaming profit shown in the second earned profit display unit 204 in FIG. 90 (h) is added to the gaming profit obtained by adding the gaming profit obtained in the small hit game to the value of the total earned profit display unit 164 (T : 02850pt).

  Further, on the lower right of the display screen 7a, there is provided a second earned profit display unit 204 showing the total number of gaming profits obtained in the big hit game being executed (FIG. 90 (h)) (01950pt). This means that, in the big hit game being executed, 1950 game balls are currently paid out. As shown in FIG. 90 (h) and the like, in the present embodiment, the total earned profit display unit 164 and the second earned profit display unit are displayed during the variation display of the effect symbol such as the high-accuracy low base state and during the big hit game. The display device for displaying 204 is different. As a result, the profit display unit is set at an appropriate position according to the game situation, the player is notified of the game profit acquired in the desired period accurately and surely, and the player can grasp it.

  In FIG. 90 (i), the effect mode (game state) after the big hit game shown in FIG. 90 (h) is set to the super effect mode (high-accuracy low base state), and the super effect mode (high-accuracy low base state) is set. ) Shows a scene in which the variable display of the effect symbol is executed 22 times (a scene during the variable display of the effect symbol in the 23rd time). As shown in the second display screen 71 (a), the effect mode is set to the super effect mode, and the second super effect mode is set by the player's selection (second SM: second super effect mode). .

  Further, in the scene shown in FIG. 90 (i), since the second unit special period is being executed as described above, the plurality of second earned profit display units 204 are provided on the third display screen 72a. There is. At the top of the third display screen 72a, the gained game profit in the unit special period being executed is shown (3B, 2960pt). As a result, it is possible to understand that the big hit game that has occurred during the unit special period this time is the third bonus, and that 2960 game profits are currently awarded during the unit special period this time. Further, below (immediately below), the gained game profit in the previous unit special period is shown (1B, 28, 885pt). When the unit special period ends, a second variation count display unit 205 (a second bonus variation count display unit, a period information display unit) is added (additional) to the second earned profit display unit 204. Then, by viewing the additional information, it is possible to grasp how long it took from the end of the big hit game to the occurrence of the next big hit game (whether the number of Nankai changes was required) in the unit special period. .. By this, the big hit game that occurred in the last unit special period is the first bonus, the number of times of the variable display of the effect symbol between the big hit games (the number of times of special symbol success / failure determination) is 28 (period information). , It is possible to grasp that 885 game profits have been obtained in the previous unit special period.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 90 (i), when the unit special period becomes plural due to a plurality of big hit games occurring in the special period, a plurality of second earned profit display units on the third display screen 72a. 204 is displayed. In this case, the second earned profit display unit 204 corresponding to the unit special period being executed (continued) is displayed more conspicuously than the second earned profit display unit 204 corresponding to the already ended unit special period. Specifically, it is displayed in a larger size than the one that is currently being executed, or it is possible to add decorations (addition of a picture, addition of a frame, etc.) that are not in the one that is being executed. , It can be displayed in bold.

Further, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, a total gained profit display unit 164 is provided, and the amount of game profit obtained during the entire special period, that is, the period in which all unit special periods are added is displayed (T: 03845pt). ). Specifically, the two second earned profit display units 204 of the third display screen 72a
When 2960 and 885 displayed in are added, it becomes the value (3845) displayed in the total earned profit display unit 164. Further, the change (display) of the unit game profit displayed on the second earned profit display unit 204 corresponding to the unit special period being executed continues as long as the super production mode continues. Therefore, when the game profit (prize ball) is given by the occurrence of the small hit game, the unit special during the execution of the third display screen 72a is linked with the increase of the value of the total gained profit display portion 164 of the display screen 7a. The value of the (topmost) second acquired profit display portion 204 corresponding to the period is increased by the same number. It should be noted that the value of the second earned profit display portion 204 corresponding to the finished unit special period in the lower part has not been changed because it has already been determined.

  FIG. 91 (j) shows that the second super effect mode (high-accuracy low base state) shown in FIG. 90 (i) continues, and the 45th effect symbol from the end of the previous jackpot game (FIG. 90 (h)). The scene where the variable display is finished is shown. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91 (j), a reach effect is generated in the variable display of the 45th effect symbol, and a teammate character is defeated by an enemy character in the confrontation effect in the reach effect, which is a big hit against the player. Is shown. Although illustration is omitted, after that, a jackpot game (fourth bonus) that is disadvantageous to the player is executed based on the jackpot, and the gaming state after the jackpot game is finished is a low-probability-high base state or a high-probability-high base. The high accurate low base state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, ends.

  Also, in the 4th bonus (2R 5th big jackpot game, 2R 6th big jackpot game, 2R 7th big jackpot game, or 2R 8th big jackpot game), it is possible to obtain the game profit, but in comparison with other big jackpot games And a small amount. Therefore, even during the execution of the big hit game, it is difficult for the player to recognize the execution as compared with other big hit games. In addition, for the unit special period including the big hit game related to the fourth bonus, the corresponding second earned profit display unit 204 does not display the earned profit. This makes it difficult for the player to notice the occurrence of the fourth bonus (2R fifth big hit game, 2R sixth big hit game, 2R seventh big hit game, or 2R eighth big hit game), and makes the game less attractive. It is possible to prevent. In addition, when a gaming profit is obtained in the big hit game related to the fourth bonus, even if it is displayed only on the total earned profit display unit 164 without being added to the second earned profit display unit 204 (without being displayed). Good. In addition, the game profit obtained in the jackpot game related to the fourth bonus may be added to the second earned profit display unit 204 corresponding to the previous unit special period as the one obtained in the previous unit special period. In the present embodiment, when the gaming profit is obtained in the jackpot game related to the fourth bonus, neither the second earned profit display unit 204 nor the total earned profit display unit 164 is additionally displayed.

  In the scene shown in FIG. 91 (k), a jackpot game that is disadvantageous to the player is executed based on the jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player shown in FIG. 91 (j), and as a production mode after the jackpot game ends. The scene in which the count effect mode is set is shown. As described above, the result of the second special symbol hit determination is disadvantageous big hit (2R fifth big hit, 2R sixth big hit, 2R seventh big hit, or 2R eighth big hit), the count set after the big hit game The effect mode is the second count effect mode. Further, the result of the first special symbol hit determination is disadvantageous big hit (4R second big hit), the count effect mode set after the end of the big hit game is the first count effect mode. As shown in FIG. 91 (k), in the second count effect mode 185, the remaining period display unit 206 is provided at the upper part of the display screen 7a, and the remaining period display unit 206 displays the variable number of times the effect symbol is displayed (special By displaying the remaining number of times of (symbol judgment), it is possible to play the game while grasping the remaining period of the second count effect mode.

  On the other hand, in the first count effect mode 184, the remaining period display unit 206 that displays the remaining period (number of times) of the first count effect mode except for the time just before the end of the first count effect mode (for example, 5 times before the end). It does not have it (FIGS. 94 (e) and (f)). This point is that the display modes are partially different between the first count effect mode 184 and the second count effect mode 185. Further, in the game situation in which the production mode (game state) is set to the countdown mode (low accurate high base state or high accurate high base state), the total earned profit display unit 164 is provided at the bottom of the display screen 7a. There is. Further, the third display screen 72a is provided with three (plural) second earned profit display units 204. Since the count effect mode is currently in progress, the character "C mode" indicating the count mode is displayed on the second highest profit display portion 204 at the top. As described above, in the big hit game that sets the count mode, and in the count mode (the low-probability high base state or the high-probability high base state), since the game profit that can be acquired is small, the second profit acquisition display unit 204 Do not show profits earned on.

  Further, the second earned profit display section 204 at the top of the third display screen 72a shows the unit special period currently in progress, and the second earned profit display section 204 below the second earned profit display section 204 shows the previously completed unit special period. Further, the second earned profit display portion 204 therebelow indicates the unit special period two times before, which has already ended. In the present embodiment, a maximum of three second earned profit display portions 204 can be displayed on the third display screen 72a, and when a big hit game (unit special period) occurs four times or more, the oldest ones in order. It is supposed to be erased. Note that the number of the second acquired profit display units 204 that can be displayed on the third display screen 72a may be any number of four or more.

  FIG. 91 (l) is the 40th time from the end of the previous jackpot game (FIG. 91 (j)) when the count effect mode (low accurate high base state or high accurate high base state) shown in FIG. 91 (k) continues. The result of the variable display of the effect design of shows the scene where the big hit is achieved. FIG. 92 (m) shows a scene during execution (10R) of the big hit game (15R third big hit game) based on the big hit shown in FIG. 91 (l). The special period started with the start of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 89 (d) is continuing. As shown in FIG. 92 (m), in the game situation during the big hit game, a total earned profit display unit 164 is provided at the center of the upper part of the display screen 7a, the total earned profit display unit 164 indicating the total number of game profits obtained in the special period (T. : 05385pt). Further, on the lower right of the display screen 7a, there is provided a second earned profit display unit 204 showing the total number of game profits obtained in the big hit game being executed (FIG. 92 (m)) (01450pt).

  In FIG. 92 (n), the effect mode (game state) after the jackpot game shown in FIG. 92 (m) is set to the super effect mode (high-accuracy low base state), and the super effect mode (high-accuracy low base state). ) Shows a scene in which the variable display of the effect symbol is executed four times (a scene during execution of the variable display of the effect symbol in the fifth time). As shown on the second display screen 71a, the first super production mode is set by the player's selection (first SM).

  Further, in the scene shown in FIG. 90 (n), since the fourth unit special period in the special period is being executed, the number of second earned profit display units 204 that can be displayed on the third display screen 72a is exceeded. There is. Therefore, the oldest second earned profit display unit 204 is deleted, and the second earned profit display unit 204 corresponding to the unit special period being newly executed is provided at the top (3B, 2350pt). Further, it is possible to grasp from the "C mode" displayed on the second earned profit display section 204 therebelow that the special period is continued by pulling back (the big hit occurs) during the count effect mode. In the flow described above, the total earned profit display unit 164 and the second earned profit display unit 204 are displayed on a predetermined display screen according to the game situation.

  FIG. 93 (a) shows a scene in which a big hit occurs in the normal state (low accurate low base state), and the big hit effect design (“666”) is stopped and displayed. The "second bonus" is displayed on the bonus type display portion 201 of the display screen 7a. In the second bonus, the effect mode (game state) after the big hit game is set to the super effect mode (high-accuracy low base state) according to the result of the game effect (confrontation effect) executed during the big hit game. There is a case where it is set to the count production mode (low accurate high base state). The count effect mode in this case is the first count effect mode 184.

  FIG. 93 (b) shows a jackpot game (second bonus) executed based on the jackpot shown in FIG. 93 (a). During the final round of the jackpot game or with the end of the final round, a victory effect in which an ally character defeats an enemy character is executed, and it is shown that the super effect mode (high-accuracy low base state) is set after the jackpot game is over. Has been done. In FIG. 93 (c), the first super effect mode (high-accuracy low base state) is set after the jackpot game shown in FIG. 93 (b) is completed, and in the first super effect mode (high-accuracy low base state), The scene which performed the variable display (special symbol winning / absence determination) of the predetermined number of times (14 times) is shown.

  FIG. 94 (d) shows a jackpot game (second bonus) executed based on the jackpot shown in FIG. 93 (a). During the final round of the big hit game or with the end of the final round, the defeat effect in which the enemy character defeats the teammate character is executed, and it is shown that the count effect mode (low accurate high base state) is set after the end of the big hit game. Has been done. In FIG. 94 (e), a count effect mode (low accurate high base state) is set after the jackpot game shown in FIG. 94 (d) is set, and a predetermined number of times (35) is set in the count effect mode (low accurate high base state). It shows a scene in which the variable display (special symbol winning / absence determination) of the effect symbol is performed. As described above, the count effect mode shown in FIG. 94 (e) is the first count effect mode 184, and is displayed until the end of the first count effect mode 184 (a predetermined number of times within the remaining 5 times). The remaining period display section is not set on the screen 7a. This is because the execution period set in the second count effect mode has two types of 50 times or 100 times, whereas the execution period set in the first count effect mode is only one type of 100 times. Depends on

  FIG. 94 (f) shows a scene in which the variable effect display of the effect symbols is executed a predetermined number of times from the count effect mode shown in FIG. 94 (e), and the count effect mode is advanced. As shown in the first variation count display section 203 of the second display screen 71a, 96 variations of the effect symbol have been executed since the end of the previous big hit game (special symbol judgment), and the count effect mode is being executed. When the variable display of the effect symbols is performed for the remaining three times except the variable display of No., the process ends. In order to indicate that the end time of this count effect mode is near, in the present embodiment, when the remaining number of times is 3, the remaining period display portion 206 is provided on the display screen 7a, and the last 3 times, the last 2 times, and the last 1 time. Is displayed. This makes it possible to clearly inform the player of the end time of the count effect mode in advance.

  As described above, according to the game situation, the game profit amount obtained in different periods of the special period (long-sleeved holiday period) is displayed on each of the plurality of display devices that are separately arranged, so that the player has a desired period. It is possible to easily and surely grasp the game profit obtained in the (special period or unit special period). Also, by changing the display device to be displayed according to the game situation, it is possible to easily and surely grasp the game profit.

[Other aspects]
In the present embodiment, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed on the effect symbol display unit are special symbols (first special symbol or later described as a main subject of the game in the game state according to the game state). It is assumed that the variable display is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol). That is, one effect symbol (three digits) is displayed on the effect symbol display unit, and it is synchronized with the first special symbol by synchronizing with one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol according to the game state. It has a case and a case where it is synchronized with the second special symbol. By changing to such a mode, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed, the variable display of the first effect symbol is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol, and the second effect symbol is the second special symbol. The variable display may be performed in synchronization with the variable display. Further, when displaying both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol, the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol (one special symbol) set as the subject of the game in the game state is displayed large (main May be displayed in small size, the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol (the other special symbol) which is not the subject of the game. Specifically, the display area is 1/5 or less. In addition, instead of displaying both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol at all times, both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed depending on the game state or the game situation, and There may be a case where one of the effect design and the second effect design (the main pattern) is displayed.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the above-mentioned gaming machine, a "variable ball entrance" capable of changing between a ball entry possible state in which a game ball can enter and a ball entry impossible state in which a game ball cannot enter, When the result of the first win / fail judgment or the second win / fail judgment is a hit, "special game execution means" capable of executing a special game that allows the variable entrance to enter the ball can be provided. Further, the "second starting port" may be a variable starting port that can be changed between the first mode and the second mode in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than in the first mode. Also, a game state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable start port is a predetermined frequency (first game state), and a game in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable start port is higher than the game state. A state (second game state) and a "game state setting means" to be set can be provided. Here, 0 is included in the “predetermined frequency”.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of times of opening the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening in one round is one, but the number of opening of the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening in one round is plural. The number of rounds may be one or may be different. In addition, in the present embodiment, the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold are control processes that can be changed simultaneously, but the control process of prioritizing the second special figure hold over the first special figure hold A so-called special figure 2 priority control process, a control process in which the first special figure hold is given priority over the second special figure hold, and a so-called special figure 1 priority control process may be performed. In addition, the priority is not set for the completion of the first special map reservation and the completion of the second special map reservation, and the first special map reservation and the second special map reservation are sequentially deleted from the oldest stored one. It may be a control process, that is, a so-called entry sequence (memory sequence) digestion control process.

  In addition, a pachinko game machine of a type that does not have probability setting means (no high probability state), has a specific area inside, and is in a ball entry possible state and game ball entry It is equipped with a big winning opening that can be changed to an impossible ball entering state, and the big winning opening is in a state where it is possible to enter for a predetermined time when the result of the success / failure determination based on entering the starting opening is a small hit, When a game ball enters the special winning opening in the ball-possible state and the game ball passes through a specific area, a big hit is played, and the big hit game is executed, which is also applied to a pachinko gaming machine to which a predetermined privilege is given. This pachinko gaming machine is a so-called 1-type 2-class mixing machine, and when the result of the hit determination based on the ball entering the starting opening is a big hit, the big hit game is executed without passing through a specific area. Further, as a privilege, a high base state in which the frequency of game balls entering the starting opening is increased can be cited. In addition, it is possible to have a first starting port and a second starting port, and to generate a high base state in which the frequency of entering the second starting port is increased. The present invention can be applied to all these types of gaming machines.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the big hit probability can be set to the low probability (first probability) or the high probability (second probability) by deactivating / activating the probability varying function, but the kind of jackpot probability (number) Is not limited to this, and it is possible to set three or more types of probabilities, such as a medium probability (third probability) higher than a low probability (first probability) and lower than a high probability (second probability). Good. Furthermore, the first low probability and the first high probability (first probability condition), the second low probability and the second high probability (second probability condition), the third low probability and the third high probability (third probability condition), etc. , Providing a plurality of types of probability conditions that define the relationship between low probability and high probability, any of the plurality of types of probability conditions can be arbitrarily set (selectable) when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, for example. Good.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the latest acquisition random number value (acquisition information) stored in the special figure reservation storage unit is read and the read acquisition random number value (acquisition information) is determined for the preliminary determination based on the start-up ball. (Preliminary determination) is performed (“Starting ball entry process (S205)” (see FIGS. 11 and 13)), but the method of the preliminary determination is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the special figure reservation storage unit, an area (acquisition information storage unit) for storing acquisition information (that is, acquisition information acquired on the basis of a starting ball) to be subjected to pre-determination is provided as a main control unit or sub-control. It may be provided in a RAM of a unit and determine (preliminary determination) the acquired information stored in the storage area (predetermination storage unit). In this case, the acquired information used for the preliminary determination (acquired information stored in another storage area) can be deleted by storing the result of the preliminary determination in the RAM of the main control unit or the sub-control unit. Alternatively, the acquisition information stored in the special figure reservation storage unit may not be determined in advance, but the acquisition information acquired based on the starting ball may be determined in advance. That is, the acquisition information may be determined in advance before being stored in the special figure reservation storage unit. In this case, it is not necessary to provide an area for storing the acquisition information to be subjected to the preliminary determination separately from the special figure reservation storage unit, and it is not necessary to read the acquisition information stored in the special figure reservation storage unit for the preliminary determination. Absent.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, in the production mode D (state C, specific game state), when the specific period is started under the situation where three or more small hit holdings are continuously stored, during the specific period Is displayed when the number of prize balls image S and the addition of the prize ball count image C2 (second profit effect) are displayed based on the number of balls entered into the big winning hole for small hits, etc., and when the specific period ends, the prize is awarded. The production in which the number of won prize balls shown by the ball count image C2 is added (summed) to the number of won prize balls of the prize ball count image C1 (total number of won prize balls, total number of won prize balls) It was. On the other hand, when a new second special figure hold (ball entry into the third starting opening 26) occurs during the specific period, and the hold is determined to be a small hit hold by the preliminary determination (hold look ahead). The specific period currently being executed may be extended. For example, it is assumed that a specific period is started under the condition that four small hit holdings are stored in succession, and two small hit holdings are exhausted after the start of the specific period. At this time, the special figure 2 reserved ball number is "2". In that situation, if a new second special figure hold occurs and the special figure 2 hold ball count becomes "3", and it is determined in advance that the hold is a small hit hold, a specific period counter (see S5005) “+1” (1 is added). As a result, the specific period is extended until the newly generated (stored) small hit hold is exhausted and the small hit game relating to the small hit hold is completed. Or, in the same way, after the specified period has started, 2 small hits have been exhausted and the special map 2 reserved ball count has become "2", which corresponds to the special map 2 reserved ball count "3" It is assumed that the second special figure hold and the second special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 2 holding ball number “4” occur in quick succession. In addition, the second special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 2 number of reserved balls “3” is out of hold, and the second special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 2 number of reserved balls “4” is small hit in advance. It is assumed that the judgment is made. In this case, by adding "+2" (add 2) to the specific period counter (see S5005), the small hit hold corresponding to the special figure 2 holding ball number "4" is exhausted and the small hit variation and small hit game are completed. Until then, the specific period can be extended. As described above, by extending the specific period after the start of the specific period, the period during which the display of the prize ball number image S and the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 (second profit effect) are performed. Since it is extended, it is possible to further enhance the effect effect of the profit effect.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the two conditions of (1) that three or more small hit holdings are continuously stored are stored, and (2) that the winning lottery for the specific period is won is defined as the start of the specific period. However, the conditions for starting the specific period are not limited thereto. For example, a plurality (for example, 2 or more) of small hit holdings that are not continuous are stored, and a predetermined number or more (for example, 3 or more) of small hit holdings are stored regardless of whether or not they are continuous. That is, the starting condition for the specific period may be set. In this case, the start condition of the specific period is relaxed as compared with the embodiment, and the specific period is more likely to occur (start more easily). Further, the start condition of the specific period may be only (1) of (1) and (2) described above.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when a big hit that triggers the setting of the state C (high-accuracy low base state) occurs, the mode selection period for selecting the effect mode of the state C before shifting to the state C. When the big hit is 4R big hit (4R first big hit, 4R fourth big hit), the mode selection period occurs during the ending period of the big hit game, and 15R big hit (15R big hit). In the case of three big hits), the mode selection period is assumed to occur in a predetermined round game (14R start to 15R midway in this embodiment). On the other hand, when the number of big hit rounds that triggers the setting of state C is one kind of 10 rounds, for example, if the game state when the 10R big hit occurs is state A (left-handed game), the ending period A mode selection period may occur during the period B or C (right hitting game), and the mode selection period may occur at a predetermined round game (for example, 9R start to 10R midway). In the latter case, the notification that the mode selection period will start from the next round (notification before start of selection period) may be performed in the round before the mode selection period occurs. Further, the generation timing when the mode selection period is generated in the round game during the big hit game, that is, the round which is the mode selection period is not limited to the embodiment, and may be, for example, 5R start to 6R end. , May be generated in any round, such as only in the final round. Furthermore, when the mode selection period is generated during the big hit ending period, a notification that the mode selection period will be started after this is given in the round effect of the final round before the ending period is started (before the start of the selection period). You can

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect mode selection (selection of the effect mode C or D) in the mode selection period can be executed based on the operation of the effect button. On the other hand, for the effect mode selection in the mode selection period, any one of a plurality of predetermined effect modes may be automatically selected by lottery or the like on the sub-control side. In this case, for example, along with the start of the mode selection period, a roulette image (one mode of the mode selection screen) showing a plurality of effect modes divided into roulettes is displayed on the display screen of the image display device, and one of them is displayed. An effect (roulette effect) in which one effect mode is determined (selected) by roulette lottery may be performed as an effect (mode selection effect) during the mode selection period. Further, in the present embodiment, there are two kinds of effect modes in the state C (effect modes C and D), but there may be three or more kinds, and one effect mode may be selected from them.

  In addition, the mode (variation mode, stop mode, reach mode, etc.) relating to the variable display of the effect symbol shown in the above-described embodiment, the effect executed with the small hit in the state C (effect mode C, D). (Small hit prefetching effect, first profit effect, second profit effect, etc.), notice effect in display mode D (display of notice image), notification screen related to mode selection period, mode selection screen, etc. The modes of various effects are merely examples, and the modes of effects according to the present invention are not limited to the embodiments.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when displaying the notice image in the effect mode D, the notice image is displayed on the display screen 7a (the notice image display area U) of the image display device 7. On the other hand, the advance notice image may be displayed on another image display device included in the gaming machine, such as the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 and the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72. . Further, in addition to the image display device composed of a liquid crystal display device, display means (effect display device) for other effects such as a dot display device and a drum display device are provided, and the display device is used to perform the above-mentioned effect mode D. The notice production corresponding to the display of the notice image may be configured to be executable.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are provided on the front surface of the front frame 51 (pachinko game machine 1), of which the second image display device 71 is the front frame 51. Although the third image display device 72 is also rotatable in the same manner, the initial state (first state) and the tilted state in which the third image display device 72 is tilted toward the viewing window 51a (inside the front frame 51) ( Second state) may be adopted. In this way, the relationship with the hall equipment (CR unit, ball renting machine, other inter-facility equipment) adjacent to the right side of the gaming machine and the gaming machine (opening the frame) will not be hindered. Is possible.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, one image display device 7 (board side display means) is provided as the main liquid crystal (main display device) on the game board side (inside the game area), and the game machine frame side (outside the game area). Although two image display devices 71 and 72 (frame side display means) are provided as the sub liquid crystal (sub display device) in (), the sub liquid crystal (sub display device) may be provided on the game board 2 side. In this case, instead of the two sub liquid crystals (the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72) shown in the above-mentioned embodiment, two sub liquid crystals are used as the board side display means and the main liquid crystal (first image display device). It is provided on the left and right of the device 7), or one of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 (the left sub liquid crystal or the right sub liquid crystal) is replaced with one sub liquid crystal on the game board side. You can Alternatively, it is possible to provide one or more sub-liquid crystals on the game board side while providing the two sub-liquid crystals (second image display device 71, third image display device 72) shown in the above-described embodiment. is there. This also makes it possible to display various effects with a plurality of image display devices.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the display device (first image display device 7) provided on the game board side (inside the game area) and the display device (second image) provided on the game machine frame side (outside the game area). The display device 71 and the third image display device 72) are all image display devices each including a liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal display device), but the type of display device is not limited to the liquid crystal display. It is also possible to use a dot display, a 7-segment display, or the like. Further, different types of display devices may be mixed in the plurality of display devices including the main display device and the sub display device. Specifically, for example, of the first to third image display devices shown in the above-described embodiments, the first image display device 7 is a drum display or a 7-segment display, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device The image display device 72 may be a liquid crystal display as in the embodiment. Alternatively, the first image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device as in the embodiment, and one or both of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may be a dot display device. As a result, it is possible to display a variety of effects by a plurality of display devices having different display systems, and to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the variable display and the stop display of the effect symbol 8 are basically performed on the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal) located substantially in the center of the game board 2 (game area 3) (FIG. 54- 58, FIG. 67 to FIG. 73, FIG. 74 (a), FIG. 75, and FIG. 76), when performing the full-rotation effect, the left design (production design 8L) on the left display screen 71a (left sub liquid crystal), The central display screen 7a (main liquid crystal) is designed to display a middle design (effect design 8C), and the right display screen 72a (right sub liquid crystal) is displayed as a right design (production design 8R) (see the middle part of FIG. 77). .. That is, while the production design (stop production design) that is stopped and displayed after the variable display is displayed on the first image display device 7 in principle, in the full-rotation production, the middle image of the stop production design is the first image. The display device 7 (display screen 7a) is displayed, and the left symbol and the right symbol are displayed on the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a), respectively. On the other hand, in the variable effects other than the full-rotation effect, a part of the stop effect symbol may be displayed on the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72.

  For example, if the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped (temporarily stopped) and reach is established on the screen after starting the variable display of the effect symbol 8 on the first image display device 7, the reach state is configured. The left symbol and the right symbol (part of the stop effect symbol) to be displayed are displayed on the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, respectively. In that state, after the reach effect display is performed on the first image display device 7, the middle symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) displayed on the first image display device 7, and then the second image display device 71 is used. And, the left symbol and the right symbol displayed on the third image display device 72 are moved to the first image display device 7 and displayed side by side on the left and right of the middle symbol, and finally three effect symbols (stop effect symbol) Is confirmed. In addition, for example, the first image display device 7 indicates whether or not the effect design 8 is a probability variation big hit depending on the design type when the design design 8 is displayed in the big hit mode (doublet) (for example, in a red design If there is a probability jackpot, chance jackpot if it is a symbol other than the red pattern, etc.), if a so-called "re-lottery effect" is displayed when a jackpot mode that is not a probability jackpot is displayed, all of the above-mentioned when performing the re-lottery effect. Like the rotation effect, the middle symbol is displayed on the first image display device 7, the left symbol and the right symbol are displayed on the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, respectively, and each of these three symbols is displayed. A re-lottery effect is performed by synchronizing and scrolling display on the device. By providing an effect mode (variable effect pattern) such as the reach effect or the re-lottery effect, the display variation of the effect pattern 8 (stop effect pattern) that is stopped and displayed after the variable display is increased, and the variable effect is diversified. It becomes possible to

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 (sub display device) are liquid crystal display devices smaller than the first image display device 7 (main display device), The display screen had a substantially square shape (see FIG. 1). On the other hand, the sizes (screen sizes) of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 (sub display device) may be larger than those shown in the embodiment. Specifically, in the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7 (main display device) has a vertical length (vertical direction). Is a vertically long rectangular image display device (liquid crystal display device) substantially the same as or longer than the vertical length (vertical direction) of the front frame 51, which is provided on the front surface of the front frame 51 on the left side and the right side of the viewing window 51a. You may. Even in this case, the image display device provided on the left side of the front surface of the front frame 51 is rotatably supported similarly to the above-described embodiment. By providing such a vertically long rectangular image display device on the gaming machine frame side (front frame) as a sub-display device, it is possible to perform dynamic effect display that gives an impact to the player. In particular, the vertical length (vertical direction) of the display screen of the sub display device provided on the gaming machine frame side is defined as the vertical direction (vertical direction) of the display screen of the image display device (main display device) provided on the gaming board side. ) Is approximately equal to or longer than the length of), and the sub-displays are arranged side by side in the left-right direction (horizontal direction) of the main display device, so that a display effect is displayed on the display screen of the main display device. However, it is possible to perform an effect display (wide display in the horizontal (horizontal) direction) by expanding (enlarging) one or both of the sub-display devices located on the left and right.

  Specifically, for example, while the variation display (variation effect) of the effect symbol on the first image display device 7 (main display device) is being executed, the mode (variation effect pattern) of the fluctuation effect being executed is In the case of a specific mode, the display area of the background image (background screen) displayed on the display screen of the main display device is gradually expanded to the display screen of the image display device (sub display device) on the frame side ( It is possible to perform an effect such as expansion (expansion) or expansion (expansion) at once in the entire display screen. Alternatively, when the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed through the variable display on the main display device, the effect symbol is enlarged and displayed, and one of the left symbol and the right symbol out of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. It is also possible to display parts or all of them on the display screens of the left and right sub-display devices and display the middle symbols on the display screen of the main display device.

  Display contents from the main display device (board side display device) located in the approximate center of the game board (inside the game region) to the sub display devices (frame side display device) located on the left and right of the main display device (board side display device) In order to obtain the effect of the effect of enlarging (expanding) the (display area), the vertical (vertical) length of the display screen of the sub-display device should be at least the vertical (vertical) direction of the display screen of the main display device. The length is preferably 1/2 or more, and more preferably 2/3 or more.

[Other]
Hereinafter, inventions related to the embodiments (examples) disclosed in this specification will be disclosed as reference inventions.

(Reference invention 1)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that includes a display unit that performs variable display of identification information, and based on that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, a special game that is advantageous to a player can be executed. There is. In this type of gaming machine, it is possible to show (notify) the result of the variable display to the player by the display mode of the identification information displayed (derived display) when the variable display of the identification information is stopped. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-370).

  In the gaming machine provided with the display means as described above, the player pays attention to the identification information displayed on the display means to proceed with the game. However, the player becomes tired of the game while the variable display of the identification information is repeated many times, and it becomes difficult to keep the interest in the game. The Reference Invention 1 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to realize a display in a new mode that attracts a player's interest regarding the display of identification information, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. It is to plan.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of identification information based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and notifying the result of the variable display by the display mode of the identification information when the variable display is stopped,
Equipped with a variable display means capable of performing variable display of identification information,
The variable display means,
When the variable display of the identification information is stopped, the variable display is stopped in a predetermined stop mode,
It is characterized in that the stop mode at the time of stopping the variable display can be changed depending on the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display.

  According to such a gaming machine, while the variation display means performs the variation display of the identification information, when the variation display is stopped, the variation display is stopped in a predetermined stop mode. It is possible to change the stop mode depending on the display mode of the identification information that is displayed (derived display) when the variable display is stopped. Therefore, the player can pay attention to the stop mode when the variable display of the identification information stops, and can infer the display mode of the identification information to be displayed (derived display) thereafter. As a result, the player's interest can be attracted to the stop mode when the variable display is stopped, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 described above,
The identification information is composed of a plurality of symbols,
As a stop mode when stopping the variable display of the identification information, at least a first stop mode in which the stop order of the plurality of symbols is a predetermined first stop order, and a stop order of the plurality of symbols is the first A second stop mode in which the second stop order is different from the stop order,
As a display mode of the identification information when the variable display is stopped, at least a first display mode that triggers execution of a predetermined special game and a second display that triggers execution of another special game different from the predetermined special game. And a third display mode that does not trigger the execution of the special game,
The variable display means,
When the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is the first display mode, the variable display can be stopped in the first stop mode,
When the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is the second display mode or the third display mode, the variable display can be stopped in the second stop mode. Is.

  According to such a gaming machine, the identification information is composed of a plurality of symbols, and the variable display of the identification information is performed by the variable display of these symbols. In such a configuration, as a stop mode when stopping the variable display of the identification information, that is, a stop mode when stopping the variable display of the plurality of symbols, at least the stop order of the plurality of symbols is the first stop order. Has a first stop mode and a second stop mode that is a second stop order different from the first stop order (first stop mode), and identification information when the variable display is stopped. As a display mode of (a plurality of symbols), at least a first display mode which is a trigger for execution of a predetermined special game, a second display mode which is a trigger for execution of another special game different from the special game, and a special game And a third display mode that does not serve as an execution trigger of. Then, when the display mode of the identification information (a plurality of symbols) to be displayed (deriving display) by stopping the variable display is the first display mode, the variable display of the plurality of symbols is displayed in the first stop order ( It is possible to stop in the first stop mode), in the case of the second display mode or the third display mode, to stop the variable display of a plurality of symbols in the second stop order (second stop mode) Is possible. Therefore, the player can infer the type of special game that can be executed, whether or not it is executed, the possibility, etc. through the stop mode when the variable display of the identification information is stopped. As a result, it becomes possible to draw the player's attention to the stop mode when the variable display of the identification information is stopped, and fuel the expectation for the special game thereafter.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 described above,
As a display mode of the identification information when the variable display is stopped, a fourth display mode that does not trigger the execution of the special game is further provided,
As a stop mode when stopping the variable display of the identification information, further has a third stop mode in which the stop times of the plurality of symbols are substantially the same,
The variable display means,
When the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is the fourth display mode, the variable display can be stopped in the second stop mode or the third stop mode. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, as a display mode of the identification information (plural symbols) to be displayed (derived display) by stopping the variable display of the identification information (plural symbols), further execution of a special game When the display mode of the identification information (a plurality of symbols) to be displayed (derived display) due to the stop of the variable display is the fourth display mode, which has the fourth display mode that does not serve as a trigger, In the second stop mode or the third stop mode in which the stop timings (stop timings) of the plurality of symbols are substantially the same, the variable display of the plurality of symbols can be stopped. Therefore, when the display mode that does not trigger the execution of the special game is derived and displayed, the stop mode of the variable display should include a mode (third stop mode) that can immediately recognize that there is no possibility of executing the special game. Is possible. As a result, it is possible to make various stop modes when the variable display of the identification information is stopped, and to prevent the player's expectation for the execution of the special game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 or Reference Invention 1-3 described above,
When the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode, a predetermined effect display is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode, that is, the display mode of the identification information displayed (deriving display) by stopping the variable display is the first display mode. If it is, the predetermined effect display is executed in accordance with this. Therefore, it is possible to emphasize and indicate to the player that the identification information is displayed (derived display) in the first display mode, that is, the special game triggered by the display in the first display mode is executed. It will be possible. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect when the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 1-2 to Reference Invention 1-4 described above,
Equipped with state control means capable of controlling the game state when the variable display of the identification information is performed,
The gaming state has at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state,
The second gaming state is characterized in that, compared to the first gaming state, the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is frequently the first display mode. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, at least the first gaming state and the second gaming state are provided as the gaming state when the variation display of the identification information is performed, and the second gaming state is the first gaming state. In comparison with the above, the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is frequently the first display mode. That is, the second game state has a higher frequency of execution of the special game (predetermined special game) triggered by the execution of the display in the first display mode than in the first display mode. Therefore, in the second game state, the variable display of the identification information is frequently stopped in the first stop mode. Thereby, in the second gaming state, the player is focused on whether or not the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode, and the expectation for the special game triggered by the display in the first display mode is given. Can be fueled.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-5 described above,
As the types of symbols constituting the identification information, at least a first symbol type and a second symbol type,
The first display mode is composed of a symbol of a second symbol type of the first symbol type and the second symbol type,
At least a part of the symbols included in the first symbol type in the first gaming state is a second symbol type in the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, at least the first symbol type and the second symbol type are included as the types of symbols constituting the identification information, and among these first symbol type and second symbol type, The first display mode is configured by the symbols of the second symbol type, and at least a part of the symbols included in the first symbol type in the first gaming state is the second symbol type in the second gaming state. It has become a thing. Therefore, in the first game state, the symbol that cannot be configured in the first display mode because it is the symbol of the first symbol type is changed to the symbol that can be configured in the first display mode by becoming the second game state. Will be done. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention not only to the stop mode when the variable display of the identification information is stopped but also to the symbol type.

  According to the reference invention 1 described above, regarding the display of the identification information, it is possible to realize the display of a new mode that attracts the interest of the player, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Reference invention 2)
Conventionally, when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the variable entrance (for example, the special winning opening), and the game ball enters the variable entrance. There is known a gaming machine in which a predetermined gaming profit (for example, a prize ball) is given to a player based on. In this type of gaming machine, the amount of game profit given in response to the entry of the game ball into the variable entrance, that is, the amount of game profit to be acquired by the player (acquired profit amount) is set to a predetermined value. Is known in the display area (for example, see JP 2010-35664 A).

  However, the display of the amount of earned profit as described above has already been adopted by many gaming machines, resulting in a lack of freshness. This Reference Invention 2 is made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to realize a novel aspect of production as a production for displaying the amount of earned profit and to improve the enjoyment of the game. ..

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems,
A variable ball entrance that can be changed into a state where the game ball can not enter and a state where it can enter,
A profit giving means capable of giving a predetermined game profit based on the ball entering the variable ball entrance,
A profit effect executing means capable of executing a profit effect displaying the amount of profit obtained when a game profit is applied by the profit giving means,
And a state control means capable of controlling the game state,
The state control means can control the game state to a specific game state based on the establishment of the control condition,
The profit effect execution means, at least, a first profit effect for additionally displaying the amount of profit to be obtained based on the entrance into the variable entrance in the specific game state, and the specific period in the specific game state. It is possible to execute a second profit effect in which the amount of earned profit is additionally displayed on the basis of the entrance into the variable entrance.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the gaming ball enters the variable ball entrance while being controlled to the specific gaming state, and a predetermined gaming profit is given to the player in accordance with this, At least two types of effects, a first profit effect and a second profit effect, can be executed as an effect (profit effect) for displaying the amount of game profit to be given (acquired profit amount), of which the second profit effect. Regarding, it is supposed to be executed during a specific period during the specific game state. As a result, it is possible to attract the interest of the player to the profit effect executed based on the entrance into the variable entrance in the specific game state and to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 described above,
The profit effect execution means can execute the first profit effect on a predetermined first display unit without executing the second profit effect during a period other than the specific period, and the first profit during the specific period. It is possible to execute the second profit effect on a predetermined second display unit without executing the effect.
After the end of the specific period, an effect of displaying the acquired profit amount displayed on the second display unit by the second profit effect in the specific period in addition to the acquired profit amount displayed on the first display unit. It is characterized by being executable.

  According to such a gaming machine, during the specific game state, during the period other than the specific period, the first profit effect is executed on the first display unit based on the entry into the variable entrance, and during the specific period, The second profit effect is executed on the second display unit based on the entrance into the variable entrance. Further, when the specific period ends, the first profit effect is performed by using the acquired profit amount (the acquired profit amount displayed on the second display unit) additionally displayed by the second profit effect executed in the specific period. An effect of adding (combining) the acquired profit amount displayed on the first display unit is executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the effect of profit effect by changing the display mode of the amount of profit acquired during the specific game state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 or Reference Invention 2-2 described above,
An acquisition information storage unit capable of storing the acquisition information acquired based on the establishment of the acquisition condition;
Identification information display means capable of performing variable display of identification information based on the acquired information,
A prior determination means capable of performing a prior determination of whether or not the acquired information is specific acquired information before performing the variable display,
It is possible to enter the variable entrance based on the display result of the variable display being a specific display result,
The specific acquisition information is acquisition information for deriving the specific display result as the display result of the variable display,
The specific period is a period that can be started when a predetermined number of specific acquired information is stored in the acquired information storage means as a result of the preliminary determination in the specific game state. It is what

  According to such a gaming machine, the acquired information acquired based on the establishment of the acquisition condition can be stored, and the variable display of the identification information can be executed based on the acquired information. Prior to execution of the variable display, it is possible to perform a pre-determination as to whether the acquired information is the specific acquired information. If the acquired information is the specific acquired information, the variable display based on the specific acquired information is displayed. As a result, a specific display result is derived, which allows the player to enter the variable entrance. Then, the specific period in the specific game state is a period that can be started in a situation where a predetermined number of pieces of specific acquisition information are stored. In other words, it is a period that can be started in the situation where it has been determined that a predetermined number of pieces of specific acquisition information can be used to enter the variable entrance. As a result, during the specific game state, it is possible to secure an opportunity to execute the second profit effect accompanying the start of the specific period, and enhance the effect effect of the profit effect.

The gaming machine of the reference invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of the reference invention 2-3 described above,
The specific period is characterized by ending after the specific acquisition information stored in the acquisition information storage means at the time of the start thereof becomes possible to enter the variable entrance. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, the specific display result is derived through the execution of the variable display based on the specific acquisition information stored at the start of the specific period, and based on this, the variable entrance is entered. The specific period will end after it becomes possible. This makes it possible to increase the certainty that the second profit effect is executed during the specific period.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 or Reference Invention 2-4 described above,
The preliminary determination means can perform the preliminary determination even during the specific period,
The specific period is extended based on a new determination result indicating that the information is the specific acquisition information is obtained by the preliminary determination during the specific period.

  According to such a gaming machine, the pre-determination can be executed even during the specific period, the pre-determination is executed for the newly acquired acquisition information during the specific period, and the acquisition information is the specific acquisition information. The specific period is extended when the determination result to that effect is obtained. As a result, the period in which the second profit effect is executed is extended, so that it is possible to further enhance the effect effect of the profit effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-6 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 2-3 to Reference Invention 2-5 described above,
In the specific game state, it is possible to perform a predetermined effect based on the determination result indicating that the specific acquisition information is obtained by the preliminary determination,
When the predetermined effect is executed, the effect mode of the predetermined effect to be executed is different depending on the number of pieces of specific acquisition information stored at that time.

  According to such a gaming machine, in the specific game state, the predetermined effect can be executed based on the result of the preliminary determination that the acquired information is the specific acquired information, and the predetermined effect can be executed. The presentation mode varies depending on the number of stored pieces of specific acquisition information when the predetermined presentation is executed. As a result, it is possible to produce the effect effect by the profit effect and the predetermined effect during the specific game state, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the specific game state.

  According to the reference invention 2 described above, it is possible to realize an effect in a new mode as an effect for displaying the amount of earned profit and to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(Reference invention 3)
2. Description of the Related Art Heretofore, there has been widely known a gaming machine in which identification information is variably displayed and a special game can be executed based on a display result of the variably display being a specific display result. Some gaming machines of this type are configured so that any one of a plurality of effect modes can be selected by a manual input operation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). As the time when the production mode can be selected, it is possible to set various times, for example, during the variable display of the identification information, during the display of the standby screen (demo screen), during the special game (for example, during the big hit game). It is possible. Further, in a configuration in which it is possible to select an effect mode during a special game, there is an object in which the effect mode after the special game is selected (for example, see JP 2006-174956 A).

  However, in the conventional configuration in which the effect mode after the special game can be selected during the special game, the occurrence mode of the selectable time period and the notification mode indicating the occurrence are uniform, and there is a problem that it lacks freshness. there were. This Reference Invention 3 is made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to improve the enjoyment of the game by selecting the effect mode after the special game in a novel mode. .

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems,
A variable ball entrance that can be changed into a state where the game ball can not enter and a state where it can enter,
And a special game executing means capable of executing a special game based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the specific display result,
The special game is composed of a predetermined number of round games,
A gaming machine configured to be able to enter the variable entrance in the round game,
Having a plurality of effect modes as effect modes when the variable display of the identification information is performed,
At a predetermined time after the start of the special game, a selection period generation means capable of generating a selection period in which a production mode after the special game is finished can be selected from the plurality of production modes,
When the selection period is generated in a predetermined round game during the special game, a first notification unit for notifying before the selection period is started in the round game before the predetermined round game is provided, To do.

  According to such a gaming machine, at a predetermined time after the special game is started, it is possible to generate a selection period in which the effect mode after the special game is finished can be selected from a plurality of effect modes. If the selection period occurs in a predetermined round game during the special game, the notification before the start of the selection period is performed in the round game before the predetermined round game. For this reason, after notifying in advance in the round game before that that the production mode can be selected in the predetermined round game during the special game (a selection period occurs), the production mode selection period It is possible to select the effect mode in a new mode, such as when it occurs (starts). As a result, it becomes possible to attract the interest of the player to the selection of the effect mode after the special game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The selection of the effect mode in the selection period includes, for example, a manual selection in which the player selectively inputs any of the plurality of effect modes using a predetermined input means provided in the gaming machine, or a plurality of effect modes. An automatic selection in which any one is automatically selected is included.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 described above,
Second informing means for informing during the selection period in the predetermined round game when the selection period is generated in the predetermined round game during the special game,
When the predetermined round game is finished and the next round game is started, a third notifying means for notifying before the end of the selection period is provided,
The selection period is terminated during a round game in which the notification by the third notification means is performed.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the effect mode selection period occurs in a predetermined round game, the notification during the selection period is given in the predetermined round game, and then the predetermined round game ends and the next round game When is started, the notification before the end of the selection period is performed in the round game (the next round game of the predetermined round game). Then, the selection period is ended during the round game in which the notification is made before the end of the selection period (during the round game next to the predetermined round game). Therefore, when a selection mode of the effect mode occurs in a predetermined round game, a notification (a notification by the first notification means) before the start of the selection period performed in the round game before the predetermined round game, and the predetermined Special game by notification during the selection period performed in the round game (notification by the second notification means) and notification before the end of the selection period performed in the next round game of the predetermined round game (notification by the third notification means) It is possible to prompt the player to select a later effect mode. Thus, by adopting a new notification mode in which the player is prompted to select the effect mode after the special game over a plurality of round games, it becomes possible to attract the player's interest in the effect mode selection. . In addition, the selection period of the production mode is from the start of the predetermined round game to the middle of the next round game, and since the above-mentioned notification is performed from the start of the selection period to the end thereof, the player selects the production mode. It is possible to avoid losing the opportunity to select the effect mode without noticing the occurrence of the period.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 or Reference Invention 3-2 described above.
Equipped with state control means capable of controlling the game state when the variable display of the identification information is performed,
The gaming state has at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
When the display result of the variable display is the specific display result in the first game state and the special game is executed, the display result of the variable display is the specific display result in the second game state. The generation time of the selection period is different from the case where the special game is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the display result of the variable display is the specific display result in the first game state and the special game is executed, and the second game which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. In the state, the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and the special game is executed, and the generation time of the selection period of the effect mode is different. As a result, it becomes possible to select an effect mode in a new manner, such as changing the effect mode selectable time thereafter depending on the game state when the specific display result is derived, and preventing the effect mode selection from becoming monotonous. Is possible.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 described above,
When the display result of the variable display is the specific display result in the first game state and the special game is executed, the selection period occurs after all round games constituting the special game are finished. Notification will be given during the selection period,
When the display result of the variable display is a specific display result in the second game state and the special game is executed, the selection period occurs in a predetermined round game during the special game. It is a thing.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the display result of the variable display is the specific display result in the first game state and the special game is executed, all of the round games constituting the special game are finished. After that, the effect mode selection period occurs, and the notification during the selection period is performed. On the other hand, when the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and the special game is executed in the second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, the predetermined round game in the special game is executed. In this case, a selection period of the effect mode is generated. In this case, the notification by the first notification unit (notification before the start of the selection period), the notification by the second notification unit (notification during the selection period), and the 3 The notification by the notification means (the notification before the end of the selection period) is performed. Therefore, when the specific display result is derived in the first game state and the special game is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select the effect mode after the end of all round games, and the second game state is set. When the specific display result is derived and the special game is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select the effect mode by the end of all round games. Thereby, depending on whether the game state when the specific display result is derived is the first game state or the second game state, it is possible to make the mode of the effect mode selection different, which gives a different impression to the player. Can be given.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 3-1 to Reference Invention 3-4 described above.
Having a plurality of types of special games as the special game,
The generation time of the selection period varies depending on the type of special game to be executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the generation timing of the effect mode selection period varies depending on the type of special game executed based on the display result of the variable display being the specific display result. As a result, it becomes possible to select the effect mode in a new mode, such as changing the effect mode selectable time depending on the type of special game to be executed, and prevent the effect mode selection from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-5 described above,
As the plurality of types of special games, at least a first special game and a second special game in which the number of round games is larger than that of the first special game,
When the first special game is executed, the selection period occurs and the notification during the selection period is given after all round games constituting the first special game are finished,
When the second special game is executed, the selection period occurs in a predetermined round game during the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the first special game in which the number of round games constituting the special game is relatively small is executed, all of the round games constituting the first special game are finished. After that, the effect mode selection period occurs, and the notification during the selection period is performed. On the other hand, when the second special game having a relatively large number of round games constituting the special game is executed, a performance mode selection period occurs in a predetermined round game during the second special game. In this case, the notification by the above-mentioned first notification means (the notification before the start of the selection period), the notification by the second notification means (the notification during the selection period) and the notification by the third notification means (before the end of the selection period) Notification) will be performed respectively. Therefore, when the first special game (a special game in which the number of round games is relatively small) is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select an effect mode after the end of all round games. When a game (a special game in which the number of round games is relatively large) is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select an effect mode by the time all round games are completed. As a result, the mode of effect mode selection can be made different between when the first special game is executed and when the second special game is executed, and it is possible to give the player a different impression. Become.

  According to the reference invention 3 described above, by selecting the effect mode after the special game in a new mode, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(Reference invention 4)
Further, in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-055811), the second starting port is a variable starting port, and the frequency of entering the ball is reduced in the low base state, and the frequency of entering the ball is increased in the high base state. In the low base state, a game is aimed at the first starting port, and in the high base state, a game is aimed at the second starting port. Further, there has been a gaming machine that performs a so-called right-handed game in which the player hits the right side area of the game area when a big hit game or a high base state is reached. In such a gaming machine, in a low base state, a left-handed game is played, and once an advantageous state is reached, a right-handed game is played until the advantageous state ends, and the advantageous state game is sharpened. Met.

  However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, it is difficult to say that the various entrances are simply arranged in the right-handed area and that the efficient game can be progressed. In view of the above-mentioned circumstances, unlike the conventional gaming machine, by arranging various entrances at predetermined positions in a predetermined game area, it becomes possible to diversify the game characteristics and improve the game efficiency. Also, to provide a gaming machine that enhances the amusement of games.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 is
With a specific starting port where game balls can enter,
A variable start port that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than that in the first state,
A first variable ball entrance that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter
A second variable ball entrance that can be changed into a ball-enterable state in which a game ball can enter and a ball-incapable state in which a game ball cannot enter,
Specific identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the specific starting opening,
Identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the variable starting port,
When the specific identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, a specific game execution means for executing a specific game in which the variable start opening is in the second state,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special mode, a special game execution means for executing a special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is ready to enter,
A gaming machine provided with the following features: a specific starting opening, a first variable entrance, a variable starting opening, and a second variable entrance are arranged in this order from the upstream of the game area.

  According to such a gaming machine, a specific starting opening, a first variable entrance, a variable starting opening, and a second variable entrance are provided at predetermined locations in the gaming area, and these are located upstream of the gaming area. A specific starting port, a first variable ball inlet, a variable starting port, and a second variable ball inlet are arranged in this order downstream from. This enables an efficient game progression.

  Specifically, in order to progress the game smoothly, first, it is necessary to set the variable start port for executing the special game to the second state (open state), and set the specific start port for this to these It is placed at the top of the mouth. Thereby, first, the possibility that the variable start port will be in the second state (open state) is increased. In addition, by making the game ball that has entered (passed) the specific starting port flow down the game area after that (gate 28), the subsequent game will proceed smoothly. In addition, by arranging the first variable ball inlet downstream of the specific start port, the ball can be quickly entered when the special game is executed, and a large amount of game balls can be obtained in a short period of time. Further, by providing the first variable ball inlet upstream of the variable start port, the game ball enters the variable start port that is in the second state during the special game, and the first variable ball inlet It is also possible to prevent a situation in which entry is blocked.

  In addition, by arranging the variable start port downstream of the first variable ball inlet port, the variable start port in the second state is used unless the first variable ball inlet port is in the ball-enterable state in the special game. , It becomes possible to enter the flowing game ball with priority over the other entrances. As a result, it is possible to prevent as much as possible a situation in which the variable starting port is not in the second state even though the variable starting port is in the second state. In addition, by arranging the second variable ball inlet downstream of the variable start port, the game ball enters the second variable ball inlet based on the change between the first state and the second state of the variable start port. Since the frequency changes, it becomes possible to add various game characteristics. As a result, it is possible to diversify the playability while providing smooth progress of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1.
As the special mode, there are a first special mode and a second special mode,
As the special game, there is a first special game and a second special game,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the first special mode, the first special game is executed, and when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second special mode, the second special game is executed,
The first special game is supposed to have more game profits obtainable than the second special game,
The first variable ball entrance is in a ball enterable state in the first special game, and the second variable ball entrance is in a ball enterable state in the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, there are a first special mode and a second special mode as modes of the stop display of the identification information for executing the special game, and the special game is the first special game and the second special mode. It has 2 special games. Then, the first special game is a special game that has more game profit that can be obtained than the second special game, and in the first special game, the first variable entrance is in the enterable state (open state) and the second special game. Then, the second variable entrance is made ready for entry.

  Specifically, first, in order to bring the variable starting port into the second state (open state), the specific starting port according to this is arranged in the uppermost stream of these ball entrances. Next, by arranging the first variable ball inlet port downstream of the specific start port, the ball can be quickly entered when the first special game with a large game profit amount is executed, and a large amount of game balls can be played in a short period of time. Enables acquisition. Further, next, by arranging the variable start port downstream of the first variable ball inlet, the variable in the second state is changed unless the first variable ball inlet is in the ball-enterable state in the special game. It is possible to enter the flowing down game ball into the starting port with priority over the other entrance ports. In addition, the second variable entrance which is ready to enter in the second special game with a small amount of game profit can be arranged downstream of the variable start opening to add various game characteristics. As a result, it is possible to diversify the playability while providing smooth progress of the game.

As the first special aspect and the second special aspect, different stop symbols can be exemplified. In addition, as the first special game and the second special game, for example, special games having different execution modes (number of rounds, opening time, profit that can be obtained, and variable entrance for opening) can be exemplified.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2,
A first game state in which the frequency of entering the game balls into the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of entering the game balls into the variable starting port is higher than that in the first game state. Equipped with a game state setting means that can be set,
In the second gaming state, a game ball is inserted into the variable starting port arranged on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable ball inlet port is arranged on the downstream side of the variable starting port. By making it difficult to enter,
The possibility that a game ball enters the second variable ball entrance when the second special game occurs is higher in the first game state than in the second game state. Is.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to set a first gaming state in which a game ball enters the variable starting opening at a low frequency, and a second gaming state in which a game ball enters at a frequency higher than the first gaming state. Since the variable start port arranged on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second variable ball inlet port arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in the enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the first game state is the second variable entrance more than the second game state. It is assumed that the game balls enter the game frequently. Further, as a result, it is possible to make the frequency of ball entry into the second variable ball entrance different depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game playability, and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3.
The game profit obtained by entering the second variable entrance is larger than the game profit obtained by entering the variable start opening.

  According to such a gaming machine, the gaming profit that can be obtained by the entry of the gaming ball (for example, the prize ball that is given by the entry of one gaming ball) is set to the second from the variable starting opening. Increase the number of variable entrances. As described above, when the second special game occurs, in the first game state in which the variable start port is unlikely to be in the second state, the game ball that has flowed down easily enters the second variable ball inlet port on the downstream side. In the second game state in which the variable starting port is likely to be in the second state, it is easy to enter the variable starting port on the upstream side. As a result, the player expects to enter the second variable entrance, which has a larger amount of game profit than the variable start opening, and expects that the second special game will occur in the first gaming state. , Enhance the fun of the game. Further, as a result, it is possible to make the game profit that can be obtained when the same second special game occurs in the first game state and the second game state different, diversify the game playability, and enhance the fun of the game. Becomes

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4.
The game state is not changed based on the execution of the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the game state is not changed by the execution of the second special game, that is, the game state before the second special game execution and the game state after the second special game execution are the same game state. As a result, if the second special game can be executed in the first game state, the first game state continues even after the execution of the second special game in the first game state, so a plurality of second special games can be performed. By generating a game, it is possible to obtain more game profit.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 to Reference Invention 4-5.
The first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 to Reference Invention 4-6.
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A first identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first starting opening,
It is characterized in that the first identification information and the identification information can be variably displayed in parallel.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first identification information that is variably displayed based on the entry into the first starting opening and the identification information that is variably displayed based on the entry into the variable starting opening are concurrently provided. (At the same time) variable display is possible. Thereby, in the simultaneous variation gaming machine (simultaneous variation machine) capable of displaying the first identification information and the identification information in parallel (simultaneously) in a variable manner, it is possible to diversify the game nature while providing smooth progress of the game. To do.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it becomes possible to diversify the game playability and improve the enjoyment of the game while allowing the smooth progress of the game.

(Reference invention 5)
In addition, in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-055811), a plurality of game states are provided as game states, and when a jackpot game is executed, the normal state is changed to a positive variation state or a time saving state that is advantageous to the player. It has become a game machine to be moved. Further, in the advantageous state, when the next big hit game does not occur while the symbols are variably displayed a predetermined number of times, the advantageous state is ended and the normal state is set. In such a gaming machine, a certain effect such as preventing the game from getting tired by the transition of the gaming state was exhibited.

  However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1 and the conventional gaming machine, the mode of transition of the game state and the game state after the transition are uniform, and the interest in the game has not been enhanced. The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine that diversifies the game play and enhances the enjoyment of the game by giving a feature to the transition state of the game state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 is
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second start opening that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than that in the first state,
A first variable ball entrance that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter
A second variable ball entrance that can be changed into a ball-enterable state in which a game ball can enter and a ball-incapable state in which a game ball cannot enter,
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first starting opening;
Second identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting opening;
A first game state in which the frequency of entering the game balls into the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of entering the game balls into the variable starting port is higher than that in the first game state. A game state setting means that can be set,
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes the identification result, a special game for executing the special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is in the enterable state Game execution means,
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is the identification result is provided. A gaming machine,
As the identification result, there is a first identification result,
When the first identification result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the variation of the first identification information and the second identification information. When the number of times of display reaches a specific number, the gaming state changes to the high probability and the first gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state setting means capable of setting the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and the probability setting means capable of setting the predetermined probability and the high probability are provided. Then, when the gaming state after the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, the number of times of the variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information in the high probability and the second gaming state is high. When the specified number of times is reached, the game state changes from the high probability and second game state to the high probability and first game state. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the game play and enhance the fun of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1.
As the identification result, there is a second identification result,
When the second identification result is reached, the gaming state after the special game is finished is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the variation of the first identification information and the second identification information. When the number of times of display reaches the specific number, the gaming state is assumed to change to the first probability and the predetermined probability,
When the game state after the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and when the game state after the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state By performing a common effect, it is difficult for a player to recognize whether the game state is the predetermined probability and the second game state or the high probability and the second game state.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the predetermined probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of variable display of and reaches a specific number, the game state changes from the predetermined probability and second game state to the predetermined probability and first game state. In addition, by executing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same appearing character, the same mode, etc.) with a predetermined probability and second game state and a high probability and second game state, the player However, it is difficult to recognize the predetermined probability and the second game state or the high probability and the second game state. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the game play and enhance the fun of the game. Further, as a result, the player can expect that the game state will change to the second game state with a high probability when a certain number of times have passed during the execution of the common effect, and it becomes possible to enhance the interest of the game. ..

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 or Reference Invention 5-2.
The high-probability and the first gaming state has more game profits that can be acquired than the high-probability and the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the high-probability first gaming state has a higher gaming profit than the second gaming state has a higher probability of winning. As a result, the player expects that the game state will change to the first game state with a high probability over a certain number of times, and enhances the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-3.
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable ball inlet is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port.
In the high probability and in the second game state, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port arranged on the upstream side of the game area, and the second ball is arranged on the downstream side of the second starting port. By making it difficult to enter the variable ball entrance, the possibility of entering the game ball into the second variable ball entrance when the second special game occurs, the high probability and the second It is characterized in that the high probability and the first gaming state are higher than those in the gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable ball entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. Then, the second starting port arranged on the upstream side becomes in the second state (open state), which makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable ball inlet port arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in the enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state are higher than the high probability and the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable ball entrance is high. Further, as a result, it is possible to make the frequency of ball entry into the second variable ball entrance different depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game playability, and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-4.
As the special game, there is a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game can change the game state after the end of the first special game,
The second special game does not change the game state after the end of the second special game,
The first variable ball entrance is in a ball enterable state in the first special game, and the second variable ball entrance is in a ball enterable state in the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable entrance is allowed to enter can change the game state after the end of the first special game. Further, the second special game in which the second variable entrance is allowed to enter the ball does not change the game state after the end of the second special game. That is, the game state before the second special game execution and the game state after the second special game execution are the same game state. As a result, when the high probability and the first game state are achieved, the high probability and the first game state continue even after the execution of the second special game in the high probability and the first game state. Therefore, a plurality of second special games are executed. By generating it, it is possible to obtain more gaming profit.

  According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5, it becomes possible to diversify the game playability and improve the enjoyment of the game.

(Reference invention 6)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 is
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second start opening that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than that in the first state,
A first variable ball entrance that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter
A second variable ball entrance that can be changed into a ball-enterable state in which a game ball can enter and a ball-incapable state in which a game ball cannot enter,
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first starting opening;
Second identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting opening;
A first game state in which the frequency of entering the game balls into the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of entering the game balls into the variable starting port is higher than that in the first game state. A game state setting means that can be set,
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes the identification result, a special game for executing the special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is in the enterable state Game execution means,
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is the identification result,
A gaming machine comprising a launching device for launching a game ball into a game area at a predetermined launch strength,
The first starting opening is provided in a first game area in which a game ball shot at a first launch strength can enter.
The second starting opening is provided in a second game area in which a game ball shot at a second launch strength different from the first launch strength can enter.
As the identification result, there is a first identification result,
When the first identification result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the variation of the first identification information and the second identification information. When the number of times of display reaches a specific number, the gaming state changes to the high probability and the first gaming state,
As a result of the variable display of the first identification information based on the ball entering the first starting opening, the first identification information does not have the first identification result,
It is characterized by having the first identification result as a result of the variable display of the second identification information based on the ball entering the second starting opening.

  According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state setting means capable of setting the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and the probability setting means capable of setting the predetermined probability and the high probability are provided. Further, the first starting opening is provided in the first game area where the ball can be entered with the first launch strength, and the second starting opening is provided in the second game area where the ball can be entered with the second launch strength. . Then, when the first identification result is reached, when the gaming state after the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information in the high probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of fluctuation display of and reaches a specific number, the gaming state changes from the high probability and second gaming state to the high probability and first gaming state. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the game play and enhance the fun of the game. Further, the variable display result of the first identification information does not have the first identification result, and the variable display result of the second identification information has the first identification result. As a result, different game qualities can be provided depending on whether the game ball is inserted into the first starting opening and the game sphere is inserted into the second starting opening. It is possible to raise it.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1.
As the identification result, there is a second identification result,
When the second identification result is reached, the gaming state after the special game is finished is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the variation of the first identification information and the second identification information. When the number of times of display reaches the specific number, the gaming state is assumed to change to the first probability and the predetermined probability,
When the game state after the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and when the game state after the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state By executing a common effect, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the game state is the predetermined probability and the second game state or the high probability and the second game state.
It is characterized in that it has the second identification result as a result of the variable display of the second identification information based on the ball entering the second starting port.

  According to such a gaming machine, it has the second identification result as a result of the variable display of the second identification information. Then, when the game state after the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, the number of times of variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information in the predetermined probability and the second game state is When the specified number of times is reached, the game state changes from a predetermined probability and second game state to a predetermined probability and first game state. In addition, by executing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same appearing character, the same mode, etc.) with a predetermined probability and second game state and a high probability and second game state, the player However, it is difficult to recognize the predetermined probability and the second game state or the high probability and the second game state. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the game play and enhance the fun of the game. Further, as a result, the player can expect that the game state will change to the first game state with a high probability when the specific number of times has passed during the execution of the common effect, and it becomes possible to enhance the interest of the game. .

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 or Reference Invention 6-2,
As the identification result, there is a third identification result,
When the third specific result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the first gaming state, and in the gaming state, the gaming state is not changed until the next specific result is obtained. And
It is characterized in that it has the third identification result as a result of the variable display of the first identification information based on the ball entering the first starting opening.

  According to such a gaming machine, it has the second identification result as a result of the variable display of the first identification information. Then, when the game state after the special game ends as the third identification result is set to the high probability and the first game state, the game state is maintained at the high probability and the first game state until the next specific result is obtained. It is supposed to do. Thereby, as a result of the variable display of the first identification information, there is nothing that changes from the high probability and the second gaming state to the high probability and the first gaming state based on the variable display of the specific number of times, and the special game ends. It has a high probability and guarantees the gaming state of the first gaming state until the specific result is obtained next time. Further, as a result, in the game accompanied by the variable display of the first identification information, it is possible to play the game with a sense of security, diversify the playability, and enhance the fun of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 to Reference Invention 6-3.
The high-probability and the first gaming state has more game profits that can be acquired than the high-probability and the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the high-probability first gaming state has a higher gaming profit than the second gaming state has a higher probability of winning. As a result, the player expects that the game state will change to the first game state with a high probability over a certain number of times, and enhances the interest of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 to Reference Invention 6-4.
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable ball inlet is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port,
In the high probability and in the second game state, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port arranged on the upstream side of the game area, and the second ball is arranged on the downstream side of the second starting port. By making it difficult to enter the variable ball entrance, the possibility of entering the game ball into the second variable ball entrance when the second special game occurs, the high probability and the second It is characterized in that the high probability and the first gaming state are higher than those in the gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second gaming area, and the second variable ball entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. Then, the second starting port arranged on the upstream side becomes in the second state (open state), which makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable ball inlet port arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in the enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state are higher than the high probability and the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable ball entrance is high. Further, as a result, it is possible to make the frequency of ball entry into the second variable ball entrance different depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game playability, and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 to Reference Invention 6-5.
As the special game, there is a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game can change the game state after the end of the first special game,
The second special game does not change the game state after the end of the second special game,
The first variable ball entrance is in a ball enterable state in the first special game, and the second variable ball entrance is in a ball enterable state in the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable entrance is allowed to enter can change the game state after the end of the first special game. Further, the second special game in which the second variable entrance is allowed to enter the ball does not change the game state after the end of the second special game. That is, the game state before the second special game execution and the game state after the second special game execution are the same game state. As a result, when the high probability and the first game state are achieved, the high probability and the first game state continue even after the execution of the second special game in the high probability and the first game state. Therefore, a plurality of second special games are executed. By generating it, it is possible to obtain more gaming profit.

  According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6, it becomes possible to diversify the game playability and to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(Reference invention 7)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 is
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second start opening that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than that in the first state,
A first variable ball entrance that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter
A second variable ball entrance that can be changed into a ball-enterable state in which a game ball can enter and a ball-incapable state in which a game ball cannot enter,
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first starting opening;
Second identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting opening;
A first game state in which the frequency of entering the game balls into the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of entering the game balls into the variable starting port is higher than that in the first game state. A game state setting means that can be set,
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes the identification result, a special game for executing the special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is in the enterable state Game execution means,
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is the identification result is provided. A gaming machine,
As the identification result, a first identification result and a fourth identification result are included,
When the first identification result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the variation of the first identification information and the second identification information. When the number of times of display reaches the first number, the gaming state changes to the high probability and the first gaming state,
When the fourth identification result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the variation of the first identification information and the second identification information. When the display count reaches the second count, the game state changes to the high probability and the first game state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state setting means capable of setting the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and the probability setting means capable of setting the predetermined probability and the high probability are provided. Then, when the first identification result is reached and the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information in the high probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of variable display with and becomes the first number, the gaming state changes from the high probability and second gaming state to the high probability and first gaming state. Also, when the fourth identification result is reached and the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information in the high probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of variable display with and becomes the second number, the gaming state changes from the high probability and second gaming state to the high probability and first gaming state. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the change timing of the game state and maintain the interest of the game for a long time. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the game play and enhance the fun of the game.

  In the present mode, when the number of times of variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information becomes the first number or the second number, the gaming state has a high probability and the second gaming state has a high probability and the second state. It is supposed to change to one gaming state. As another aspect, regardless of the number of times of fluctuating display of the first identification information, when the number of times of fluctuating display of the second identification information becomes the first number or the second number, the gaming state has a high probability and the second gaming state. It is possible to change from a high probability to the first game state. As another aspect, regardless of the number of times of change display of the second identification information, when the number of times of change display of the first identification information becomes the first number or the second number, the gaming state has a high probability and the second game. The state may be changed to a high probability and the first gaming state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1.
As the identification result, a second identification result and a fifth identification result are included,
When the second identification result is reached, the gaming state after the special game is finished is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the variation of the first identification information and the second identification information. When the number of displays reaches the first number, the game state changes to the predetermined probability and the first game state,
When the fifth identification result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the variation of the first identification information and the second identification information. When the number of times of display reaches the second number, it is assumed that the game state changes to the predetermined probability and the first game state,
When the game state after the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and when the game state after the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state By performing a common effect, it is difficult for a player to recognize whether the game state is the predetermined probability and the second game state or the high probability and the second game state.

  According to such a gaming machine, if the gaming state after the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state as the second identification result, the first probability is set in the predetermined probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of variation display of the identification information and the second identification information reaches the first number, the gaming state changes from the predetermined probability and the second gaming state to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state. Further, when the fifth identification result is reached and the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the predetermined probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of variable display of and becomes the second number, the game state changes from the predetermined probability and second game state to the predetermined probability and first game state. In addition, by executing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same appearing character, the same mode, etc.) with a predetermined probability and second game state and a high probability and second game state, the player However, it is difficult to recognize the predetermined probability and the second game state or the high probability and the second game state. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the change timing of the game state and maintain the interest of the game for a long time. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the game play and enhance the fun of the game. Further, as a result, the player expects that the game state will change to the first game state with a high probability when the first number of times has elapsed and the second number of times has elapsed during execution of the common effect, It is possible to enhance the interest in playing games.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2,
The second number is greater than the first number,
It is more likely that the gaming state will change to the high probability and the first gaming state when the gaming state changes at the second number of times than when the gaming state changes at the first number of times. It is a feature.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second number is set to be a number larger than the first number, and the gaming state is higher at the second number of times than when the change timing of the gaming state is at the first number. It is highly probable that the probability of changing to the first gaming state is high. As a result, when the player reaches the first number of times, he / she expects that the game state will be maintained without being changed, and reaches the second number of times while the game state remains in the second game state. In this case, the player is expected to play with a high probability and a high sense of expectation for changing to the first gaming state. Thereby, in the second gaming state, there is a point to increase the expectation of a plurality of times. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the game play and enhance the fun of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2,
The second number is greater than the first number,
It is more likely that the game state will change to the high probability and the first game state when the game state changes at the first number of times than when the game state changes at the second number of times. It is a feature.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second number is set to be larger than the first number, and the gaming state is higher at the first number of times than when the change timing of the gaming state is at the second number. It is highly probable that the probability of changing to the first gaming state is high. As a result, when the player reaches the first number of times, he / she expects that the game state will change and plays the game. When the game state reaches the second number of times with the second game state, Although the sex is lower than that of the first time, the game is performed with the expectation that it will change to the first game state with a high probability. Thereby, in the second gaming state, there is a point to increase the expectation of a plurality of times. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the game play and enhance the fun of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 to Reference Invention 7-4.
The high-probability and the first gaming state has more game profits that can be acquired than the high-probability and the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the high-probability first gaming state has a higher gaming profit than the second gaming state has a higher probability of winning. As a result, the player expects that the game state will change to the first game state with a high probability over a certain number of times, and enhances the interest of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 to Reference Invention 7-5.
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable ball inlet is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port.
In the high probability and in the second game state, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port arranged on the upstream side of the game area, and the second ball is arranged on the downstream side of the second starting port. By making it difficult to enter the variable ball entrance, the possibility of entering the game ball into the second variable ball entrance when the second special game occurs, the high probability and the second It is characterized in that the high probability and the first gaming state are higher than those in the gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable ball entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. Then, the second starting port arranged on the upstream side becomes in the second state (open state), which makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable ball inlet port arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in the enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state are higher than the high probability and the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable ball entrance is high. Further, as a result, it is possible to make the frequency of ball entry into the second variable ball entrance different depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game playability, and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 to Reference Invention 7-4.
As the special game, there is a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game can change the game state after the end of the first special game,
The second special game does not change the game state after the end of the second special game,
The first variable ball entrance is in a ball enterable state in the first special game, and the second variable ball entrance is in a ball enterable state in the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable entrance is allowed to enter can change the game state after the end of the first special game. Further, the second special game in which the second variable entrance is allowed to enter the ball does not change the game state after the end of the second special game. That is, the game state before the second special game execution and the game state after the second special game execution are the same game state. As a result, when the high probability and the first game state are achieved, the high probability and the first game state continue even after the execution of the second special game in the high probability and the first game state. Therefore, a plurality of second special games are executed. By generating it, it is possible to obtain more gaming profit.

  According to the gaming machine of the present Reference Invention 7, it becomes possible to diversify the game playability and improve the enjoyment of the game.

(Reference invention 8)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 is
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second start opening that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than that in the first state,
A first variable ball entrance that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter
A second variable ball entrance that can be changed into a ball-enterable state in which a game ball can enter and a ball-incapable state in which a game ball cannot enter,
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first starting opening;
Second identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting opening;
A first game state in which the frequency of entering the game balls into the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of entering the game balls into the variable starting port is higher than that in the first game state. A game state setting means that can be set,
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes the identification result, a special game for executing the special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is in the enterable state Game execution means,
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is the identification result,
A first condition state in which a variable display time of the second identification information is determined based on a first condition, and a second condition state in which a variable display time of the second identification information is determined based on a second condition, A second identification information variable time determining means capable of setting
In the second condition state, the average time of the variable display of the determined second identification information is shorter than that in the first condition state,
As the game state, the predetermined probability and the first game state and the first condition state, the predetermined probability and the second game state and the second condition state, the high probability and the first game state and the first It is characterized by having two condition states, the high probability, the second game state, and the second condition state.

  According to such a gaming machine, a game state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state, a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability, a first condition state and a first condition state. Second identification information variation time determination means capable of setting a second condition state in which the average time of variation display time of the two identification information is shorter than the first condition state. In addition, as a game state, a predetermined probability and a first game state and a first condition state, a predetermined probability and a second game state and a second condition state, a high probability and a first game state and a second condition state, a high probability In addition, in the game state in which the second game state and the second condition state are set, and the first condition state is set, the variable display time of the second identification information is set to a relatively long time, and the second condition is set. In the gaming state in which the state is set, the variable display time of the second identification information is set to a relatively short time. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the game state, diversify the game playability, and enhance the fun of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1,
The case where the variable display result of the second identification information is the identification result is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the case where the result of the variable display of the first identification information is the identification result. It is characterized by.

  According to such a gaming machine, the case where the result of the variable display of the second identification information is the identification result is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the first identification information. For example, it is possible to increase the game profit obtained by the special game executed as a specific result, increase the possibility of increasing the profit, or increase the possibility of becoming advantageous after the special game ends. is there. As a result, the player expects to be set in a state in which the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in a large amount, that is, the second condition state in which the variable display time of the second identification information is relatively short. You will play a game. In addition, even in such a second condition state, a plurality of game states are set, so that it is possible to diversify the game state and diversify the game property, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 or Reference Invention 8-2,
Equipped with a third starting port into which game balls can enter,
It is characterized in that the second identification information is variably displayed based on the entry into the third starting opening.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is assumed that the gaming machine is provided with a third starting port in which the second identification information is variably displayed based on the entry of the gaming ball. As a result, the second identification information is variably displayed by entering either the variable second start opening or the third start opening, which makes it possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 or Reference Invention 8-2,
Equipped with a launching device that launches a game ball into a game area with a predetermined launch strength,
The first starting opening is provided in a first game area in which a game ball shot at a first launch strength can enter.
The second starting port, the first variable ball inlet, and the second variable ball inlet, the second game in which the game ball shot at the second launch strength different from the first launch strength can enter. Provided in the area,
When the game state is the predetermined probability and the first game state and the first condition state, by shooting a game ball in the first game area, the first identification information is variably displayed and a game is performed. ,
The game state is the predetermined probability and the second game state and the second condition state, the high probability and the first game state and the second condition state, or the high probability and the second game state and the second In the two-condition state, a game ball is shot in the second game area to variably display the second identification information and play a game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first start opening is provided in the first game area where the first launch strength can be entered, and the second start opening, the first variable entrance and the second variable entrance are , Is provided in the second game area in which the player can enter the ball with the second launch strength. When the game state is a predetermined probability, the first game state and the first condition state, a game ball is shot in the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play the game. Further, when the game state is a predetermined probability and a second game state and a second condition state, a high probability and a first game state and a second condition state, or a high probability and a second game state and a second condition state, A game ball is shot in the second game area and the second identification information is variably displayed to play the game. That is, in the first condition state, the game ball is shot in the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play the game. In the second condition state, the game ball is displayed in the second game area. It is supposed that a game is played by shooting and displaying the second identification information in a variable manner.

  As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the game state, diversify the game playability, and enhance the fun of the game. In addition, when the variable display of the second identification information is more advantageous to the player, the player expects that the second condition state in which the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner is set and the game is played. Become. In addition, even in such a second condition state, a plurality of game states are set, so that it is possible to diversify the game state and diversify the game property, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-3,
Equipped with a launching device that launches a game ball into a game area with a predetermined launch strength,
The first starting opening is provided in a first game area in which a game ball shot at a first launch strength can enter.
In the second starting opening, the third starting opening, the first variable ball entrance, and the second variable ball entrance, a game ball shot at a second launch strength different from the first launch strength enters. Provided in the possible second game area,
When the game state is the predetermined probability and the first game state and the first condition state, by shooting a game ball in the first game area, the first identification information is variably displayed and a game is performed. ,
The game state is the predetermined probability and the second game state and the second condition state, the high probability and the first game state and the second condition state, or the high probability and the second game state and the second In the two-condition state, a game ball is shot in the second game area to variably display the second identification information and play a game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first start opening is provided in the first game area in which the ball can be entered with the first launch strength, and the second start opening, the third start opening, the first variable entrance and the second The variable ball entrance is provided in the second game area in which the ball can be entered with the second launch strength. When the game state is a predetermined probability, the first game state and the first condition state, a game ball is shot in the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play the game. Further, when the game state is a predetermined probability and a second game state and a second condition state, a high probability and a first game state and a second condition state, or a high probability and a second game state and a second condition state, A game ball is shot in the second game area and the second identification information is variably displayed to play the game. That is, in the first condition state, the game ball is shot in the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play the game. In the second condition state, the game ball is displayed in the second game area. It is supposed that a game is played by shooting and displaying the second identification information in a variable manner.

  As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the game state, diversify the game playability, and enhance the fun of the game. In addition, when the variable display of the second identification information is more advantageous to the player, the player expects that the second condition state in which the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner is set and the game is played. Become. In addition, even in such a second condition state, a plurality of game states are set, so that it is possible to diversify the game state and diversify the game property, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 to Reference Invention 8-5.
The high-probability and the first game state and the second condition state have more game profits that can be acquired than the high-probability and the second game state and the second condition state. Is.

  According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state in which the high probability, the first gaming state, and the second conditional state have a higher profitable gaming profit than the high probability, the second gaming state, and the second conditional state There is. Thus, the player expects that the game state is set to have a high probability, the first game state, and the second condition state, and advances the game, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 to Reference Invention 8-6,
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable ball inlet is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port,
In the high probability and the second game state and the second condition state, by inserting a game ball into the second starting port arranged on the upstream side of the second game area, the second starting port is more than the second starting port. By making it difficult to enter into the second variable entrance, which is arranged on the downstream side, the possibility of entering a game ball into the second variable entrance is determined with the high probability and the second game. It is characterized in that the high probability and the first gaming state and the second condition state are higher than the state and the second condition state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second gaming area, and the second variable ball entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. Then, the second starting port arranged on the upstream side becomes in the second state (open state), which makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable ball inlet port arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in the enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the probability is high and the first game state and the second condition state are higher and the second probability is higher. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable ball entrance is higher than in the game state and the second condition state. Further, as a result, it is possible to make the frequency of ball entry into the second variable ball entrance different depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game playability, and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

  According to the gaming machine of the Reference Invention 8, it becomes possible to diversify the game playability and improve the enjoyment of the game.

(Reference invention 9)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1 is
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second start opening that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than that in the first state,
A first variable ball entrance that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter
A second variable ball entrance that can be changed into a ball-enterable state in which a game ball can enter and a ball-incapable state in which a game ball cannot enter,
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first starting opening;
Second identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting opening;
A first game state in which the frequency of entering the game balls into the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of entering the game balls into the variable starting port is higher than that in the first game state. A game state setting means that can be set,
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes the identification result, a special game for executing the special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is in the enterable state Game execution means,
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is the identification result is provided. A gaming machine,
As a game state, the predetermined probability and the first game state, the predetermined probability and the second game state, the high probability and the first game state, the high probability and the second game state, Then
The second variable ball entrance is characterized in that when the game state becomes the high probability and the first game state, the frequency of entering the game ball increases.

  According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state setting means capable of setting the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and the probability setting means capable of setting the predetermined probability and the high probability are provided. Further, as the game state, there is a predetermined probability and first game state, a predetermined probability and second game state, a high probability and first game state, and a high probability and second game state, of which With a high probability and when in the first gaming state, it is assumed that the frequency of entering the second variable entrance is high. As a result, the player proceeds with the game with a high probability and expecting the occurrence of the first game state. Further, as a result, it becomes possible to diversify the game state, diversify the game play, and enhance the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1.
Equipped with a launching device that launches a game ball into a game area with a predetermined launch strength,
The first starting opening is provided in a first game area in which a game ball shot at a first launch strength can enter.
The second starting port, the first variable ball inlet, and the second variable ball inlet, the second game area in which a game ball shot at a second launch strength different from the first launch strength can enter. Is provided in
When the game state is the predetermined probability and the first game state, by shooting a game ball in the first game area, the first identification information is variably displayed to play the game.
When the game state is the predetermined probability and the second game state, the high probability and the first game state, or the high probability and the second game state, a game ball is shot in the second game area. By this, a gaming machine for playing a game by variably displaying the second identification information,
In a game state in which the second identification information is variably displayed and a game is played by shooting a game ball in the second game area,
The frequency of game balls entering the second variable ball entrance is the predetermined probability and the second game state, and the high probability and the first game state, which is higher than the high probability and the second game state. Is higher.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first start opening is provided in the first game area where the first launch strength can be entered, and the second start opening, the first variable entrance and the second variable entrance are , Is provided in the second game area in which the player can enter the ball with the second launch strength. Then, when the game state is the predetermined probability and the first game state, a game ball is shot in the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play the game. Further, when the game state is a predetermined probability and a second game state, a high probability and a first game state, or a high probability and a second game state, a game ball is shot in the second game area and the second identification information is given. It is supposed to play the game by displaying it in a variable manner. Further, in a game state in which a game ball is shot in the second game area to perform a game, that is, in a predetermined probability and a second game state, a high probability and a first game state, and a high probability and a second game state, The game state in which the game ball enters the variable ball entrance with the highest frequency is defined as a high probability and first game state.

  Accordingly, when the player enters a game state in which a game ball is shot in the second game area to play a game, the player expects that the game state is the high probability and the first game state to proceed with the game. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the game state, diversify the game playability, and enhance the fun of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1 or 9-2.
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable ball inlet is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port,
In the high probability and in the second game state, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port arranged on the upstream side of the game area, and the second ball is arranged on the downstream side of the second starting port. By making it difficult to enter the variable ball entrance, the possibility of entering the game ball into the second variable ball entrance when the second special game occurs, the high probability and the second It is characterized in that the high probability and the first gaming state are higher than those in the gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second gaming area, and the second variable ball entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. Then, the second starting port arranged on the upstream side becomes in the second state (open state), which makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable ball inlet port arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in the enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state are higher than the high probability and the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable ball entrance is high. Further, as a result, it is possible to make the frequency of ball entry into the second variable ball entrance different depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game playability, and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

  According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9, it becomes possible to diversify the game playability and improve the enjoyment of the game.

(Reference invention 10)
Conventionally, a variation display of identification information is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when a display result of the variation display becomes a specific display result, a gaming machine capable of executing a special game in which a predetermined profit can be given to a player is provided. Widely known. In this type of gaming machine, while the identification information is being changed and displayed, various entertainments are performed to increase the player's sense of expectation, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. As such an effect, for example, information regarding the variable display of the identification information that is currently being executed, the variable display of the identification information that is subsequently executed, etc. An effect for displaying (notifying) a variation (effect) mode until the result is derived is known (for example, refer to JP-A-2002-239122).

  However, the above-described effect that is performed during the variable display of the identification information has already been adopted in many game machines, and the effect mode is also uniform. For this reason, it is becoming difficult to enhance the enjoyment of the game. This Reference Invention 10 is made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to realize an effect that can attract the interest of a player as an effect that is performed during the variable display of the identification information. , The aim is to improve the fun of playing games.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems,
A variable display means capable of performing variable display of identification information,
State control means capable of controlling the game state when the variable display of the identification information is performed,
Special game execution means capable of executing a special game in which a predetermined game profit can be given based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the specific display result,
During the variable display of the identification information, an information display effect execution means capable of executing an information display effect that displays information about the game after the end of the variable display is provided,
The information includes at least first information, second information, and third information,
The first information indicates that the special game is executed after the end of the variable display,
The second information indicates that the current gaming state continues even after the end of the variable display.
The third information indicates that the gaming state becomes a more unfavorable gaming state after the end of the variable display,
The information display effect executing means is capable of displaying at least two pieces of information among the first to third information when starting the information display effect.

  According to such a gaming machine, when executing the information display effect for displaying the information on the game after the end of the variable display during the variable display of the identification information, at the start of the information display effect, the variable display The first information indicating that the special game is executed after the end, the second information indicating that the current game state is continued after the end of the variable display, and the game state after the end of the variable display It is possible to display at least two pieces of information out of the third information indicating that the gaming state is disadvantageous. Therefore, when the information display effect is started during the variable display of the identification information, the player can make an alternative guess regarding the later game development based on the type (content) of the information displayed at that time. It will be possible. As a result, it becomes possible to attract the player's interest to the information displayed at the start of the information display effect and to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1 described above,
The information display effect executing means may display the first information and the second information or may display the second information and the third information when starting the information display effect. Is to

  According to such a gaming machine, when starting the information display effect, there are cases where the first information and the second information are displayed and cases where the second information and the third information are displayed. Therefore, the player can infer that there is no possibility that the subsequent game development will be disadvantageous when the first information and the second information are displayed at the time of starting the information display effect. When the information and the third information are displayed, it is impossible to exclude the possibility that the subsequent game development will be disadvantageous. As a result, it is possible to obtain a staging effect that excites the player's expectations and anxiety.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1 or Reference Invention 10-2 described above,
As the special game, at least a first special game and a second special game,
As the game state, at least a first game state and a second game state,
The second special game is a special game that has more game profit that can be given than the first special game,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state,
The state control means controls the game state after the end of the first special game to the first game state, and controls the game state after the end of the second special game to the second game state. ,
The information display effect execution means can execute the information display effect in the second game state,
The first information indicates that the second special game is executed after the end of the variable display,
The second information indicates that the current second gaming state continues even after the end of the variable display.
The third information is characterized in that the gaming state becomes the first gaming state after the end of the variable display.

  According to such a gaming machine, the special game has at least a first special game and a second special game, and the game state has at least a first game state and a second game state, and a second special game. The game is a special game that has more game profits that can be obtained than the first special game, and the second game state is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. Further, the game state after the first special game is finished is the first game state, and the game state after the second special game is finished is the second game state. Then, the information display effect can be executed in the second game state (advantageous state), and of the information displayed in the information display effect, the first information indicates that the second special game is executed. The information indicates that the current second gaming state is continued after the end of the variable display, and the third information indicates that the gaming state becomes the first gaming state. Therefore, by the information display effect, information (game development) on the subsequent game based on the game in the second game state (variable display of identification information) is displayed. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game in the second game state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-3 described above,
Equipped with a fluctuating effect execution means capable of executing a fluctuating effect during the variable display of the identification information,
The variation effect executing means is capable of executing a variation effect based on a predetermined variation effect pattern,
As the variation effect pattern, at least a first variation effect pattern, a second variation effect pattern, and a third variation effect pattern,
When the second special game can be executed by changing the display result of the identification information change display to the specific display result, it is possible to execute the change effect based on the first change effect pattern during the change display.
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result and the first special game can be executed, it is possible to execute the variable effect based on the second variable effect pattern during the variable display,
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the non-specific display result, it is possible to execute the variable effect based on the third variable effect pattern during the variable display.
The information display effect execution means,
The first information and the second information can be displayed when a variation effect based on the first variation effect pattern is executed and when a variation effect based on the third variation effect pattern is executed,
When the variation effect based on the second variation effect pattern is executed, the second information and the third information can be displayed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the variation effect based on the predetermined variation effect pattern can be executed during the variation display of the identification information, and at least the first variation effect pattern and the second variation effect as the variation effect pattern. It has a pattern and a third variation effect pattern. When the second special game can be executed by the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the specific display result, the variable effect based on the first variable effect pattern is displayed during the variable display, and the variable display of the identification information is displayed. When the first special game can be executed by the result being the specific display result, the variable effect based on the second variable effect pattern is displayed during the variable display, and the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the non-specific display result. In such a case, it is possible to execute the variation effect based on the third variation effect pattern during the variation display. Then, when the variation effect based on the first variation effect pattern is executed and the variation effect based on the third variation effect pattern is executed during the variation display of the identification information, the information display in the variation display is performed. It is possible to display the first information and the second information at the time of starting the effect, and when the variable effect based on the second variable effect pattern is executed, the first information and the second information can be displayed at the time of starting the information display effect in the variable display. It is possible to display the second information and the third information. Therefore, when the variation effect based on the second variation effect pattern is executed, the information display effect for displaying the first information and the second information is not performed. As a result, it is possible to match the information display effect and the fluctuation effect that are executed during the variable display of the identification information.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 10-1 to Reference Invention 10-4 described above,
The information display effect execution means is capable of changing a display mode of information by the information display effect after the information display effect is started.

  According to such a gaming machine, after the information display effect is started during the variable display of the identification information, the display mode of the information by the information display effect can be changed. Therefore, when the information display effect is started during the variable display of the identification information, the player can recognize how the subsequent game development will be based on the display mode of the information thereafter. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in the information display effect even after the information display effect is started.

  According to the reference invention 10 described above, it is possible to realize an effect that can attract the player's interest as an effect that is performed during the variable display of the identification information, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Reference invention 11)
Conventionally, a variation display of identification information is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when a display result of the variation display becomes a specific display result, a special game capable of giving a predetermined game profit to a player can be executed. Is widely known. In this type of gaming machine, it is general to perform various effects along with progress of games such as variable display of identification information and special games. In such a gaming machine, there is one in which an effect (reach effect or the like) indicating whether or not the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result is performed as a character effect by a predetermined character (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. See Japanese Patent Publication No. 2016-154657).

  However, the configuration for performing the character effect by the reach effect or the like has already been adopted in many gaming machines, and its execution mode is also uniform. For this reason, it is becoming difficult to enhance the enjoyment of the game. This Reference Invention 11 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to improve the enjoyment of a game of a gaming machine provided with a character effect by giving a feature to an execution mode of the character effect. Especially.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems,
A variable display means capable of performing variable display of identification information,
Special game execution means capable of executing a special game in which a predetermined game profit can be given based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the specific display result,
A game machine provided with a performance executing means capable of executing a predetermined performance,
The effect execution means,
As the effect, it is possible to execute a character effect by a character displayed on a predetermined display unit,
It is characterized in that there is a case where a character effect is executed in accordance with a variable display of identification information and a case where a character effect is executed in accordance with a special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, there are a case where the character effect by the character displayed on the predetermined display unit is executed along with the variable display of the identification information and a case where it is executed along with the special game. As a result, it is possible to make the effect associated with the variable display of the identification information and the effect associated with the special game relevant, and as a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1 described above,
Equipped with state control means that can control the game state,
The state control means can control the game state when the variable display of the identification information is performed to a specific game state,
When the specific game state is reached, a predetermined character is displayed on the predetermined display unit,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a character effect by a character displayed on the predetermined display unit in the specific game state.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the gaming state when the variation display of the identification information is performed becomes the specific gaming state, a predetermined character is displayed on the display unit, and the character effect by the character is displayed in the variation display of the identification information. There is a case where it is executed in accordance with the above, and a case where it is executed in accordance with the special game. As a result, it becomes possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game in the specific game state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1 or Reference Invention 11-2 described above,
The specific display result includes a first specific display result and a second specific display result,
As the special game, there is a first special game and a second special game,
Based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the first specific display result, the first special game can be executed,
Based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the second specific display result, the second special game can be executed,
The first special game is supposed to have more game profits that can be given than the second special game,
The effect execution means,
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result and the first special game can be executed, the character effect is executed along with the variable display,
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result and the second special game can be executed, the character effect is executed along with the second special game. Is.

  According to such a gaming machine, the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result, and the first special game in which the game profit that can be given to the player is relatively large is executed. When it becomes possible, the character effect is executed along with the variable display, the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result, and the game profit that can be given to the player is relatively small. When the second special game to be achieved becomes executable, the character effect is executed along with the second special game. As a result, when the variation display of the identification information that triggers the execution of the first special game (the display result of the variation display becomes the first specific display result) is performed, or the second special game is performed, amusement of the game is achieved. It is possible to raise it.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-3 described above,
A first variable ball entrance that can be changed into a state in which a game ball cannot enter and a state in which it can enter,
The game ball is provided with a second variable ball entrance that can be changed into a state in which it cannot enter and a state in which it can enter,
In the first special game, it becomes possible to enter a game ball into the first variable ball entrance,
In the second special game, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second variable ball entrance,
In the specific game state, the frequency of entering the game ball into the second variable ball inlet associated with the second special game is higher than in the game states other than the specific game state,
The effect execution means,
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the specific game state becomes the first specific display result and the first special game can be executed, a character effect is executed along with the variable display,
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result in the specific game state and the second special game can be executed, the character effect is executed along with the second special game. It is characterized by that.

  According to such a gaming machine, in the first special game executed when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result, the game ball enters the first variable ball entrance. In the second special game which becomes possible and the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second variable entrance. In the specific game state, the frequency of entering the game ball into the second variable ball inlet associated with the second special game is higher than in the game states other than the specific game state. As a result, in a situation in which the variable display of the identification information that triggers the execution of the first special game (the display result of the variable display becomes the first specific display result) can be executed, the second variable input accompanying the second special game is performed. It is possible to attract the player's interest in entering the game ball into the ball opening and executing the character effect, and enhance the interest of the game in the specific game state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-3 or Reference Invention 11-4 described above,
The first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game. As a result, it becomes possible to enhance the gaming interest of the gaming machine provided with the big hit game and the small hit game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-6 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 11-3 to Reference Invention 11-5 described above,
A probability setting unit capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result,
The probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result is higher than the high probability.

  According to such a gaming machine, as the probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result (execution probability of the first special game), a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability, The probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result (execution probability of the second special game) is higher than the high probability. Therefore, the possibility that the second special game will be executed is increased, and accordingly, the possibility that the character effect associated with the second special game will be executed is also increased. As a result, it becomes possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game when the second special game is played.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-6 described above.
In the specific game state, the probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result is set to the high probability.

  According to such a gaming machine, in the specific game state, there is a high probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information will be the first specific display result, and therefore the possibility of executing the character effect associated with the second special game. It is possible to attract the player's interest in the execution of the character effect accompanied by the variable display of the identification information under a high condition. As a result, it becomes possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game in the specific game state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-8 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 11-1 to Reference Invention 11-7 described above,
As a character displayed on the predetermined display unit, a first character and a second character are provided,
As the character effects, there are a first character effect and a second character effect,
The first character effect is an effect including a first effect by the first character and the second character, and a second effect by the first character and the second character after the first effect,
The second character effect is an effect produced by the first character and the second character and does not include the second effect,
The effect execution means,
When performing the character effect along with the variable display of the identification information, the first character effect is executed,
When the character effect is executed in association with the special game, the second character effect is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first character and the second character are displayed on the display unit, and the character effect by the first character and the second character is executed. The character effects include a first character effect and a second character effect, and the first character effect is a first effect by the first character and the second character and a first character and a second character after the first effect. The second character effect is an effect including the second effect, and the second character effect is an effect which is an effect by the first character and the second character but does not include the second effect. Then, the first character effect is executed when the character effect is executed along with the variable display of the identification information, and the second character effect is executed when the character effect is executed along with the special game. As a result, the character effect can be executed in a mode suitable for the situation of the game, and the player's interest in the character effect can be attracted.

  According to the reference invention 11 described above, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game of the game machine provided with the character effect by giving the feature to the execution mode of the character effect.

(Reference invention 12)
Conventionally, based on the fact that the identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the display result of the variability display is the specific display result, a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player is provided. Are known. Some gaming machines of this type are provided with a plurality of display means for performing variable display of identification information and other displays (see, for example, JP-A-2013-240381).

  In the gaming machine provided with a plurality of display means as described above, the player advances the game by paying attention to the display content of each display means. However, the configuration provided with a plurality of display means has already been adopted in many gaming machines, and the mode of display by the plurality of display means is becoming uniform. For this reason, it is becoming difficult to enhance the entertainment appeal of this type of gaming machine. This Reference Invention 12 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine having a plurality of display means, which is characterized by a display mode by a plurality of display means. It is to improve.

A gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems,
A gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player, based on a display result of the variable display of identification information being a specific display result,
A first display means,
Second display means,
Variable display starting means capable of starting the variable display of the identification information on the first display means based on the establishment of a predetermined variation start condition,
And a suggestion display execution means capable of executing a suggestion display suggesting that the display result of the variable display of the identification information may be the specific display result,
The suggestion display executing means is capable of executing suggestion display by at least one of the first display means and the second display means.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the predetermined fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the variable display of the identification information is started by the first display means, and the display result of the variable display of the identification information may be the specific display result. The suggestion display can be executed by at least one of the first display means and the second display means. As a result, in addition to the variable display of the identification information on the first display means, the player can be made to pay attention to the suggestion display by the first display means and the second display means.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-1 described above,
Equipped with a game board with a game area formed,
The first display means is provided inside the game area,
The second display means is provided outside the game area.

  According to such a game machine, the first display means is provided inside the game area formed on the game board, and the second display means is provided outside the game area. Therefore, a wide display is provided inside and outside the game area. Is possible. As a result, it is possible to make a high-impact suggestion display.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-2 described above,
The second display means includes a left display means located on the left game area side of the game area and a right display means located on the right game area side of the game area,
The suggestion display executing means is capable of performing suggestion display by at least one of the left display means and the right display means when executing the suggestion display by the second display means.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first display means provided inside the game area, the left display means (second display means) provided outside the game area and on the left game area side, and the game area The suggestion display can be executed by at least one of the three display means, which is the outer side of the right display means (second display means) provided on the right game area side. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the suggestion display and enhance the interest when the suggestion display is performed.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-3 described above,
The suggestion display executing means is capable of executing suggestion display in different modes between the left display means and the right display means when executing the suggestion display on the second display means.

  According to such a gaming machine, the left display means and the right display means can perform different types of suggestion display. Therefore, the suggestion display executed by the left display means and the suggestion display executed by the right display means. It is possible to draw the player's attention to each of. This makes it possible to effectively increase the player's expectation.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 12-1 to 12-4 described above,
When the suggestion display execution means does not execute the suggestion display on the second display means, the second display means is provided with a predetermined display execution means capable of executing another predetermined display.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the suggestion display is not executed on the second display means, another predetermined display can be executed on the second display means. This makes it possible to effectively use the second display means.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-6 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 12-1 to Reference Invention 12-5 described above,
After the variable display of the identification information is started, a specific display execution means capable of executing a specific display indicating whether the display result of the variable display is the specific display result is provided,
The specific display execution means may be one in which the specific display is executed by the first display means and the other in which the specific display is executed by the first display means and the second display means. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, after the variable display of the identification information is started by the first display means, the specific display indicating whether or not the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result is the first display means. In some cases, and in some cases by the first display means and the second display means. This makes it possible to increase the variations of the specific display and enhance the interest in the case where the specific display is performed.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-7 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 12-1 to Reference Invention 12-6 described above,
A stop display executing means capable of displaying stop identification information when stopping the variable display of identification information;
The stop display execution means may display the stop identification information on the first display means or may display the stop identification information on the first display means and the second display means. It is characterized by.

  According to such a gaming machine, after the variable display of the identification information is started on the first display means, the display of the stop identification information when the variable display is stopped is executed on the first display means. In some cases, it is executed by the first display means and the second display means. Accordingly, it is possible to increase the variation of the display of the stop identification information when the variable display of the identification information is stopped and enhance the interest when the stop identification information is displayed.

  According to the reference invention 12 described above, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game of a gaming machine provided with a plurality of display means by giving a feature to the display mode of the plurality of display means.

(Reference invention 13)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems relating to Reference Invention 12 is
A gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player, based on a display result of the variable display of identification information being a specific display result,
A first display means,
Second display means,
Variable display starting means capable of starting the variable display of the identification information on the first display means based on the establishment of a predetermined variation start condition,
And a production display execution means capable of executing a production display related to the variable display of the identification information,
The effect display execution means may be one in which the effect display is executed by the first display means and the other is in which the effect display is executed by the first display means and the second display means. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the predetermined fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the variable display of the identification information is started on the first display means, and the effect display related to the variable display of the identification information is executed on the first display means. There is a case where it is performed and a case where it is performed by the first display means and the second display means. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the effect display by the first display means and the second display means, triggered by the start of the variable display of the identification information on the first display means.

  The "display effect related to the variable display" is, for example, an effect display for changing the background when performing the variable display of the identification information, or an effect indicating whether or not the result of the variable display is the specific display result. It refers to various display effects related to the variable display of the identification information, such as display and effect display that suggests the possibility that the result of the variable display is a specific display result.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-1 described above,
As a mode in which the effect display is executed by the first display unit and the second display unit, a first mode in which the first display unit and the second display unit are executed from the beginning, and the first mode A second mode in which it is executed by one display means and then also executed by the second display means,
When the effect display is executed by the first display means and the second display means, the effect display execution means and the effect display based on the first aspect are completed before the variable display of the identification information ends. It is characterized in that either one of the effect display based on the aspect can be executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, as the mode in which the effect display related to the variable display is executed by the first display means and the second display means, the effect display is made by the first display means and the second display means from the beginning. And a second mode in which the effect display is initially executed by the first display means and then the effect display is also executed by the second display means. When the effect display is executed by the first display means and the second display means, either the effect display based on the first aspect or the effect display based on the second aspect is performed before the variable display of the identification information is completed. Either one can be executed. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest in the case where the effect display related to the variable display is performed by preventing the execution mode of the effect display related to the variable display from becoming uniform.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-2 described above,
The effect display based on the second aspect is an effect display in which the display area of the effect display executed by the first display means gradually expands to the second display means. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the effect display related to the variable display is executed based on the second aspect, that is, the effect display is initially executed by the first display means and then also by the second display means. When the effect display is executed, the effect display has a mode in which the display area of the effect display on the first display means gradually expands to the second display means. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect such that the display area of the effect display is gradually expanded from the first display means to the second display means, and it is possible to enhance the interest in performing the effect display related to the variable display. Become.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 13-1 to Reference Invention 13-3 described above.
Equipped with a game board with a game area formed,
The first display means is provided inside the game area,
The second display means is provided outside the game area.

  According to such a game machine, the first display means is provided inside the game area formed on the game board, and the second display means is provided outside the game area. Therefore, a wide display is provided inside and outside the game area. Is possible. As a result, it is possible to make an impact display.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-4 described above,
The second display means includes a left display means located on the left game area side of the game area and a right display means located on the right game area side of the game area,
When the effect display is executed by the second display means, the effect display executing means can execute effect display by at least one of the left display means and the right display means.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first display means provided inside the game area, the left display means (second display means) provided outside the game area and on the left game area side, and the game area The effect display can be executed by any one of the three display means, that is, the right display means (second display means) provided on the outside of the right game area side. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect display and enhance the interest when the effect display is performed.

  According to the reference invention 13 described above, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game of the gaming machine provided with a plurality of display means by giving the display mode a characteristic of the plurality of display means.

(Reference invention 14)
Conventionally, based on the fact that the identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the display result of the variability display is the specific display result, a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player is provided. Are known. In this type of gaming machine, a frame (front frame) forming the outer contour of the gaming machine is provided with effect means such as a movable accessory (gimmick), an LED, a speaker, and an effect display device, and these effect means are used to advance the game. There is a device that enhances the effect by driving it (see, for example, JP-A-2016-195934).

  However, when providing the rendering means in the frame of the gaming machine, for example, the island facility (CR unit, data display, etc.) in which the gaming machine is installed, the relationship with other adjacent gaming machines, the front surface, etc. The opening and closing of the frame must be taken into consideration, and there are usually restrictions due to them. Therefore, in the gaming machine in which the effect means is provided on the frame body, the installation manner of the effect means is likely to be uniform, and the reality is that it lacks novelty. This Reference Invention 14 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that has a feature in the installation mode of the production means and can make the player feel a novelty. It is in.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems,
A game board with a game area formed on the front,
A front frame that covers the front surface of the game board and has a viewing window that allows the game area to be viewed from the front,
The front frame is provided such that one end thereof is pivotally supported and can be opened and closed.
A first frame side display means capable of displaying a predetermined image is provided on the one end side of the front surface of the front frame so as to be rotatable with respect to the viewing window side. It is a thing.

  According to such a gaming machine, the front frame that covers the front surface of the gaming board is provided so as to be openable and closable (rotatably) around the shaft on the one side end side by pivotally supporting the one side end side. .. Then, a first frame side display means capable of displaying a predetermined image is rotatable on the side of one end of the front surface of the front frame on which the front frame is pivoted, between the first frame side display means and the viewing window side of the front frame. It is provided in. The viewing window of the front frame that allows the game area formed on the front surface of the game board to be viewed is located inside (center side) of the front frame rather than the one side end that is the pivotally supported side of the front frame. By rotating the first frame side display means to the viewing window side when opening the front frame, the first frame side display means can be housed in the viewing window side (inside the front frame). Further, when the front frame is closed, the first frame side display means is rotated by rotating the first frame side display means in the opposite direction (one side end side of the front frame) when opening the front frame. Can be returned to the original state. For this reason, even if the display means (first frame side display means) is provided on one end of the front surface of the front frame on which the front frame is pivotally supported, opening and closing of the front frame will be hindered. Therefore, it is possible to adopt a novel arrangement mode in which the display means (first frame side display means) is provided on one side end side, which is the axially supported side of the front frame. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to feel a novelty that has not existed in the past.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-1 described above,
The first frame side display means is configured such that, in an initial state in which the display means is not rotated to the viewing window side, the display surface thereof is tilted toward the viewing window side while being visible from the front,
It is characterized by comprising a maintaining means capable of maintaining the first frame side display means in the initial state.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the first frame side display means is in the initial state in which the display means is not rotated to the viewing window side, the display surface thereof is visible from the front and is inclined to the viewing window side. The first frame side display means can be maintained in that state (initial state). Since the display surface of the first frame side display means is inclined toward the viewing window side, a player who plays a game while viewing the game area through the viewing window can display the first frame side display means with a small amount of line-of-sight movement. It becomes possible to visually recognize the surface (display content), and by keeping the first frame side display means in such a state (initial state), it is possible to play the game by closing the front frame and playing the game. It is possible to secure good visibility of the display surface (display content) of the frame side display means.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-2 described above,
The maintaining means is constituted by a biasing means for biasing the first frame side display means to the one side end side.

  According to such a gaming machine, the maintaining means capable of maintaining the first frame side display means in the initial state urges the first frame side display means to one side end side (the side pivotally supported by the front frame). It is composed of a biasing means. Therefore, by rotating the first frame side display means to the viewing window side, the initial state of the first frame side display means is released, and by releasing the rotation to the viewing window side, the first frame side display means becomes By the action of the biasing means (maintenance means), the front frame is biased toward one side end, and the initial state is restored. Thereby, when the first frame side display means is not rotated to the viewing window side, the first frame side display means can be automatically set to the initial state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 14-1 to Reference Invention 14-3 described above,
A second frame side display unit capable of displaying a predetermined image is provided on the other end side of the front surface of the front frame that faces the one end side.

  According to such a gaming machine, of the front surface of the front frame, the second frame side display capable of displaying a predetermined image on the other side end side facing the one side end side where the first frame side display means is provided. Means are provided. As a result, it becomes possible to provide a gaming machine provided with a novel frame body (front frame) in which the display means is arranged on both sides of the one end and the other end of the front frame.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-4 described above,
The second frame side display means is configured such that a display surface thereof is visible from the front and is inclined toward the viewing window side.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second frame side display means is configured such that the display surface thereof is visible from the front and is inclined toward the viewing window side. As a result, a player who plays a game while viewing the game area through the viewing window can view the display surface (display content) of the second frame side display means with a small amount of line-of-sight movement, as with the first frame side display means. It becomes possible to do.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-6 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 14-1 to Reference Invention 14-5 described above,
On the back side of the game board, there is provided board side display means capable of displaying a predetermined image and visible from the front through the viewing window.

  According to such a gaming machine, a board side display means capable of displaying a predetermined image is provided on the back side of the game board, and the board side display means can be viewed from the front through the viewing window of the front frame. It is said that. This enables various displays using the frame side display means provided on the front surface of the front frame (outside the game area) and the board side display means provided on the back side of the game board (inside the game area). It is possible to enhance the interest in playing games.

  According to the reference invention 14 described above, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that has a feature in the installation mode of the rendering means and can make the player feel a novelty.

(Reference invention 15)
In the conventional gaming machine, based on the ball entering the starting opening, the winning / judging determination is made with a predetermined jackpot probability and the symbol is variably displayed, and when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the symbol is stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol. There was a big hit game that opened the winning opening. In addition, a game effect (reach effect, character effect, etc.) is executed in accordance with the variable display of the symbol, and the result of the hit / miss judgment may be a big hit depending on the execution mode of the game effect, that is, the symbol is a big hit symbol and is stopped and displayed. Was showing the possibility of doing. In addition, as a big hit, there are a plurality of big hits, a big hit that is relatively advantageous to the player and a big hit that is relatively disadvantageous. Further, as a game effect (reach effect, character effect, etc.), a plurality of game effects having different execution modes (effect modes) are provided, and different jackpot reliability is shown depending on the game effect to be executed. As a result, the game interest of the player when the game production with high jackpot reliability is executed is enhanced, and when the advantageous jackpot is achieved, the game interest is further enhanced.

  In the conventional gaming machine, while the gaming performance is enhanced when the gaming performance with high jackpot reliability is executed, the gaming performance is enhanced when the jackpot is relatively disadvantageous to the player as a result of the gaming performance. There was a risk of a drop. The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of executing a game production that enhances a sense of security in a game and enhances amusement of the game.

A gaming machine of Reference Invention 15-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems,
Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on establishment of a predetermined condition,
A game effect executing means capable of executing a game effect along with the variable display of the identification information,
A variable ball entrance that can be changed into a ball-enterable state in which the game ball can enter and a ball-incapable state in which the game ball cannot enter,
A special game execution means capable of executing a special game in which the variable ball entrance can be entered.
Game state setting means capable of setting the game state after the end of the special game to a first game state and a second game state,
Equipped with
A gaming machine capable of executing the special game when the result of the variable display of the identification information is a specific result,
As the game effect, there is a first special game effect, and a second special game effect different in effect mode from the first special game effect,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state,
As a production mode that suggests a predetermined game state, a first production mode that suggests the first game state and a second production mode that suggests the second game state,
When the first special game effect is executed in the first effect mode, when the first effect mode is continued without executing the special game, and when the special game is executed and the special game is finished. And a case where the effect mode is set to the second effect mode,
When the second special game effect is executed in the first effect mode, the special game is executed to set the effect mode after the end of the special game to the first effect mode, and the special game is executed. There is a case where the first effect mode is continued without doing, and there is no case where the special game is executed and the effect mode after the end of the special game is set to the second effect mode. It is what

  According to such a gaming machine, as a production mode suggesting a game state, a first production mode suggesting a first game state and a second production mode suggesting a second game state are provided, The first gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. Also, as the game effects that can be executed in the first effect mode, there are a first special game effect in which a specific character appears and a second special game effect that is different from the first special game effect in the effect mode. When the first special game effect is executed in association with the variable display of the identification information in the first effect mode, when the first effect mode is continued without executing the special game and when the special game is executed, There is a case where the effect mode after the end of the special game is set to the second effect mode. Further, when the second special game effect is executed in association with the variable display of the identification information in the first effect mode, when the special game is executed and the effect mode after the special game is finished is set to the first effect mode. , There are times when the first game mode is continued without executing a special game, and the effect mode is not set to the second effect mode.

  Accordingly, in the first effect mode that suggests a relatively advantageous first game state to the player, when the second special game effect is executed, the effect mode does not shift to the second effect mode. The player can play the game with a sense of security. Further, when the second special game effect is executed, the special game is executed and then the first effect mode is continued, or the first effect mode is continued even when the special game is not executed. The player can play the game with a sense of expectation. In addition, even if the first special game effect that may shift to the second effect mode is executed, the special game is not executed, but the first effect mode may continue, so the player's expectation It is possible to maintain the feeling and prevent the deterioration of the enjoyment of the game as much as possible.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 15-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 15-1.
Executing the first special game effect in the first effect mode is a condition for the effect mode to shift from the first effect mode to the second effect mode.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the effect mode is set to the first effect mode that suggests the first game state advantageous to the player, the first special game effect is executed in the first effect mode. That is the condition for shifting to the second effect mode. As a result, since the effect mode does not shift from the first effect mode to the second effect mode without going through the first special game effect, the player when a game effect other than the first special game effect is executed. It is possible to increase the sense of security and increase the tension when the first special game effect is executed, and to provide a clear game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 15-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 15-1 or Reference Invention 15-2,
The specific result includes a first specific result and a second specific result that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific result,
There is a third game state as the game state,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the third gaming state,
As the effect mode, there is a third effect mode that suggests the third game state,
In the first special game effect, a specific character appears,
As the game effect, there is a third special game effect in which the specific character appears,
In the third effect mode, when the third special game effect is executed along with the variable display of the identification information, and the result of the variable display of the identification information is the identification result, the identification result is the It is characterized by the fact that one identification result is obtained.

  According to such a gaming machine, as the specific result for executing the special game, the first specific result and the second specific result, which is disadvantageous to the first specific result, are provided, and the second state is set as the game state. It has a third game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the game state. Further, as the effect mode, there is a third effect mode that suggests the third game state, and as the game effect that can be executed in the third effect mode, a specific character common to the character that appears in the first special game effect appears. It has a third special game effect. Then, when the third special game effect is executed in the third effect mode, and the result of the variable display of the identification information is the identification result, the identification result is the first identification result advantageous to the player. ..

  As a result, in the first effect mode, the first special game effect that causes a specific character that is a disadvantageous result to appear in the first effect mode is the third special game that causes the same specific character to appear in the third effect mode. When the effect is a specific result, the game effect is set to be an advantageous result. In other words, depending on the effect mode, the game effects in which the same specific character appears are the game effects having different values for the player. Further, as a result, the expectation for the game effect in which the same specific character appears can be made different depending on the effect mode, and it is possible to prevent the game from getting tired and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 15-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 15-3,
In the third effect mode, when the third special game effect is executed along with the variable display of the identification information, and the result of the variable display of the identification information is the specific result, after the special game ends. The game state is set to the first game state.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the third special game effect is executed in the third effect mode and the result of the variable display of the identification information is the specific result, the game state after the end of the special game is the first It shall be set to the gaming state. As a result, it is possible to increase the value of the third special game effect in the third effect mode and increase the expectation of the player when the third special game effect in which the specific character appears in the third effect mode is executed. Becomes Further, as a result, the expectation for the game effect in which the same specific character appears can be further changed depending on the effect mode, and it is possible to prevent the game from getting tired and enhance the enjoyment of the game. Further, the effect mode after the end of the special game may be set to the first effect mode that suggests the first game state.

  When the first special game effect is executed in the first effect mode, the special game may be executed to set the effect mode after the end of the special game to the first effect mode. Further, when a predetermined game effect is executed in the first effect mode, the predetermined game effect that does not shift the effect mode after the special game is executed to the second effect mode when the special game is executed. It is also possible to have a plurality of types. Further, "when a predetermined game effect is executed in the first effect mode, the special game is not executed and the effect mode after the special game is finished is not shifted to the second effect mode. The number of "is a certain number of times" when a predetermined game effect is executed in the first effect mode, the special game may be executed to shift the effect mode after the special game is finished to the second effect mode. There may be more than the number of “game production”.

  According to the gaming machine of the present reference invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that enhances the player's sense of security and executes a game effect that enhances the entertainment of the game.

(Reference invention 16)
In the conventional gaming machine, although the amount of prize balls obtained during the condominium is shown, it is difficult for the player to easily grasp the amount of game profit obtained in different periods. As a result, there is a possibility that the enjoyment of the game may be deteriorated. The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of easily indicating the amount of game profit obtained by a player and preventing a decrease in the degree of interest in the game. Is.

A gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems,
An identification information display unit that variably displays identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
Special game execution means capable of executing a special game capable of obtaining a game profit when the result of the variable display of the identification information is a specific result,
A first profit information display unit capable of displaying profit information indicating the amount of game profit obtained in the first period;
A second profit information display unit capable of displaying profit information indicating the amount of game profit obtained in the second period, which is longer than the first period,
A first display device capable of displaying predetermined game information regarding a game, and (sub liquid crystal)
A second display device, which is provided separately from the first display device and is capable of displaying predetermined game information about a game, (main liquid crystal)
The first display device is provided with the first profit information display unit, and the second display device is provided with the second profit information display unit.

  According to such a gaming machine, a first profit information display unit capable of displaying profit information indicating the amount of game profit obtained in the first period, and a game profit obtained in the second period longer than the first period. A second profit information display unit capable of displaying profit information indicating an amount, the first display device is provided with the first profit information display unit, and the second display device is provided separately from the first display device. Providing a profit information display section. As a result, it is possible to display the game profits acquired in different length periods on different display devices. Thereby, the player confirms the first display device when he / she wants to confirm the game profit obtained in the first period, and the second display device when he / she wants to confirm the game profit obtained in the second period. Since it suffices to confirm, it becomes easy to grasp the game profit obtained in the desired period.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-1
A gaming machine that shoots a game ball in a game area to execute a game,
The first display device is provided outside the game area,
The second display device is provided inside the game area,
In a predetermined gaming situation, the first display device is provided with the first profit information display unit, and the second display device is provided with the second profit information display unit and the identification information display unit. To do.

  According to such a gaming machine, in a predetermined gaming situation, the first display device provided with the first profit information display unit is provided outside the game area, and the second profit information display unit and the identification information display unit are provided. A second display device is provided inside the game area. Thereby, the player plays the game while confirming the identification information and the game profit obtained in the second period on the second display device provided in the inner region of the game region, and confirms the game profit obtained in the first period. In this case, it is possible to see and confirm the first display device provided in the area outside the game area. Further, as a result, the first display device and the second display device are clearly separated and arranged in the inner and outer regions of the game region, so that the player obtains them in a desired period (first period or second period). It is possible to easily and surely grasp the game profit.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-1 or 16-2.
When special games occur multiple times in the second period,
The first period is a period including one special game,
The second period is a period including the plurality of special games.

  According to such a gaming machine, when a special game occurs a plurality of times in the second period, the first period is a period configured to include the special game only once, and the second period is the plurality of times. It is a period that includes all special games. As a result, when the special game is generated a plurality of times in the second period, the second profit information display unit displays profit information including the total amount of game profit acquired in the plurality of special games, In the 1 profit information display portion, profit information including the game profit obtained in one special game is displayed. As a result, the player can easily and surely grasp the game profit obtained during the desired period (first period or second period).

  In addition, "the period including one special game" may be only the execution period of one special game as the first period, or in addition to the execution period of one special game, after the end of the special game. The first period may include the predetermined game state (excluding the special game). Similarly, in the “period including a plurality of special games”, only the execution period of the plurality of special games may be the second period, or in addition to the plurality of special game execution periods, The second period may include the game state during the special game and a predetermined game state (excluding the special game) after the last special game of the plurality of special games is finished.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-1 to Reference Invention 16-3,
As a gaming state, there is a first gaming state (high-probability low base state), a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state (low-probability low base state),
The second period starts when the special game is executed, and ends when the game state is set to the second game state in a period other than the special game,
When the special game occurs a plurality of times in the second period, a plurality of the first profit information display units are provided.

  According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state has a relatively advantageous first gaming state and a relatively unfavorable second gaming state, and when the special game is executed during the second period. It is started and then ended when the game state is set to the second game state during a period other than the special game. Then, when the special game occurs a plurality of times in the second period, a plurality of first profit information display units for displaying the profit information obtained during the period including one special game are provided. That is, when the special game occurs a plurality of times in the second period, it is possible to provide the first profit information display unit corresponding to each special game. As a result, the player can grasp the total amount of the game profit obtained in the second period and also the amount of the game profit obtained in the first period including the special game of each time. .. It should be noted that only one second profit information display unit may be provided to display the profit information acquired during the second period.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 16-1 to 16-4.
When the result of the variable display of the identification information is the second specific result, the second special game execution means capable of executing the second special game capable of obtaining the game profit is provided (small hitting game execution means).
The first gaming state is a gaming state in which a gaming profit can be obtained by executing the second special game,
The first period is a period until the end of the first special game and the first game state set after the end of the first special game,
The first profit information display unit displays profit information indicating the amount of the game profit acquired in the first special game and the game profit acquired in the second special game in the first game state. It is a feature.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first gaming state is a gaming state in which a gaming profit can be obtained by executing the second special game. Further, the first period is a period until the end of the first special game and the first game state set after the end of the first special game. The first profit information display unit displays profit information obtained by adding the game profit obtained in the first special game to the game profit obtained in the second special game in the first game state following the first special game. It shall be. As a result, when looking at the first profit information display unit, it is possible to confirm the profit information indicating the amount of game profit obtained in one special game and the first game state set thereafter.

  Further, as a result, when a plurality of first profit information display units are provided when a plurality of special games occur in the second period, each first profit information display unit has a special game for each time and the first game thereafter. Since it is possible to display the profit information in which the states are combined, it is possible to easily and surely grasp how the profit information shown in the second profit information display unit has been acquired. Becomes

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-5,
It is characterized in that period information indicating an execution period of the first gaming state is added to the first profit information display section.

  According to such a gaming machine, period information indicating the execution period of the first gaming state is added to the first profit information display section. This makes it possible to grasp how long the execution period of the first game state following the special game was for the profit information displayed on the first profit information display section. Thereby, the profit information displayed on the first profit information display unit, that is, the profit information indicating the game profit obtained in one special game and the first game state after the end of the special game, is what process It is possible to easily and surely grasp whether the profit information has been obtained through the above.

  For example, when the profit information displayed on a predetermined first profit information display unit indicates a larger (or smaller) amount than the profit information displayed on another first profit information display unit, the first profit information display unit displays By looking at the added period information, it is possible to infer that it is due to the length of the period of the first gaming state in which the gaming profit can be obtained by the second special game. Further, when a special game occurs a plurality of times in the second period, it is possible to grasp how long the first gaming state between special games lasts and how much gaming profit can be obtained. Become.

  According to the gaming machine of the present reference invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player can easily grasp the acquired game profit amount and prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

  Incidentally, in the "special game execution means capable of executing a special game capable of obtaining a game profit when the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result", the specific result is a big hit (stop of the big hit symbol) It can be a game, and the special game executing means can be a big hit game executing means. Further, in the "second special game execution means capable of executing the second special game capable of obtaining a game profit when the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second special result", the second specific result is a small hit (small hit It is possible to make the second special game a small hit game and the second special game execution means a small hit game execution means.

  Further, the first gaming state can be a high-accuracy low base state, and the second gaming state can be a low-accuracy low base state (normal state). Then, the second period is started based on the execution of the big hit game in the second game state, and then ends when the game state is set to the second game state (low accurate low base state) in a period other than the big hit game. It may be done. Further, a third gaming state (low accurate high base state) and a fourth gaming state may be provided (high accurate high base state). In this case as well, when the third game state or the fourth game state is entered after the start of the second period, the second period is continued, and the game state is the second game state (a low-probability low base state) in a period other than the jackpot game. ), It ends. That is, this 2nd period is also called a "resort period (special period)."

  Further, the second profit information display unit displays the total amount of game profits obtained in the big hit game and the small hit game that have occurred in the second period, and the first profit information display unit displays the big hit game in the second period. And, the game profit obtained in the small hit game can be displayed until the next big hit game of the big hit game occurs. In addition, from the game profit displayed in the first profit information display unit and / or the second profit information display unit, the game profit obtained in the specific jackpot game is not displayed (not added), that is, the game profit obtained in the specific jackpot game. The gaming profit may be excluded. For example, a big hit game (2R fifth big hit game, 2R sixth big hit game, 2R seventh big hit game, 2R eighth big hit game) of the present embodiment in which the amount of game profit that can be obtained is the first profit information display section and It may be excluded from the display target of the second profit information display unit. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that such a big hit game, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player, has occurred.

  Further, in a predetermined game situation (for example, a high-accuracy low base state, during a small hit game), a first profit information display unit is provided on the first display device outside the game area, and a second display device is provided on the second display device inside the game area. 2 Profit information display part may be provided. In other gaming situations (during the big hit game), the first profit information display unit is provided on the first display device outside the game region, and the first profit information display unit and the second profit are provided on the second display device inside the game region. An information display section may be provided. Further, in still another game situation (reach effect, character effect), the first profit information display unit and / or the second profit that have been displayed on the first display device and / or the second display device. In some cases, the information display unit is erased and neither the first profit information display unit nor the second profit information display unit is displayed on the first display device and the second display device. This makes it possible for the player to easily see the reach effect and the like (specific effect), and to easily inform the player of the determination result. Incidentally, it is possible to apply a situation different from these as the game situation.

(Reference invention 17)
In the conventional gaming machine, while the gaming performance is enhanced when the gaming performance with high jackpot reliability is executed, the gaming performance is enhanced when the jackpot is relatively disadvantageous to the player as a result of the gaming performance. There was a risk of a drop.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of executing a game effect that enhances amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems,
Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on establishment of a predetermined condition,
A game effect executing means capable of executing a game effect along with the variable display of the identification information,
A variable ball entrance that can be changed into a ball-enterable state in which the game ball can enter and a ball-incapable state in which the game ball cannot enter,
And a special game execution means capable of executing a special game in which the variable ball entrance can be entered.
A gaming machine capable of executing the special game when the result of the variable display of the identification information is a specific result,
When the result of the variable display of the identification information is the identification result, the predetermined identification information is set to the reach mode during the variable display of the identification information, and then the predetermined identification information is stopped and displayed in a hit mode, and the identification information is displayed. If the result of the variable display is not the specific result, the predetermined identification information is set to the reach mode during the variable display of the identification information, and then the predetermined identification information is stopped and displayed in the out mode.
As the game effect, a plurality of game effects including a first game effect,
As the identification information, a plurality of identification information including the first identification information,
When executing the first game effect along with the variable display of the identification information, in the variable display of the identification information, the reach mode is set with the first identification information,
When the variation display result of the identification information is the identification result, the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the hit mode, and when the variation display result of the identification information is not the identification result, the first identification information is displayed. The reach mode is stopped and displayed in the disengagement mode.

  According to such a gaming machine, it has a plurality of identification information including the first identification information as the identification information, and a plurality of games including the first game effect as the game effect executed along with the variable display of the identification information. Has a performance. Then, when the first game effect is executed and the result of the variable display of the identification information is the identification result, the effect that constitutes the reach mode is executed by the first identification information, and then the first identification information. Shall be stopped and displayed in a hit manner. As a result, when the first game effect is executed and the specific result is obtained, the first identification information becomes the winning mode. Further, as a result, it is possible to enhance the player's sense of security when the first game effect is executed and enhance the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-1.
As the identification result, a first identification result and a second identification result are included,
The first specific result is more advantageous to the player than the second specific result,
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the hit mode, the variable display result of the identification information is the first identification result.

  According to such a gaming machine, the specific result has a first specific result relatively advantageous to the player and a second specific result less favorable than the first specific result. Then, when the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a hit mode, that is, when the first game effect is executed, the first identification result is relatively advantageous for the player. As a result, the player can expect the execution of the first game effect, and when the first game effect is executed, it becomes possible to enhance the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-2,
As the game effect, there is a second game effect,
As the identification information, second identification information is included,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the hit mode, there is a case where the result of the variable display of the identification information is the second identification result.
When the second game effect is executed along with the variable display of the identification information, when the reach mode is the first identification information and the reach mode is the second identification information in the variable display of the identification information. And when, and
When the reach mode is achieved by the first identification information, and the variation display result of the identification information is the identification result, the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the hit mode, and the variation of the identification information is performed. If the display result is not a specific result, the reach mode of the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the out mode,
When the reach mode is reached in the second identification information and the variation display result of the identification information is the identification result, the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the hit mode, and the variation of the identification information is performed. If the result of the display is not the specific result, the reach mode of the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the out mode.

  According to such a gaming machine, the game effect includes a first game effect and a second game effect, and the identification information includes first identification information and second identification information. When the second game effect is executed and the result of the variable display of the identification information is the identification result, the effect that constitutes the reach mode is executed by the first identification information, and then the first identification is performed. There are a time when the information is stopped and displayed in a hit manner, and a time when the effect that constitutes the reach manner is executed by the second identification information and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the hit manner. Further, when the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a winning manner, the second identification result is relatively disadvantageous to the player. As a result, when the second game effect is executed, there are times when the specific result is the first specific result and when it is the second specific result, even when the specific result is obtained. As a result, the player expects that the first game effect will be executed, and when the second game effect is executed, expects that the result is the first specific result, and the game is executed. Can be increased.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-1 to Reference Invention 17-3,
In the case of executing the first game effect along with the variable display of the identification information, in the variable display of the identification information, when the reach mode is the second identification information,
It is characterized in that a change effect for changing the second identification information to the first identification information is executed, and the reach mode is set by the first identification information.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the second identification information reaches the reach mode during the execution of the first game effect, the change effect that changes the second identification information to the first identification information is executed. , The reach mode based on the first identification information is changed. As a result, when the first game effect is executed, even if the reach mode based on the second identification information occurs, the game effect is enhanced by the change effect and the player's sense of security regarding the first game effect is enhanced. Is possible.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-4,
The change effect is executed at a second display position different from the first display position at which the second identification information is displayed,
It is characterized in that the first identification information is displayed at the first display position in the reach mode after the previous period change effect.

  According to such a gaming machine, the change effect is executed by moving from the first display position where the second identification information is displayed in the reach mode to the second display position. Then, the first identification information changed from the second identification information to the first identification information by the change effect is moved to the first display position and is displayed in the reach mode. Accordingly, by moving the change effect from the first display position and executing the change effect, the player can easily notice the occurrence of the change effect. Further, as a result, the player becomes aware of the occurrence of the change effect and can enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-5,
In the identification information display area for displaying the identification information, the second display position is closer to the center position of the identification information display area than the first display position.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second display position where the change effect is executed is closer to the center position of the identification information display area than the first display position. This makes it possible to make the change effect noticeable and make it easier for the player to notice the occurrence of the change effect. Further, as a result, the player becomes aware of the occurrence of the change effect and can enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-5 or Reference Invention 17-6,
In the change effect, the first identification information displayed at the second display position is larger than the second identification information displayed at the pre-change first display position.

  According to such a gaming machine, the changed first identification information displayed in the second display position in the change effect is displayed larger than the second identification information displayed in the first display position before the change effect is executed. This makes it possible to make the change effect noticeable and make it easier for the player to notice the occurrence of the change effect. Further, as a result, the player becomes aware of the occurrence of the change effect and can enhance the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that executes a game effect that enhances the interest of the game.

(Reference invention 18)
In the conventional gaming machine, based on the ball entering the starting opening, the winning / judging determination is made with a predetermined jackpot probability and the symbol is variably displayed, and when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the symbol is stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol. There was a big hit game that opened the winning opening. In addition, a game effect (reach effect, character effect, etc.) is executed in accordance with the variable display of the symbol, and the result of the hit / miss judgment may be a big hit depending on the execution mode of the game effect, that is, the symbol is a big hit symbol and is stopped and displayed. Was showing the possibility of doing. In addition, by displaying the amount of prize balls obtained by the big hit game, when a condominium in which a plurality of big hit games are executed in a short period occurs, how much prize ball amount was won in the condominium. There was a game machine that produced the effect. As a result, the expectation for the big hit occurrence is increased by the game production, and the amusement of the game is enhanced by grasping the prize ball amount obtained in the big hit game.

  In the gaming machine as described above, the amount of prize balls won by the big hit game is shown, but it is difficult to know whether the amount of win is relatively large or small. As a result, there is a fear of distrust of the game, which may lead to a decline in the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of preventing a decrease in amusement of a game while showing the amount of game profit obtained.

Reference invention 18-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems
Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on establishment of a predetermined condition,
Special game execution means for executing a special game capable of obtaining a predetermined amount of game profit when the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result,
Along with the variable display of the identification information, a game effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined game effect,
And a profit information display unit capable of displaying profit information indicating the amount of gaming profit acquired,
As the game effect, there is a first game effect and a second game effect,
The first game effect is more likely to be executed as the special game than the second game effect,
A specific character is displayed in the first game effect,
The specific character is displayed when the profit information displayed on the profit information display unit reaches a specific amount.

  According to such a gaming machine, the gaming machine is executed along with the variable display of the identification information, and has the first game effect and the second game effect indicating the possibility of executing the special game. In addition, the first game effect is a game effect that has a higher possibility of executing a special game than the second game effect, and is a game effect that displays a specific character. Further, a profit information display unit for displaying profit information indicating the amount of the acquired game profit is provided, and the specific character is displayed even when the profit information displayed on the profit information display unit is a specific amount. To do. As a result, when the profit information reaches the specific amount, by displaying the specific character used in the first game effect showing the relatively high possibility of executing the special game, a lot of game profit can be obtained for the player. By notifying the fact, it becomes possible for the player to easily recognize that many game profits have been obtained.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 18-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 18-1
The profit information display unit is incapable of displaying the profit information of the specific amount based on the game profit obtained by one time of the special game, and the specific amount based on the game profit obtained by the special game of plural times. It is characterized in that profit information of can be displayed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the profit information of a specific amount is not displayed only by the game profit obtained by one special game, and if the game profit obtained by a plurality of special games is a specific amount. Profit information can be displayed. Thereby, the profit information of the specific amount is set to an amount exceeding the game profit that can be obtained in one special game, and when the profit information is displayed on the profit information display portion, the specific character is displayed. It is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game of the player when played.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 18-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 18-1 or Reference Invention 18-2,
The specific character displayed in the first game effect and the specific character displayed when the profit information displayed in the profit information display unit has a specific amount are configured to include characters of the same shape. It is characterized by being done.

  According to such a gaming machine, a specific character indicating the feasibility of the special game displayed in the first game effect and a specific character indicating that the profit information displayed based on the acquired game profit has reached a specific amount The character and the character are configured to include the same shape. That is, not only the specific characters displayed in both of these scenes are the same character, but also the shapes are the same. Further, as a result, the player can easily understand that the specific characters appearing in both scenes are the same specific character and that the situation that is advantageous to the player similarly occurs in any scene (intuition). Can be recognized).

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 18-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 18-1 to Reference Invention 18-3.
The specific character displayed in the first game effect is displayed during execution of variable display of the identification information,
The specific character displayed when the profit information displayed on the profit information display unit reaches a specific amount is displayed during execution of the special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the specific character displayed in the first game effect is displayed during execution of the variable display of the identification information, and the specific character displayed when the profit information reaches the specific amount is the special game. Displayed during execution of. As a result, the specific character can appear and the appearance time of the specific character can be increased during both the variable display of the identification information and the execution of the special game. Further, as a result, it is possible to make the specific character appear even in different game situations, and it is possible to maintain the interest of the game for a long time.

  According to the gaming machine of the present reference invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that prevents a decrease in the interest of the game while showing the amount of gaming profit obtained.

  1 Pachinko gaming machine, 7b production design display area (production design display section), 8 production design, 20 first starting opening, 21 second starting opening, 30 first big winning opening, 35 second big winning opening, 39 specific area , 41a 1st special symbol display device (1st special symbol display part), 41b 2nd special symbol display device (2nd special symbol display part), 80 main control board (main control part), 90 sub control board (sub control) Part), 100 image control board (image control unit), 103a third effect hold indicator, 103b fourth effect hold indicator.

Claims (1)

Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on establishment of a predetermined condition,
Special game execution means for executing a special game capable of obtaining a predetermined amount of game profit when the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result,
Along with the variable display of the identification information, a game effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined game effect,
And a profit information display unit capable of displaying profit information indicating the amount of gaming profit acquired,
As the game effect, there is a first game effect and a second game effect,
A game machine characterized in that the first game effect displays a specific character and shows a higher possibility as the executability of the special game than the second game effect.

Images